Home

Power MachTen User`s Guide

Contents

1. libf2c a The GNU Fortran library libfl a The library for flex libg a The GNU C library includes libio a functions libgdbm a GNU database management functions libgnat a The GNU Ada library libgthreads a POSIX Threads functions libio a New GNU C iostream classes libiostream a Old GNU C iostream classes uses libio a instead libkaffe agent a kaffe support library libkaffe native a kaffe support library libkaffe net a kaffe support library libkaffe vm a kaffe support library 216 Power Machren User s Guide Libraries continued libkvm a Kernel memory interface functions libm a libncurses a Math library New screen functions with cursor motion libresolv a Domain name server interface functions librpc a librx a Remote procedure call library GNU regular expression functions libstdc a GNU ANSI C library libterm a Terminal independent operation library package libutil a Daemon support functions liby a The library for yacc Tools for Building X Window Programs imake X platform independent make environment libFS a Font Service library for X font clients libICE a Inter Client Exchange library liboldX a X11R4 support library libolgx a OpenLook graphics library libPEX5 a PHIGS Extensions to X libSM a X Session Management library libX11 a Core X protocol library libXau
2. Save the selected text to a file 56 Power Machren User s Guide 4 2 4 The Window Menu The Window menu begins with three hierarchical menu items To access these menus slide the mouse cursor over the item and to the right This will make their sub menus visible The other items in the Window menu are the names of existing terminal windows The item with a check mark is the current console window The active window is displayed in outline font The keyboard shortcut for these windows is lt Command gt where is the number of the terminal window Positions gt Size gt Order b Don t Save Scrolled Lines Remoue Sc rpled Lines Save Window Environment Send Window Size S Terminal 1 1 Terminal 2 Power Machren User s Guide 4 2 4 1 Window Positions Don t Save Scrolled Lines Rempoue S lt croiied Lines Save Window Environment Send Window Size 5 Terminal 1 Terminal 2 31 2 57 The Positions Sub Menu Windowpanes P Horizontal Panes Vertical Panes Original Positions Windowpanes Command P Position the windows so that they are all visible on the screen creating a windowpane effect Horizontal Panes Windowpane effect with each window as wide as the complete screen Vertical Panes Windowpane effect with each window as tall as the complete screen Original Positions Undo the windowpane effect Power Machr
3. The Positions item is disabled for all Mach windows when the X server is active 254 Power Machren User s Guide 12 1 2 2 1 The Order Sub Menu Figure 33 The Order Sub Menu Hide X Server Make the X server invisible The X server can be made visible using the Show All command or by selecting Server from the window list Hide All Make the X server and all Mach terminal windows invisible Show All Make the X server visible Power Machren User s Guide 255 12 1 3 Automatic Launch of the X Server The X server may be started automatically the next time you log into the Mach windows environment by selecting Save Window Environment from the Window menu This adds a single character lowercase x appearing on a line by itself in your Mach Window environment startup file windrc by default that indicates the X server will start up when the Mach windows environment is entered If you close all Mach terminal windows using the File menu leaving the X server desktop as the only window in the Window menu list prior to this step the X server will run exclusive of any Mach terminal window in the new environment 12 1 4 Quitting the X Server To quit the X server and remove the X desktop pull down the File menu and select Close Window 12 1 5 Running the X Server Without a Menu Bar You can configure the X server desktop to cover the
4. 1 switches If you use gnatmake M q see q below only the source file names without relative paths are output If Power Machren User s Guide A2 61 you just specify the M switch dependencies of the GNAT internal system files are omitted This is typically what you want If you also specify the a switch dependencies of the GNAT internal files are also listed Note that dependencies of the objects in external Ada libraries see switch aLdir in the following list are never reported n Don tcompile bind or link Output a single command that will recompile an out of date unit if any Repeated use of this option followed by carrying out the indicated compilation will eventually result in recompiling all required units If any ALI is missing during the process gnatmake halts and displays an error message o exec_name Output executable name The name of the final executable program will be exec_name If the o switch is omitted the default name for the executable will be the name of the input file without the suffix Unix systems or the name of the input file with an exe extension DOS and OS 2 You may prefix exec_name with a relative or absolute directory path q Quiet When this flag is not set the commands carried out by gnatmake are displayed v Verbose Displays the reason for all recompilations gnatmake decides are necessary gcc switches
5. 12 2 1 Starting Clients When you type lt Command T gt or enter the command xtmenu S the xinit X initialization program is launched by the Mach kernel xinit is responsible for starting XMachTen the X server program and a default set of X clients to display on your X desktop from a startup script xinit may only be run by the Mach kernel 12 2 1 1 The Startup Script The initial X clients you choose to run on your X desktop are controlled by a shell script file in your Mach login directory called xinitrc If xinit cannot find a xinitre file in your home directory the shell script usr lib X11 xinit xinitre is run instead You can copy this file to your home directory as xinitrc and use it as the basis for creating your own customized X desktop Commented lines in this file those with a preceding pound sign are not executed by xinit 258 Power Machren User s Guide The default X client startup script usr lib X11 xinit xinitrc is shown below bin sh userresources HOME Xresources usermodmap SHOME Xmodmap sysresources usr X11 lib X11 xinit Xresources sysmodmap usr X11 lib X11 xinit Xmodmap merge in defaults and keymaps if f sysresources then xrdb merge Ssysresources fi if f sysmodmap then xmodmap sysmodmap fi if f userresources then xrdb merge userresources fi if f usermodmap then xmodmap usermodmap fi Set the root window backgro
6. are interpreted as previously processed by cpp and passed directly to cclobj Files ending with s are assembly language files 7 Using hello m and Printer m as example Objective C sources the following command illustrates creating the PEF executable hello from the two source files intermediate files are discarded gcc 0 o hello hello m Printer m lobjc Sometimes the object file is needed or even the intermediate assembly code or preprocessor output Again using hello c as our example the following commands gcc O c hello m gcc O S hello m gcc E o hello i hello m generate the files hello o hello s and hello i respectively 11 6 4 C C source files are compiled with g g is a special wrapper program that executes gcc with options appropriate for compiling and loading C sources The backend compiler engine is usr macppc lib gcc lib powerpc apple machten4 2 8 1 cclplus The file suffixes C cc cxx cpp and ct all denote C source files Files with a ii suffix are interpreted as previously processed by cpp and are passed directly to cclplus Files ending with s are assembly language files Power Machren User s Guide 227 Using hello C as an example C source the following command illustrates creating the PEF executable hello from the single source file intermediate files are discarded gtt O o hello hello c Sometimes the obje
7. c to cause the assembler source file to be generated using s as the extension instead of the object file This may be useful if you need to examine the generated assembly code 4 y Show commands generated by the gcc driver Normally used only for debugging purposes or if you need to be sure what version of the compiler you are executing V ver Execute ver version of the compiler This is the gcc version not the GNAT version Wuninitialized Generate warnings for uninitialized variables You must also specify the O switch in other words Wuninitialized works only if optimization is turned on Many additional gcc switches are relevant They are fully described in the gcc manual A2 4 3 Switches for GNAT Below is a brief summary of the switches accepted by the gcc command when compiling GNAT programs It is followed by a more complete description of these switches which has been organized functionally gnata gnatb gnatc gnate gnatf gnatg gnatic gnatje gnatkn gnatl Assertions enabled Pragma Assert and pragma Debug tobe activated Generate brief messages to st derr even if verbose mode set Check syntax and semantics only no code generation attempted Error messages generated immediately not saved up till end Full errors Multiple errors per line all undefined references GNAT style checks enabled Identifier char set c 1 2 3 4 8 p f
8. gdb continue Continuing Watchpoint 3 test_factorial factorial result Old value 57179476 New value 2 test_factorial factorial n 2 at test_factorial adb 29 29 return Result gdb continue Continuing Watchpoint 3 test_factorial factorial result Old value 2 New value 57179476 Oxlefed18 in test_factorial factorial n 3 at test_factorial adb 29 29 return Result gdb continue Continuing Watchpoint 3 test_factorial factorial result A1 20 Power Machren User s Guide Old value 57179476 New value 6 test_factorial factorial n 3 at test_factorial adb 29 29 return Result gdb continue Continuing Watchpoint 3 test_factorial factorial result Old value 6 New value 57185676 Oxlefed18 in test_factorial factorial n 4 at test_factorial adb 29 29 return Result gdb continue Continuing Watchpoint 3 test_factorial factorial result Old value 57185676 New value 24 test_factorial factorial n 4 at test_factorial adb 29 29 return Result gdb continue Continuing Watchpoint 3 deleted because the program has left the block in which its expression is valid Oxlefecf8 in test_factorial factorial n 4 at test_factorial adb 29 29 return Result gdb continue Continuing The value of 4 is 24 Program exited normally Refer to the GNAT documents for a full set of documentation on gdb gdb also provides fairly useful on line help gdb help List of classes of comma
9. switch does not affect the code generated for any floating point operations it applies only to integer operations For floating point GNAT has the Machine_Over flows attribute set to False and the normal mode of operation is to generate IEEE NaN and infinite values on overflow or invalid operations such as dividing 0 0 by 0 0 The setting of these switches only controls the default setting of the checks You may modify them using either Suppress to remove checks or Unsuppress to add back suppressed checks pragmas in the program source A2 4 3 4 Using gcc for Syntax Checking gnats Run GNAT in syntax checking only mode s stands for syntax For example the command gcc c gnats x adb compiles file x adb in syntax check only mode You can check a series of files in a single command and can use wild cards to specify such a group of files Note that you must specify the c compile only flag in addition to the gnats flag You may use other switches in conjunction with gnats In particular gnat 1 and gnatv are useful to control the format of any generated error messages The output is simply the error messages if any No object file or ALI file is generated by a syntax only compilation Also no units other than the one specified are accessed For example if a unit X with s a unit Y compiling unit X in syntax check only mode does not access the source file containing un
10. 1 Make two new folders in your System Folder called Control Panels check and Extensions check 2 Select All in the Control Panels folder and then hold the lt Shift gt key down and click MachTen Controls Drag the selected files into the Control Panels check folder 3 Select All in the Control Panels folder and then hold the lt Shift gt key down and click MachTen NFS and Foreign File Access Drag the selected files into the Extensions check folder 4 Restart your Macintosh 5 Run Mach If Mach successfully starts up a control panel or extension in your system is incompatible with Mach You can identify the culprit by restoring and disabling your control panels and extensions by halves until there is one remaining screens Can t open MachtTen Conf Configure MachTen Controls before running MachTen Ce Figure 9 Control Panel Warning Dialog Box Power Machren User s Guide 33 3 0 The Mach Control Panel The Mach control panel is used to configure certain parameters in your Mach system It is normally opened once prior to launching Mach for the first time and subsequently if you want to change any Mach operating parameters To view the Mach control panel choose Control Panels from the Apple menu and double click on MachTen Controls The control panel consists of the Scheduling Priority slide bar and three configuration buttons Wi
11. 296 preferences 260 quitting 277 resources 259 260 administering 265 application level 262 class names 261 command line 264 files 261 locations 262 host system level 264 instance names 261 syntax 261 user level 263 X server level 263 screen colors 259 1 22 server 1 Tab Window Manager 260 twm 260 X desktop 249 250 X Intrinsics Toolkit 262 XENVIRONMENT variable 264 xfs font server 289 Xinjit 257 Xmodmap file 259 xprop utility 261 xterm 260 XCOFF eXtended Common Object File Format 219 xfs font server 289 xinit program 257 Xmodmap file 259 xprop utilitiy 261 xtmenu program 255 Y yacc 213 YP 143 148 ypbind daemon 143 147 starting automatically 148 ypcat application 147 ypmatch application 147 ypserver 144 Power Mach e User s Guide
12. 5 6 4 A Word About Security 5 6 5 The Root Password 5 6 6 Setting Up User Accounts 5 6 7 The Password File 5 6 8 The Group File 5 6 9 Administrative Login Accounts 5 6 10 Writing to All Users 5 6 11 Disabling User Logins 5 6 12 Removing Users 5 6 13 Changing the Message of the Day 5 6 14 Special Characters Managing Your UNIX Environment 5 7 1 Whats Running 5 7 2 Killing a Program 5 7 3 Background Program Execution 5 7 4 Shell Files 63 64 65 67 67 68 69 70 71 71 72 72 73 74 75 77 78 80 81 82 82 82 83 84 84 85 85 86 iv Power Machren User s Guide 6 0 The Mach File Systems 87 6 0 1 Fast File System FFS 87 6 0 2 UNIX File System UFS 87 6 1 UNIX Fast File System Overview 88 6 1 1 File System Organization 88 6 1 2 File Names 89 6 1 3 Access Permissions 89 6 1 4 Time Stamps 89 6 1 5 Link Counts 90 6 1 6 Hard Links 90 6 1 7 Symbolic Links 90 6 2 Macintosh Hierarchical File System Overview 91 6 2 1 File System Organization 91 6 2 1 1 Volumes and Folders 91 6 2 1 2 File Contents 92 6 2 2 File Names 92 6 2 3 Access Permissions 92 6 2 4 Time Stamps 93 6 2 5 Aliases 93 6 3 Mach FFS 93 6 3 1 FFS Within a File 93 6 4 Machien UFS 94 6 4 1 File Names 94 6 4 1 1 Maximum Number of Characters 94 6 4 1 2 Case Sensitive File Names 94 6 4 1 3 Component Separators 95 6 4 1 4 Non Printable Characters 95 Power Machren Users Guide 6 5 6 6 6 7 6 8 6 4 2 Linked Files 6 4 2 1 Har
13. For environments with multiple printers on AppleTalk selecting a printer other than the Chooser printer requires an entry in etc printcap A valid entry looks like this at mylaser LaserWriter An at entry in the etc printcap file specifies the AppleTalk name of a printer An at entry must include the complete AppleTalk name type and zone designator in standard AppleTalk format lt name gt lt type gt lt zone gt A may be used to refer to the local zone The colons at the beginning and end of the entry are required to distinguish the entry from other parameters The above entry designates a LaserWriter with the AppleTalk name my laser of type LaserWriter associated with the local zone Note the use of the required backslash to escape a colon internal to the specification If the name field entry is null the Mach system will retrieve the name of the printer from the information saved by the Chooser Power Machren User s Guide 157 9 5 Extending Remote Printing to Macintosh Applications The Mach UNIX spooling capability is not only available for UNIX applications but is extended to all Macintosh applications even Macintosh applications on non Mach systems through a LaserWriter server named Iwsrv 8 lwsrv is a background Mach program that identifies itself to the local AppleTalk zone as a LaserWriter Remote Macintoshes can select this synthetic LaserWriter with their Ch
14. The first action is to unmountit The second is to remove any entry in etc fstab that automatically mounts it The third is to remove it as described in section 6 9 5 1 Removing an FFS Within a File 6 9 5 1 Removing an FFS Within a File Delete an FFS file with Finder or by using the following command rm f lt FSFile_pathname gt Power Machren User s Guide 119 6 9 6 Space Management When running any UNIX system the percentage of disk space used under normal operation can increase until all of the allocated space is used up When the file system becomes full processes run very slowly if at all and the system is kept busy notifying the user that the file system is full With respect to the file system a key administrative role is to keep the size and number of temporary UNIX working files under control The following techniques are available to keep the file system manageable e monitoring the disk space with df 1 e monitoring files or directories that grow temporary files i e files in tmp should be purged periodically tmp is used by numerous executables to store intermediate results e identifying and removing inactive files e identifying users that routinely consume a large amount of disk space You will monitor your own usage on a single user system By default etc rc contains commands to preserve editor temporary files before removing files from tmp during system startup The following direct
15. a Source_File_N prag Unit_Name gt Rat m a U i pragma Source_File_Name U i m a U i onals Spec_File_Name gt prog21l ads Unit_Name gt Rationals Body_File_Name gt prog22 adb pragma Source_File nit_Name gt Rat prog23 ads pragma Source_File_Name Unit_Name gt Rationals 1I0O Body_File_Name gt prog24 adb pragma Source_File_Name Unit_Name gt Test_Rationals_1l Body_File_Name gt prog25 adb Z onals IO Spec_File_Name gt Rationals provide a simple rational number package Rationals IO provides Get and Put operations for rationals and Test_Rationals_1 is a simple demonstration of the package To get a listing of the rationals spec we type gnatmake gnats gnatl prog21 ads the gnats option does syntax checking only gcc c gnats gnatl prog21 ads Power Machren User s Guide A1 7 GNAT 3 05 960607 Copyright 1991 1996 Free Software Foundation Inc Checking prog2l ads source file time stamp 1996 09 22 14 14 00 35 36 37 38 39h 40 package Rationals is Specification of the abstract data type for representing and manipulating rational numbers All rational quantities in this package are initialized to 0 1 Author Michael B Feldman The George Washington University Copyright 1996 Michael B Feldman All Rights Reserved Last Modified August 1996 1 2 3 4 5
16. applications 164 control panel 15 38 177 protocol 163 stack dual 164 177 MachrIen and OpenTransport 15 164 177 telnet overview 184 Tenon libraries 27 TCP stack 164 177 TERM variable 69 TERMCAP variable 69 terminal connecting 189 emulation VT100 69 supporting 189 windows 51 changing the name of 68 multiple 4 UNIX 4 xterm 260 text file manipulation 112 TEXT file types 98 three button mouse 281 283 configuration 281 default keystrokes 282 example 283 time stamps 89 93 102 zones 36 48 tip activity log 198 command 189 191 194 configuration database 198 200 login script 201 TokenRing 38 41 65 124 169 MTU 43 Power Machren User s Guide TokenTalk 14 touch command 82 Transmission Control Protocol TCP 163 troubleshooting Mach 31 32 TTY variable 69 twm 260 U UDP User Datagram Protocol 124 UFS See UNIX file system umask 137 umount command 124 UNIX access permissions Read 137 Search 137 Write 137 privileges NFS 136 mapping AppleShare access to UNIX access 137 API 6 applications 1 Berkeley 6 command interpreter 49 72 development tools 1 editors 114 environment example 69 managing 84 tailoring 69 file system 94 defined 94 filenames 94 case sensitive filenames 94 component separators 95 maximum number of characters 94 non printable characters 95 libraries 7 11 traditional 221 processes maximum number allowed 37 shell 49 terminal windows 4 virtual machine 6 Un
17. s Guide 6 8 Text File Manipulation Mach gives you the capability to integrate UNIX created ASCII text files into documents that have been created by Macintosh word processor programs such as Microsoft Word and to export Macintosh created text to UNIX applications 6 8 1 Alternating Between Macintosh and UNIX Text Since the Macintosh and UNIX text file formats differ in the choice of line terminator in some cases it may be necessary to translate the data from one format to the other Mach provides several mechanisms to convert text files from the Macintosh format to the UNIX format Mach provides a common text file format which permits UNIX text files to be successfully accessed by both UNIX and Macintosh applications These files have the creator MUMM and type TEXT and are referred to as MUMM TEXT files These files are stored on the file system in the Macintosh text file format so Macintosh applications can access them normally Mach automatically translates MUMM TEXT files to the UNIX text file format when they are accessed by UNIX applications 6 8 1 1 mactext The mactext 1 utility program will create MUMM TEXT files from traditional UNIX files type BINA n1 termination The resultant file will be recognizable by UNIX and Macintosh applications Power Machren User s Guide 113 6 8 1 2 unixtext The unixtext 1 utility program will convert a standard Macintosh text file ty
18. s frame determines how the window will be resized See Table 7 Places to Grab on the Window Frame For this exercise point to the lower right corner of the window frame When positioned correctly the pointer s shape changes to a circle around the corner of the frame Grab the frame by pressing and holding down the select button Table 7 Places to Grab on the Window Frame If you want to stretch or shrink the window Point to diagonally from the bottom left frame s lower left corner top left frame s upper left corner top right frame s upper right corner bottom right frame s lower right corner Power MachrTen User s Guide 271 Step 2 Enlarge or Shrink the Window With the select button still pressed slide the mouse so that the pointer moves away from the window Now slide the mouse so the pointer moves toward the window As you move the mouse the pointer on the screen drags an elastic outline of the window The outline shows you the new size of the window Now stretch the window until it reaches the lower right corner of the root window as shown in Figure 37 A Window and Its Elastic Outline Figure 37 A Window and Its Elastic Outline Step 3 Release the Frame When the elastic outline is the correct size release the mouse button The screen is redrawn with the window filling the outline 272 Power Machren User s Guide 12 2 2 6 Changing a Window Into an Ico
19. velounna ads vilunna ads long_unit_name ads grparchi ads grparchi A2 80 Power Machren User s Guide A2 11 0 Other Utility Programs This chapter discusses some other utility programs available in the Ada environment A2 11 1 Using Other Utility Programs With GNAT The object files generated by GNAT are in standard system format and in particular the debugging information uses this format This means programs generated by GNAT can be used with existing utilities that depend on these formats In general any utility program that works with C will also work with Ada programs generated by GNAT This includes software utilities such as gprof a profiling program gdb the FSF debugger and utilities such as Purify A2 11 2 The Naming Scheme of GNAT In order to interpret the output from GNAT it is necessary to understand the conventions used to generate link names from the Ada entity names All names are in all lower case letters With the exception of library procedure names the mechanism used is simply to use the full expanded Ada name with dots replaced by double underscores For example suppose we have the following package spec package QRS is MN Integer end QRS The variable MN has a full expanded Ada name of QRS MN so the corresponding link name is qrs__mn Power Machren User s Guide A2 81 Of course ifa pragma Export is used this may be overridden package Exports is Varl Integer pragma Export
20. 148 Power Machren User s Guide Both ypcat and ypmatch have manual page entries with more information about running the applications and other parameters The manual pages for ypcat and ypmatch are available by typing the man ypcat or man ypmatch commands 8 6 Configure Mach for Automatic Portmap and Ypbind Startup After proper operation has been confirmed the Mach system should be configured to automatically start portmap and ypbind when Mach is launched This is done by modifying the etc rc conf file and setting the START_portmap and START_ypbind configuration settings to the string yes START_portmap yes START_ypbind yes Any subsequent restarts of the configured Mach system will automatically cause ypbind and portmap to be started and facilitate the automatic access to NIS data Power Machren User s Guide 149 9 0 Printing Mach supports UNIX style spooled printing to PostScript LaserWriters on AppleTalk to ASCII based ImageWriters on serial ports and to remote UNIX printers via Berkeley s line printer daemon pd 8 These printing capabilities support both UNIX and Macintosh applications This means that with Mache your Macintosh can take full advantage of UNIX style printer sharing and printer administration With this hybrid system interconnected Mach and other UNIX systems are able to spool text and PostScript to traditional UNIX printers as well as AppleTalk LaserWriter and ImageWriter
21. Addison Wesley 1994 ISBN 0 201 62448 6 Introduction to Programming Concepts and Methods with Ada by J F Smith and T S Frank McGraw Hill 1994 ISBN 0 07 911725 2 Teach Yourself the Unix C Shell in 14 Days Unix Library by D Ennis J C Armstrong Jr Sams 1994 ISBN 0672305402 Teach Yourself Advanced C in 21 Days by Bradley Jones Gregory Guntle Sams 1994 ISBN 0672304716 C The C Programming Language Second Edition by Bjarne Stroustrup Addison Wesley ISBN 0 201 53992 6 Practical C Programming by Steve Oualline O Reilly amp Associates Inc ISBN 1 56592 139 9 Teach Yourself C Programming in 21 Days by Jesse Liberty Power Machren User s Guide C 3 Objective C Object Oriented Programming An Evolutionary Approach Brad J Cox Andrew J Novobilski Addison Wesley 1991 ISBN 0 201 54834 8 Japanese 4 8101 8046 8 The first book on Objective C which actually is a book on object oriented system development using Objective C Objective C Object Oriented Programming Techniques Lewis J Pinson Richard S Wiener Addison Wesley 1991 ISBN 0 201 50828 1 Japanese 4 8101 8054 9 Includes many examples discusses both Stepstone s and NeXT s versions of Objective C and the differences between the two An Introduction to Object Oriented Programming Timothy Budd Addison Wesley ISBN 0 201 54709 0 Japanese 4 8101 8048 4 An intro to the topic of
22. If the machine is a Mach system refer to the instructions below It is possible this step is unnecessary if a machine already exists on your network that is doing spooling Test that the remote machine can print by printing a document while logged on to that machine 2 Edit the local etc printcap file and uncomment remove the pound marks the beginning of each line for the remote entry The uncommented entry should look like this substitute the printer name you wish to use for mumm on the first line and the remote host machine name on the second line rm lt host gt mumm lp rp lp rm mumm sd var spool mummlpd 1f var adm ldp errs 3 In addition to knowing the remote spooler s name and printer you must also have print access to the remote host To obtain print access your host name must be entered in the remote spooler s etc hosts equiv or etc hosts Ipd file Enter the full domain name in either file for example myhost tenon com 4 Create the spool directory var spool mummlpd The actual name chosen typically references the remote host name The directory name must match the sd entry above Give write permission to all users by using the chmod 1 command Power Machren User s Guide 155 5 Start the line printer daemon lpd 6 Print pr etc passwd lpr Pmumm The name used with the P option corresponds to the first line of the remote printer entry in etc printcap 9 3 2 Receiv
23. In this case it may be necessary to touch 8 the file from within Mach to rebuild the project correctly Power Machren User s Guide 103 6 5 Mach Root File System Layout The Mach root file system is delivered as an FFS within a file The FFS file is named MachTen_FFS and resides in the same folder as the Mach application A companion folder named MachTen_HFS provides for UFS oriented storage At the top of the Mach file system hierarchy is the UNIX root directory also referred to as The path is a special case in Mach that allows UNIX processes to refer to files and folders outside of the Mach root is interpreted to mean the real root of the Macintosh volume that contains the Mach file system hierarchy The corresponding routines in the Mach libraries getwd 3 have been modified to understand a path name that begins with 6 5 1 The root Directory Tree The root directory is represented by a and contains the following directories Name Description CDROM Mount point for Mach CD ROM base Base of source code and place for building binaries in Mach distribution bin Basic user utilities bootvol Symbolic link or mount point for the root of the MacOS boot volume dev Block character and other special device files etc System configuration files and scripts hfs Symbolic link to MachTen_HFS lost found Storage for files lost or corrupted by file syst
24. Macintosh The port labeled the modem port named dev ttya under Mach is the recommended port The printer port dev ttyb is also acceptable Note however that use of the printer port is usually reserved for AppleTalk 204 Power Machren User s Guide To make Machien aware of your serial port selection you must modify the etc ttys see ttys 5 database file This file contains information that is used to initialize and control the use of the serial port selected including port speed type flow control and active status name getty type status comments ttya etc getty std 9600 unknown off secure ttyb etc getty std 9600 unknown off secure By default the Macintosh ports under Mach are set to 9600 baud and disabled status off By way of example an entry describing a 2400 baud modem connected to the modem port and activated would appear as follows ttya etc getty std 2400 unknown on secure Refer to gettytab 5 for details on the various types of line configurations available under Mach To enable flow control on the serial port change the ttya field to ttyfa The in the Mach device name indicates hardware flow control on that serial port You must either send a hang up signal see kill 8 to the init process see init 8 or restart your Mach system to activate any modifications made to etc ttys 10 15 10 2 Login Authentication When a remote SLIP host initiates a c
25. Raw floppies may be accessed via tar 1 for example but they cannot be mounted To eject a raw floppy use the eject 1 command The eject command is eject 1 floppy will eject 110 Power Machren User s Guide 6 7 Accessing Macintosh Files from UNIX Applications 6 7 1 AppleSingle Encapsulation In contrast to UNIX files which have only one stream of data Macintosh files may have two streams or forks of data These streams are called the data fork and the resource fork In order to preserve all of the data in a Macintosh file when it is accessed by a UNIX application it is necessary to encapsulate the two streams of data into a single stream Consider the case of using the UNIX cp 1 command to copy a Macintosh file It is most desirable that both forks of the file be copied from the source to the destination Apple has defined a standard for the encapsulation of Macintosh files into a single stream known as the AppleSingle format Mach uses this method of encapsulation 6 7 2 Differentiating UNIX and Macintosh Files In order to determine whether or not a file must be encapsulated in the AppleSingle format it is necessary to be able differentiate UNIX files from Macintosh files Since Mach uses the file creator MUMM for all UNIX files all files with any creator other than MUMM must be Macintosh files Therefore any file with a creator other than MUMM is automatically encapsulated in the AppleS
26. The switch g or any upper case switch other than A or L or switch that is more than one character is passed to gcc e g 0 gnato etc Source amp Library search path switches Adir Equivalent to aLdir alIdiv aOdir When looking for library and object files look also in directory dir The order in which library files search is undertaken is described in section 4 4 Search Paths and the Run Time Library RTL aIdir When looking for source files also look in directory dir Idir Equivalent to aOdir aldir Do not look for source library or object files in the default directory A2 62 Power Machren User s Guide Lvar Add directory dir to the list of directories in which the linker will search for libraries This is equivalent to largs Ldir General compiler binder or linker switches cargs options Compiler arguments Without cargs gnatmake uses gcc c to perform compilations Otherwise gnatmake uses gcc c c_opts where c_optsisa list of parameters including all the options encountered in the set of cargs switches present on the gnatmake command line A given sublist of cargs options is terminated upon encountering another cargs bargs or largs By default gnatmake a compiles all GNAT internal files with gcc c gnatg rather than gcc c bargs options Binde
27. You should then see your remote system s prompt 2 IMPORTANT While you have your remote system s prompt pull down the MachrIen File menu and select the last item in the menu You will be presented with a standard Save dialog Save cm out1 into your dev folder Use cm out2 cm out3 etc for dial outs to other phone numbers To exit the tip program press the lt return gt lt gt lt gt keys and then press lt return gt again The etc remote file controls which lines are accessible to the tip command The first few lines already have entries You will have to add more entries if you have more dial outs The etc pppclient script does not use etc remote Power Machren User s Guide 195 Once dial out access has been established it is time to edit the etc pppclient script You will probably want to print out this script and study it a bit before making any changes It contains complete instructions Ina nutshell you must set your dial out line to the LINE variable and your login account and password to the CHAT variable There is a debugging flag which is initially set to DEBUG_ON The pppd program will send many messages to your console when a client connects This can be disabled by setting the DEBUG_OFF to the DEBUG variable You should use the tip command to manually log in to your PPP server so that you can take exact notes on the interaction before trying
28. configuration file But suppose we prefer to follow GNAT s preferences We must name our files according to the units they contain This can cause a problem if a unit s name is longer than our computer s maximum name length For example the Apple Macintosh has a file name limit of 31 characters Because our GNAT file names all end with a dot and a 3 letter extension effectively we have a 27 character limit on the file name For systems with limits on file names GNAT has an algorithm krunch for crunching its preferred file names down to the limit On the Mac if we add the flag gnatk27 to a gnatmake invocation GNAT will assume that all source file names follow the krunch algorithm for 27 characters The algorithm is a bit involved it is documented a bit in the GNAT Users Guide Suffice it to say that if the file name has 27 characters or less it is used without change Suppose the file name is long How do we determine its krunched name The tool gnatk8 gives us this capability This is an odd name it comes from the fact that file names in DOS or OS 2 FAT file systems are 8 characters or less the tool was developed originally for those systems Given a unit Very_Long_Unit_Name Long_Child_Package_Name stored in a file some_file adb We can rename this file correctly on the Mac in two steps First ask gnatk8 what the name should be gnatk8 Very _Long_Unit_Name Long_Child_Package_Name 27 verlonuninamlonchilpackname Then r
29. done command done This command indicates a successful login The fail command fail This command indicates an unsuccessful login Blank lines and lines beginning with are ignored Use the v option to tip to display the command exchange with a remote host as a method of debugging special login script files 202 Power Machren User s Guide 10 15 9 6 Header Compression Mach will enable SLIP header compression for initiating SLIP sessions if a hc field is added to the desired SLIP entry in etc remote joeslip she dv dev ttyfa br 2400 cu dev ttya at hayes pn 5551212 du s a 89 0 0 2 sm 225 0 0 0 da 89 0 0 1 st slip ls etc login script joe Header compression is disabled in the default configuration If header compression is enabled a corresponding flag should be set in your SLIP dial in server database The dial in server configuration for Mach systems is described below 10 15 9 7 Setting a Default Route Mach will make the remote host in a SLIP connection the default route if no default route exists on your system and if a rt parameter is added to the desired SLIP entry in etc remote Refer to route 8 joeslip the dv dev ttyfa br 2400 cu dev ttya at hayes pn 5551212 du sa 89 0 0 2 sm 225 0 0 0 da 89 0 0 1 rt st slip ls etc login script joe All packets bound for networks unknown to your Mach system are directed to the default
30. earlier syntax check steps just to get the listings GNAT 3 05 960607 Copyright 1991 1996 Free Software Foundation Inc Compiling prog22 adb source file time stamp 1996 09 22 14 14 00 package body Rationals is 1 2 3 4 Body of the abstract data type for representing 5 and manipulating rational numbers 6 gt 7 Author Michael B Feldman The George Washington University 8 Copyright 1996 Michael B Feldman 9 Last Modified August 1996 0 1 1 1 Power Machren User s Guide A1 11 T2 local function GCD not provided to clients 13 14 function GCD M Positive N Positive return Positive is 15 finds the greatest common divisor of and N 16 Pre M and N are defined La Post returns the GCD of M and N by Euclid s Algorithm 18 19 R Natural 20 TempM Positive 21 TempN Positive 22 23 begin GCD 24 295 TempM M 26 TempN N Zak 28 R TempM rem TempN 29 30 while R 0 loop 31 TempM TempN 32 TempN R SEA R TempM rem TempN 34 end loop 35u 36 return TempN 37 38 end GCD 3 40 xported operations 41 42 function X Integer Y Integer return Rational is 43 G Positive 44 begin 45 46 if Y 0 then 47 raise ZeroDenominator 48 end if 49 50 if X 0 then return Numerator gt 0 Denominator gt 1 52 e
31. fusr etc portmap fusr fete ntsd fbin sh telnet claret fbin sh rlogin parson rlogin parson fbin sh ps lax ia m TTY Window Z Terminal 3 ps lax F UID FID PPID PRI NI ADDR SZ RSS STAT TT 1 0 1 0 0 0 698f2c 37K S3K 3 1 0 19 1 0 0 66531e 13K 29K U 1 0 25 1 0 0 64ede6 SSK 71K 3 1 0 45 Hi 0 0 577300 87K 103K 3 1 0 29 1 0 0 6444fc 35K SIK 3 co 1 0 58 25 0 0 5S5dbec2 46K 62K 3 po 1 0 60 58 0 0 507658 46K 62K 3 po 1 0 40 1 0 0 Sbis3a 61K 77K 3 wO 1 0 43 1 0 0 5a39be 60K 76K 3 wO 1 0 51 29 0 0 638a9e 42K 58K 3 w 1 0 55 51 0 0 621ff4 69K 85K 3 wO 1 0 56 29 0 0 6075de 32K 48K 3 wi 400001 0 57 56 0 0 5f76a2 52K 68K wi 1 0 59 57 0 0 Sf a2 52K 68K 3 wi 1 0 63 29 0 0 4f4b5a 62K 78K 3 w2 1 0 154 63 2 0 3511 e 116K 140K R we om Base Address in Memory Scheduler Priority Status Parent Process ID Total Size Process ID Bytes ID of User Code Size Ruming Process Bytes ruming sleeping Figure 24 Using ps to Show What is Running Power Machren User s Guide 85 5 7 2 Killing a Program The kill 1 program is used in conjunction with the ps program to abort the execution of a program First use ps to determine the process ID PID that you wish to abort Then use the kill program with that process ID to terminate that program Occasionally after you execute kill you may receive a message telling you that the program actually terminated This delay results from the fact that to terminate a program
32. imported from other operating systems For example files imported from MS DOS ona PC are likely to have lines ended by CR LF The end of a source file is normally represented by the physical end of file However the control character 16 1A SUB is also represented as signalling the end of the source file Again this is provided for compatibility with imported MS DOS files where this control code is used to represent the end of file Power Machren User s Guide A2 13 Each file contains a single Ada compilation unit including any pragmas associated with the unit For example this means you must place a package declaration a package spec and the corresponding body in separate files An Ada compilation which is a sequence of compilation units is represented using a sequence of files Similarly you will place each subunit or child unit in a separate file A2 3 2 Foreign Language Representation GNAT supports the standard character sets defined in Ada 95 A2 3 2 1 Latin 1 The basic character set is Latin 1 This character set is defined by ISO standard 8859 part 1 The lower half character codes 16 00 16 7F is identical to standard ASCII coding but the upper half is used to represent additional characters This includes extended letters used by European languages such as the umlaut used in German For a complete list of Latin 1 codes and their encodings see the source file of library unit Ada Chara
33. the Default Domain Name Server IP Address and Domain in the MacT CP control panel 3 2 3 5 Netmasks If subnetworking is implemented on your network the Netmask fields are used to derive the network and host node portions of the internet address for a given network interface Netmasks are entered either in standard internet dot format or in hexadecimal format preceded by the characters 0x The default value is taken from the MacTCP control panel If subnetworking is not employed on any of your networks the Netmask field for each configured interface should be left blank In this case Mach will determine the correct netmask based on the interface IP address 3 2 3 6 Maximum Transmission Unit Settings The maximum transmission unit MTU sets the maximum output packet size for connections on a particular network interface Mach allows the adjustment of the MTU for connections over SLIP lines and on TokenRing networks For LocalTalk Ethernet and local loopback interfaces the MTU is fixed at 576 1500 and 1536 bytes respectively The MTU for PPP interfaces defaults to 1500 bytes and is negotiated by the PPP client and server during connection establishment The MTU setting will be applied to all interfaces configured in systems with multiple interfaces of the same type Power Machren User s Guide 43 SLIP MTU This parameter sets the maximum output packet size for SLIP connections The default value is
34. the program must be scheduled for execution and must terminate itself For example Kabel ei Q 25 would abort the inet daemon shown running in Figure 24 Using ps to Show What is Running 5 7 3 Background Program Execution Some programs execute for a long time Rather than tie up a window you can start the program and let it run behind the scenes To place a program in background execution simply type an ampersand amp at the end of the command line The shell will begin executing the program Rather than waiting for the program to complete execution before returning a prompt the shell returns immediately with a process ID identifying the program that started execution and a prompt signifying that it is ready to run another command For example grep ioctl c gt found amp 86 Power Machren User s Guide 5 7 4 Shell Files Mach provides a means for executing multiple commands by defining them within a file The file can then be run as a single command Use an editor to create a file called startup with the commands date who and pwd Here is an example using the ed editor ed invoke ed bin sh a append text date run the date command who run the who command pwd run the pwd command w startup write to a file named startup q quit To execute this file type sh startup Note that the commands are executed before the prompt is returned If you change the file permissions to allow the file to
35. 1 Automated Reconfiguration 2 2 1 2 Manual Reconfiguration Accessing Mach Sources from the CD ROM 2 3 Troubleshooting oOo CO ODN NN DF W 11 21 22 25 26 28 28 29 30 31 ii Power Machren User s Guide 3 0 The Mach Control Panel 33 3 1 Scheduling Priority Slide Bar 34 3 2 Configuration Screens 34 3 2 1 General Configuration Screen 35 3 2 1 1 Host Name 35 3 2 1 2 Time Zone 36 3 2 2 Memory Configuration Screen 36 3 2 2 1 Maximum Number Parameters 37 3 2 3 Networking Configuration Screen 38 3 2 3 1 Enable IP Forwarding 39 3 2 3 2 Enable Incoming Mail 39 3 2 3 3 Enable Incoming Connections 39 3 2 3 4 Internet IP Addresses 40 3 2 3 5 Netmasks 42 3 2 3 6 Maximum Transmission Unit Settings 42 4 0 Launching Machren 45 4 1 The Mach Login Console 49 42 Mach Windows 52 4 2 1 The Apple Menu 53 4 2 2 The File Menu 53 4 2 3 The Edit Menu 54 4 2 4 The Window Menu 56 4 2 4 1 The Positions Sub Menu 57 4 2 4 2 The Size Sub Menu 58 4 2 4 3 The Order Sub Menu 59 4 2 5 The Fonts Menu 61 Power Machren Users Guide 5 0 Machren Administration 5 1 5 2 5 3 5 4 5 5 5 6 5 7 A Word About Man Pages Tailoring the Startup Environment 5 2 1 Setting Up Mach to Boot Automatically 5 2 2 Manual Startup Tailoring Mach Windows Tailoring Your UNIX Environment Quitting Mach Login Accounts 5 6 1 The Concept of a Home Directory and a User Environment 5 6 2 The UNIX Shell 5 6 3 Superuser and Privileges
36. 2 Editing Tools 6 8 2 1 UNIX Editors Mach provides a number of UNIX text editing programs such as vi 1 ex 1 and ed 1 Another popular UNIX editor is GNU emacs UNIX text editing programs will operate correctly on all Mach text files of type BINA as well as files in the Mach common text format MUMM TEXT They will not recognize Macintosh TEXT files due to the line termination differences previously described 6 8 2 2 Macintosh Editing Applications A few Macintosh editing applications may be found on the Mach CD ROM in the sub folder Utilities Text Utilities Please be sure to register any shareware that you decide to use on an ongoing basis 6 8 3 UNIX to Macintosh Copy and Paste Using conventional Macintosh copy and paste techniques you can copy text from a UNIX terminal screen directly to a Macintosh application Power Machren User s Guide 115 6 9 File System Administration 6 9 1 Creating File Systems To create an FFS you must decide how large you want it and where to place it on your disks When sizing the file system keep in mind that about 4 of space goes to overhead and that by default 10 is held as a reserve When free space falls below the reserve new files may be opened only by root A different reserve percentage may be set during file system creation Since UFS file systems are simply Macintosh HFS volumes viewed through a UNIX lens there are no Mach activities r
37. 202 files 222 macros 222 pre defined names 222 heap Mach 243 size 244 system 243 HFS file system 91 94 partition 14 HLNK file type 100 home directory 71 page default 173 host identifier 175 name 168 defined 35 to internet address mapping 48 translating to internet address 170 table 170 HOSTNAME variable 65 hot keys X window manager 256 HTML Hypertext Markup Language 173 HTTP 168 httpd daemon 25 47 173 HyperText Markup Language Power Machren User s Guide unique 40 datagrams 176 forwarding 24 39 HTML 173 invoking 176 hypertext transfer protocol daemon packets forwarding 39 httpd 173 protocol 163 l J IFCONFIG_ variable 65 Java 1 228 include files 213 Kaffe 2 incoming connections enabling 39 indent 213 K index html file 12 inetd daemon 24 39 47 Kaffe 2 228 init command 46 Keyboard initialization of Mach 46 inode defined 88 Install conf file 45 Installation Guide 14 18 installing Mach 11 32 international keyboards 259 configuring 284 internet address 168 identifier 175 obtaining 168 defined 168 host using Mach as 168 Internet Protocol IP 163 IP addresses AppleTalk 40 default gateway 42 domain name server 42 Ethernet 41 requirements for installation 15 TokenRing 41 Alt keys 285 characters special 83 international 259 configuring 284 mapping 259 285 X Meta keys 285 kill command 23 85 killing a program 85 L launching Mach 18 45 Id link
38. 296 bytes Increasing this value will improve network performance at the expense of interactive response time TokenRing MTU This parameter sets the maximum output packet size for the TokenRing interface if configured The default value is 4464 bytes Example Network Configuration The following figure illustrates a fully configured Networking Configuration screen for a Macintosh with both an Ethernet and an AppleTalk interface in the tenon com domain Both interfaces are part of a subnetworking environment Packets to non tenon com hosts will be sent to an IP gateway on Ethernet For host name resolution this Macintosh will use a Domain Name Server on Ethernet Networking Configuration oO Enable IP Forwarding Enable Incoming Mail Enable Incoming Connections IP Addresses Netmasks AppleTalk ato 223 255 254 81 255 255 255 192 Ethernet ieD TokenRing trD Default Gateway Domain Name Domain Name Server 223 255 2541 o gt SLIP MTU TokenRing MTU Figure 14 Example Network Configuration 44 Power Machren User s Guide Power Machren User s Guide 45 4 0 Launching Machren Mach consists of a Macintosh application called MachTen and a collection of shared libraries that contains the bulk of the Mach system software the UNIX kernel When the system is installed these files are stored in a top level MachTen folder and a MachTen Libraries sub folder MachTen 1 1 Siere 66 4 HE
39. 6 7 8 9i 10 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 I9 20 213 22a 23 24 298 26 27 28 2 30 31 5 324 3Sa 34 type Rational is private ZeroDenominator exception function X Integer Y Integer return Rational Constructor Pre X and Y are defined POSE returns a rational number If 0 returns Reduce X Y Ye If Y lt 0 returns Reduce X Y Raises ZeroDenominator if Y 0 function R1 Rational R2 Rational return Rational dyadic arithmetic constructor Pre RI and R2 are defined Post returns the rational sum of R1 and R2 private A record of type Rational consists of a pair of Integer values such that the first number represents the numerator of a rational number and the second number represents the denominator type Rational is record Numerator Integer 0 Denominator Positive end record ll be A1 8 Power Machren User s Guide 41 end Rationals 41 lines No errors We do the same for the spec of the rational input output package gnatmake gnats gnatl prog23 ads gcc c gnats gnatl prog23 ads GNAT 3 05 960607 Copyright 1991 1996 Free Software Foundation Inc Checking prog23 ads source file time stamp 1996 09 22 14 14 00 1 with Ada Text_I0O 2 package Rationals IO is 333 4 Specification of the input output child package for Rationals a 6 Author Michael B Feldm
40. 8 0 Configuring NIS Under Mach 143 8 1 NIS Basic Configuration Steps 143 8 2 Set YP Configuration in etc yp conf 144 8 3 Set NIS Configuration in etc nis conf 144 8 4 Set NIS Database Search Order 145 8 4 1 The Default etc nsswitch conf File 145 8 5 Testing the Basic NIS Configuration 147 8 6 Configure Mach for Automatic Portmap and Ypbind Startup 148 9 0 Printing 149 9 1 Mach Print Spooling 149 9 1 1 The Print Spooler Database 150 9 2 Local Printing 150 9 2 1 Printing Text Files to a PostScript LaserWriter on AppleTalk 151 9 2 2 Printing to an ImageWriter or a DeskWriter 151 9 3 Remote Printing 154 9 3 1 Spooled Printing to a Remote UNIX Printer 154 9 3 2 Receiving Remote Print Jobs 155 9 4 Selecting an Alternate Printer 156 9 5 Extending Remote Printing to Macintosh Applications 157 9 5 1 Lwsrv Configuration Files 158 9 5 1 1 Font Lists 159 9 5 1 2 PostScript Macros 159 9 5 2 Enabling lwsrv 160 9 6 Print Job Status Mail Notification 161 9 7 Status and lp Management Programs 162 Power Machren Users Guide 10 0 Networking with Mach 10 1 10 2 10 3 10 4 10 5 10 6 10 7 10 8 10 9 10 10 10 11 10 12 10 13 10 14 10 15 Using OpenTransport or Replacing OpenTransport Configuring Tenon TCP or Dual Stack Networking Using Mach as an Internet Host 10 3 1 The Mach Networking Control Panel 10 3 2 Configuring Multiple Interfaces Using Mach as a Domain Name Server 10 4 1 Configurin
41. 86 system access permissions 89 administration 115 archiving 120 backing up 120 checking 116 creating 115 Power Machren User s Guide distributed 1 fast 87 90 Mach 87 122 Macintosh 91 93 native 7 9 organization 88 file counts 92 folders 91 volumes 91 overview 91 removing 118 repairing 116 root 103 security 135 AppleShare access 135 UNIX access 136 UNIX 94 unmounting 118 types BINA 97 binary 98 BLK 99 CHR 99 FIFO 100 HLNK 100 LINK 99 MUMM 97 SHLB 100 SOCKET 99 TEXT 97 98 File Transfer Protocol See FTP Finder defined 3 finderinfo 111 flex 213 floppies formatting 109 flow control primitives 72 FolderBolt 73 folders Power Machren User s Guide drop 138 shared 138 fonts lists for printing 159 menu 61 X server default path 287 network font server 288 providing over network 289 xfs 289 foreign file format 183 formatting floppies 109 Fortran 1 227 fragmentation memory 23 245 fsck command 116 FTP 168 anonymous 183 overview 183 G g 214 g77 214 GATEWAY variable 67 gateway default 42 defined 176 gcc 214 gdb 214 231 General Purpose Interface GPI cable 188 getty 24 189 GNAT documentation 12 gnatl 215 gnatmake 214 GNU compiler 2 224 GPI General Purpose Interface cable 188 Greenwich Mean Time 36 group cylinder defined 88 file 78 79 IDs 71 75 wheel 72 H halt command 70 hard links 90 96 100 hardware flow control 186 188 200 header compression
42. C Rationals Rational 16 D Rationals Rational IT E Rationals Rational 18 F Rationals Rational 19 20 begin Test_Rationals_1 21 BP A 1 3 23 B 2 4 24 Ada Text_IO Put Item gt A 2D Rationals IO Put Item gt A 26 Ada Text_IO New_Line 27 Ada Text_IO Put Item gt B 28 Rationals IO Put Item gt B 29 Ada Text_IO New_Line 30 31 Read in rational numbers C and D SZ Ada Text_IO Put Item gt Enter rational number C gt 33 Rationals I0O Get Item gt C A1 10 Power Machren User s Guide 34 Ada Text_IO Put Item gt Enter rational number D gt 85 Rationals I0O Get Item gt D 36 Ada Text_IO New_Line 3T 38 E A B ao Ada Text_IO Put Item gt E A B is 40 Rationals IO Put Item gt E 41 Ada Text_IO New_Line 42 43 F C D 44 Ada Text_IO Put Item gt F C D is 45 Rationals IO Put Item gt F 46 Ada Text_IO New_Line 47 48 Ada Text_IO Put Item gt A E F is 49 Rationals IO Put Item gt A E F 50 Ada Text_IO New_Line 5i 52 end Test_Rationals_1 52 lines No errors gcc c g gnatl prog22 adb gnatmake has discovered that Rationals must be compiled no ali or o file was present Note that gnatmake goes directly to the rationals body GNAT compiles its spec on the fly and produces no listing of the spec That is why we did the
43. FTP 183 heap size 244 initialization 46 Installer 11 installing 11 32 internet host 168 launching 18 45 libraries 220 licensing information 11 login console 49 50 menus 52 NFS 184 passwords 49 51 performance tuning 21 POP mail service 180 porting software to 241 printing 149 programming environment 213 quitting 70 reconfiguration automated 28 manual 29 reinstallation 26 security 73 sources accessing 30 starting 18 45 automatic 67 manual 67 startup environment 65 symbol information 230 system architecture 7 8 TCP stack vs OpenTransport 165 166 telnet 184 terminal window 51 desktop 4 Power Machren User s Guide troubleshooting 31 32 user guide online 11 utilities 12 virtual machine 6 11 Web service 173 windows 52 tailoring 68 MachTen Conf file 45 MachTen Prefs file 45 MACHTEN variable 69 MachTen misc rce config file 48 Macintosh applications developing 236 construction 239 header definition files 236 interface libraries 237 startup routine 238 debuggers 248 desktop 3 DNS servers and OpenTransport 179 file system HFS 91 93 94 access permissions 92 aliases 93 file contents 92 filenames 92 organization 91 time stamps 93 volumes and folders 91 files manipulating 111 dfork 111 finderinfo 111 restool 111 rfork 111 foreign file format 183 record locking 132 toolbox bindings 2 volumes mounting 107 118 Power Machren User s Guide unmounting 108 macmntd daem
44. File 6 9 3 2 Mounting a Macintosh Volume Unmounting File Systems Removing File Systems 6 9 5 1 Removing an FFS Within a File Space Management Backing Up and Archiving File Systems 6 9 7 1 Tape Devices 6 9 7 2 tar 6 9 7 3 dump and restore 113 113 114 114 114 114 115 115 115 116 116 117 117 117 118 118 118 118 119 120 120 121 122 Power Machren Users Guide 7 1 72 7 3 7 4 vii 7 0 The Machren Network File System NFS 123 Using NFS 124 How NFS Works 124 Setting Up an NFS Server or an NFS Client 125 7 3 1 Server Exporting 126 7 3 2 Client Mounting 126 7 3 3 Set Up Summary 128 NFS Volumes on the Macintosh Desktop Desktop NFS 130 7 4 1 Desktop NFS Volume Mounting 131 7 4 1 1 Automatic Mounting of Desktop NFS Volumes 132 7 4 2 Macintosh Record Locking on Desktop NFS Volumes 132 7 4 2 1 Bwnfsd UID and GID Mapping 133 7 4 3 Authentication Options 133 7 4 3 1 Credentials of Current User 133 7 4 3 2 Prompt for Username and Password 134 7 4 3 3 Username and Password on Command Line 134 7 4 3 4 User ID and Password on Command Line 135 7 4 4 File System Security 135 7 4 4 1 AppleShare Access Privileges 135 7 4 4 2 UNIX Access Privileges 136 7 4 4 3 Mapping AppleShare Access Privileges into UNIX Access Privileges 137 7 4 4 4 Access Privilege Strategies 138 7 4 4 5 Differences Between Apple File Sharing and Desktop NFS 139 7 4 5 AppleDouble 139 7 4 6 DOS Extensions 140 viii Power Machren User s Guide
45. File Sharing when not in use e Close all open control panels on your Macintosh desktop e Macintosh and X screen saver client applications will conflict with one another when run simultaneously Hide the X server and run your favorite Macintosh screen saver package to protect your screen during idle periods or run an X screen saver application e g xlock with your Macintosh screen saver disabled e When using Finder to switch from the X desktop to Finder a Mach terminal window or other Macintosh applications iconify any X clients that are actively drawing to the display prior to hiding the X desktop Power Machren User s Guide 287 12 2 3 6 The Default Font Path X fonts are stored locally as individual files in directories The list of directories and font servers an individual X server uses when trying to open a font are controlled by the font path Some of the directories contained in the default font path for the X server are usr X11 lib X11 fonts Speedo This directory contains outline fonts for Bitstream Inc s Speedo rasterizer A single font face is provided in normal bold italic and bold italic usr X11 lib X11 fonts 100dpi This directory contains 100 dots per inch versions of some of the fonts in the 75dpi directory usr X11 lib X11 fonts misc This directory contains many miscellaneous bitmap fonts that are useful on all systems It contains a family of fixed width fonts sev
46. Machren User s Guide 249 12 0 The X Window System The X Window System also know simply as X is anetwork transparent graphics window system originally developed at the Massachusetts Institute of Technology X is based ona client server model where an application program the client communicates information to a display program the server which then outputs the information to a bitmapped display The server directs user input typically from a keyboard or mouse to the client program for interpretation The client and server communicate with one another using the X Protocol X allows multiple clients to run simultaneously each displayed in a separate overlapping window on the server Using the mouse and keyboard the user controls the size appearance and location of each window on the display or X desktop The Mach X Window software supports the X client server model under Mach on a Macintosh Using the Mach X Window software the Macintosh display is transformed into a high performance X server Mach can be used to create and run X client programs Simultaneous operation of Macintosh applications with X clients is also possible by using Finder to switch from the X server to the Macintosh program This chapter provides a user with the information necessary to operate and administer the Mach X Window software Related documentation on X is listed in Appendix C Suggested Reading for Program
47. Macintosh debugger first is in usr lib MacOS Mac_debug o Power Machren User s Guide 239 11 11 4 Macintosh Application Construction The newly modified interface libraries and header definition files must be specified during the compilation and linkage phases of the Mach code production process This is specified using standard UNIX methods Access to a directory of header definition files is specified using the I parameter on a UNIX command line The command line gcc 0 I usr include MacOS Dpascal c hello c will define with D pascal to be nothing for MacOS compatibility and will search the usr include MacOS directory for include files It will also use 0 optimization as usual for a faster and more compact binary The command line ld o hfs APPL hello Xlcreator MISC Xltype APPL usr macppc lib MacOS Mac_start o hello o usr macppc lib MacOS InterfaceLib a will create an output file hello in the hfs APPL folder Note that the application must be created as an HFS file because it requires the setting of certain Macintosh resources via the MacOS Resource Manager The Id command includes the Macintosh application initialization code from Mac_start o as well as the graphic user interface code from InterfaceLib a You must specify the full name to both of these supplementary pieces of code Since InterfaceLib a is a shared library exported symbols from the library will be trea
48. OOP as well as a comparison of C Objective C Smalltalk and Object Pascal NeXTSTEP Programming Step ONE Object Oriented Applications Simson L Garfinkel Michael K Mahoney TELOS Springer Verlag 1993 tel 800 SPR INGE It s updated to discuss NeXTSTEP 3 0 features Project Builder new development environment but doesn t discuss 3DKit or DBKit NeXTSTEP Object Oriented Programming and the Objective C Language Addison Wesley 1993 ISBN 0 201 63251 9 Japanese 4 7952 9636 7 This is also available on the World Wide Web at http www next com Pubs Documents OPENSTEP ObjectiveC objctoc htm This book describes the Objective C language as it is implemented for NeXTSTEP While clearly targeted at NeXTSTEP it is a good first read to get to learn Objective C C 4 Power Machren User s Guide Articles Why I need Objective C by Christopher Lozinski Journal of Object Oriented Programming JOOP September 1991 Contact info bpg com for a copy and subscription to the BPG newsletter This article discusses the differences between C and Objective C in great detail and explains why Objective C is a better object oriented language Java Instant Java by John A Pew SunSoft Publishing Instant Java is the easy practical way to add Java applets to your Web pages The following are among the applets included in the book Audio Multiple Simultaneous Animations Image Maps Ticker Tapes and more Java M
49. The Mach Networking control panel is a convenient way to configure an interface on AppleTalk Ethernet and TokenRing for internet networking Refer to section 3 0 The Mach Control Panel for information on configuring the primary interface for each network attached to your system If you want to set up a PPP or SLIP interface refer to sections 10 15 8 Using PPP and 10 15 9 Using SLIP 10 3 2 Configuring Multiple Interfaces Mach supports multiple interfaces of the same type including up to four Ethernets four TokenRings and multiple SLIP and PPP interfaces If you have multiple interfaces on Ethernet or TokenRing you will need to configure those interfaces in etc rc using ifconfig 8 Mach permits up to four Ethernet interfaces named ie0 ie3 For example the command ifconfig iel joe up trailers configures the second Ethernet interface installed in your system The host name joe should be added to your etc hosts file along with a unique internet address assigned to the second Ethernet interface 170 Power Machren User s Guide 10 4 Using Machren as a Domain Name Server Mach is designed to use the Internet Name Server protocol to translate host names into internet addresses The Mach domain name service DNS invokes the Berkeley Internet Name Domain BIND software via named 8 the name daemon to match host names to internet addresses When you install Mach the Mach installer in c
50. This means that t should be used only in unusual situations with extreme care Power Machren User s Guide A2 51 A2 5 4 Output Control The following switches allow additional control over the output generated by the binder e Output complete list of elaboration order dependencies showing the reason for each dependency This output can be rather extensive but may be useful in diagnosing problems with elaboration order The output is written to stdout SL Output chosen elaboration order The output is written to stdout o file Set name of output file to file instead of the normal b_prog c default You would normally give file an extension of c since it will be a C source program ao Check only Do not generate the binder output file In this mode the binder performs all error checks but does not generate an output file A2 5 5 Binding for Non Ada Main Programs In our description in this chapter so far we have assumed the main program is in Ada and the task of the binder is to generate a corresponding function main to pass control to this Ada main program GNAT also supports the building of executable programs where the main program is not in Ada but some of the called routines are written in Ada and compiled using GNAT The following switch is used in this situation y No main program The main program is not in Ada In this case most of the functions of the binder are still required
51. TokenTalk assign an internet address to the AppleTalk interface The default value if shown comes from your MacTCP configuration You will be able to use Apple networking facilities printers file sharing etc without assigning an internet address to your LocalTalk interface however if you wish to have IP connectivity on AppleTalk it must have an internet address This is useful if for example users with NCSA Telnet on AppleTalk want to connect to your Mach Macintosh directly over AppleTalk If a MacIP gateway and dynamic addressing are used on your network enter an IP address of 0 0 0 0 Unless you plan to use your Mach networking code solely for Telnet access to some other system it is recommended that you do not use dynamic internet addressing On a system with more than one type of networking interface the host name assigned by Mach to the AppleTalk interface will be host _a where host is the host name selected in the General Configuration screen of the Mach control panel If this interface is the only configured interface the host name associated with the IP address entered will simply be host By default Mach scans the locally connected AppleTalk zone for an IP gateway that will provide the IP address Mach may be configured to scan multiple zones to locate a MacIP gateway during dynamic IP address assignment See the Configuration Resources technical note in the pub tech_notes dire
52. UFS file system 6 1 3 Access Permissions UNIX file and directory access rights are divided into read write and execute permissions Read permission allows a user to examine the contents of a file Write permission allows a user to change or append data to a file Execute permission for binary files and scripts allows a user to execute the file as a program and for directories allows a user to search the directory Each file and directory is tagged with a user and group ID Three levels of permissions are specified one for the owner of a file a second for the members of the designated group and a third for everyone else 6 1 4 Time Stamps UNIX saves three time stamps for each file the time the file s data was modified the time the file s attributes were last modified and the time the file was last accessed i e the data was read 90 Power Machren User s Guide 6 1 5 Link Counts Physical files are uniquely identified by their inode but they may be identified by multiple names The link count is simply the number of references to an inode 6 1 6 Hard Links The mapping of a file name in a directory to an inode is known as a hard link Hard links are not allowed to cross file system boundaries 6 1 7 Symbolic Links Symbolic links are special files whose content is the path name of the intended file or directory The path name may be absolute or relative and may refer to other file syst
53. When Mach is the foreground application this option closes all X client connections terminates the X server and removes the X desktop from the Mach window list This is equivalent to selecting Close Window from the File menu Window Manager Hot Keys xtmenu can be very useful when bound to a hot key sequence recognized by your favorite window manager For example you can hide the X desktop when running olvwm using the lt Shift gt and lt Escape gt keys by modifying the HOME oluwmrc file as follows Escape Shift Execute usr bin X11 xtmenu hn Window managers with an emphasis on olvwm are discussed in section 12 2 2 The Window Manager Client Refer also to the olvwm oluwmrc afterstep and twm online manual pages for more information on the oluwmrc steprc and wmrc files Power Machren User s Guide 257 12 2 Administering the X Window Software Environment The Mach X Window software is a very flexible software package that can be tailored to your individual requirements This section describes how to configure and maintain the X software to create a working environment for you and your users If you are unfamiliar with UNIX system administration review section 5 0 Mach Administration before proceeding An additional useful reference on administration of X is the X Window System Administrator s Guide Volume 8 from O Reilly amp Associates Inc
54. also supports an X desktop A variety of X window managers are available If you log in to Mach as mt next with MachTen as the password you will automatically run the AfterStep X window manager which displays a NeXT like desktop MachTen tuser MachTenz cd hello tuser MachTenz cat hello m This will create a Printer object set it s string and tell it to print include Printer h oid maint id printer Printer alloc init printer addString aluet Hello world J printer print printer free tuser MachTen make hello cc o hello hello m Printer m lobje tuser MachTenz hello ello world tuser MachTen J Figure 3 xterm Displayed by the AfterStep Window Manager 6 Power Machren User s Guide 1 2 The Mach UNIX Virtual Machine Mach is based on the University of California Berkeley UNIX built on a Carnegie Mellon Mach kernel The Mach kernel replaces many of the Berkeley UNIX internals and provides a number of new features not available in traditional UNIX systems Mach both refines and extends the capabilities of the native Macintosh Operating System by providing a pre emptive multitasking UNIX environment that coexists with the MacOS cooperative sharing execution environment With MachIen Macintosh applications UNIX applications Mach applications and X applications run simultaneously Mach represents the confluence of the best features of the Macintosh and the syste
55. appear in the cross referencing file s However only the entities defined in AUs that are imported in RUs appear in the cross referencing file Their order is the order of declaration in the source files The sections in the cross reference referring to RUs and AUs are respectively denoted 6 unit ad sb for an RU unit ad sb for an AU Note An entity defined inside a generic and used through a generic instantiation is listed under the cross referencing section of the generic unit A2 74 Power Machren User s Guide A2 9 7 Example of gnatf Usage test adb 01 with Parti unused 02 with Part2 use Part2 03 procedure Test is 04 05 Thing Number 06 type Client is record 07 Number Integer 08 State Boolean 09 end record 10 type Color is Red Green unused 11 My_Client Client 12 13 begin 14 My _Client Number 1 15 My_Client State True 16 Thing 20 17 Thing Thing Thing 18 end partl ads 01 package Parti is 02 type Useless is new Integer 03 end part2 ads 01 package Part2 is 02 type Number is new Integer range 1 1000 03 The_Number constant 42 04 end The result of invoking gnatf x5 test adbis the following just skim the file test xrb explanations follow Power Machren User s Guide A2 75 Warnings on stderr the screen test adb 1 06 warning Part1 withed but unused test adb 3 11 warning Tes
56. be executed you can eliminate the sh Type chmod x startup This changes the mode of the startup file and makes it an executable file Now you can simply type startup and the commands within startup will execute If you place startup in your login or profile file depending upon your standard shell these commands will be executed every time you log in The shell has a sophisticated command language to allow you to control and parameterize the execution of a set of programs Power Machren User s Guide 87 6 0 The Mach File Systems In the traditional UNIX world disks are devices that can be formatted into file systems and mounted for access by UNIX applications In the Macintosh world disks are called volumes The Macintosh File Manager is the entity responsible for formatting disks into volumes and controlling access to the files on those volumes Mach augments the MacOS HFS or HFS file system with two UNIX file system implementations a native fast file system FFS and a UNIX file system UFS that sits on top of the MacOS HFS or HFS 6 0 1 Fast File System FFS The FFS implements a traditional native UNIX fast file system within a single Macintosh file There is no need to reformat or partition a volume to create an FFS within a file For an FFS within a file Mach continues to use the services of the Macintosh File Manager but only for basic I O operations Macintosh files may be stored i
57. below may be viewed and changed with ResEdit to customize Mach operation to your circumstances Changing undocumented Mach resources may result in unexpected failures DMOD The DMOLD resource ID 8192 specifies the default UNIX access privilege modes for Macintosh folders The default mode of 777 Octal permits read write and search permission by everyone The default access modes assigned may be overridden using the Mach chmod 1 command The default Macintosh folder owner and group is fixed by Mach at root and wheel respectively Note When modifying the DMOD resource use the hexadecimal number equivalent of the octal mode bits you wish to set for example enter mode 755 as 1ED FMOD The FMOD resource ID 8192 specifies the default UNIX access privilege modes for Macintosh files The default mode of 777 Octal permits read write and execute permission by everyone The default access modes assigned may be overridden using the Mach chmod 1 command The default Macintosh file owner and group is fixed by Mach at root and wheel respectively Note When modifying the FMOD resource use the hexadecimal number equivalent of the octal mode bits you wish to set for example enter mode 755 as 1ED Luid B 2 Power Machren User s Guide The Luid resource controls which users are permitted to launch Macintosh applications from within Mach The Luid resource has resource
58. binding and linking If the root unit specified by unit_or_file_name is not a main unit this is the default Otherwise gnatmake will attempt binding and linking unless all objects are up to date and the executable is more recent than the objects f Force recompilations Recompile all sources even though some object files may be up to date but don t recompile predefined or GNAT internal files unless the a switch is also specified g Compile with debugging information Same effect as cargs g jn Usen processes to carry out the re compilations If you have a multiprocessor machine compilations will occur in parallel In the event of compilation errors messages from various compilations might get interspersed but gnatmake will give you the full ordered list of failing compiles at the end This can at times be annoying To get a clean list of error messages don t use j k Keep going Continue as much as possible after a compilation error To ease the programmers s take in case of compilation errors the list of sources for which the compile fails is given when gnatmake terminates mM Check if all objects are up to date If they are output the object dependences to stdout ina form that can be directly exploited in a Makefile By default each source file is prefixed with its relative or absolute directory name This name is whatever you specified in the various al and
59. but instead of generating a main program the binder generates a file containing the following callable routines adainit You mustcall this routine to initialize the Ada part of the program by calling the necessary elaboration routines A call to adainit is required before the first call to an Ada subprogram adafinal You must call this routine to perform any library level finalization required by the Ada subprograms A call to adafinal is required after the last call to an Ada subprogram and before the program terminates A2 52 Power Machren User s Guide If the n switch is given more than one ALI file may appear on the command line for gnatbind The normal closure calculation is performed for each of the specified units Calculating the closure means finding out the set of units involved by tracing with references The reason it is necessary to be able to specify more than one ALI file is that a given program may invoke two or more quite separate groups of Ada subprograms The binder takes the name of its output file from the first specified ALI file unless overridden by the use of the o switch It will be a C source file which must be compiled using the C compiler A2 5 6 Summary of Binder Switches The following are the switches available with gnatbind t bY Generate brief messages to stderr even if verbose mode set ac Check only no generation of binder output file e Output complete list of elabo
60. compilation The run time library serves the purpose of providing a single copy of software to multiple applications The compile time library is used to resolve compile time references between imported symbols in an application and exported symbols from a shared library Power Machren User s Guide 221 11 3 3 Run Time and Compile Time Naming Conventions It is important to understand the naming conventions for the run time and compile time libraries Compile time libraries are named by adding a a suffix to the output file specified on the command line For example the command line ld o hfs pef shrlib Xlsharedlibrary Xlexpall o will produce a run time shared library in the file shrlib and will produce a compile time shared library in the file ifs pef shrlib a that exports all symbols Note that shared libraries must be created as HFS files because they require the setting of certain Macintosh resources via the MacOS Resource Manager 11 4 Traditional UNIX Libraries The traditional UNIX libraries libc a libm a etc are implemented as shared libraries under Machien These compile time libraries reside in usr macppc lib and the corresponding run time libraries reside in System Folder Extensions Tenon Application Libraries When an application is created the compile time libraries must be used to satisfy symbolic references to functions and data declared in the support libraries When an application is launched the
61. complicated example that has three files a main program and the spec and body of a package package Greetings is procedure Hello procedure Goodbye end Greetings with Text_IO use Text_I10O package body Greetings is procedure Hello is begin Put_Line Hello WORLD end Hello procedure Goodbye is begin Put_Line Goodbye WORLD end Goodbye end Greetings with Greetings procedure Gmain is begin Greetings Hello Greetings Goodbye end Gmain Following the one unit per file rule prepare this program in the following three separate files greetings ads spec of package Greetings greetings adb body of package Greetings gmain adb body of main program A2 10 Power Machren User s Guide Compile the program in steps one for the package and one for the main program Unlike the case in some other Ada compilers there is no required order of compilation and in particular it is fine to compile the main program first gcc c gmain adb gcc c greetings adb Notice you do not need to compile greetings ads GNAT does not require that you compile library specs or library generic packages If you want you can submit these units to the compiler to be checked for correctness using the gnatc switch gcc gnatc c greetings ads Once all the necessary units have been compiled you bind and link them as previously using gnatbind and gnatlink as follows gnatbind gmain a
62. converted to lowercase letters e Entities in library package declarations have the form package_name__subprogram_name Note the double underscores separating package name from subprogram name See section A2 12 3 The Naming Scheme of GNAT for more information Exceptions can be caught by breaking in the __gnat_raise function and then entering a bt or where command Power Machren User s Guide A2 85 A2 13 0 Performance Considerations The GNAT system provides a number of options that allow a trade off between e performance of the generated code e speed of compilation minimization of dependencies and recompilation e and the degree of runtime checking The defaults if no options are selected are aimed at improving the speed of compilation and minimizing dependences at the expense of performance of the generated code e no optimization e no inlining of subprogram calls e all runtime checks enabled except overflow and elaboration checks These options are suitable for most program development purposes This chapter documentation describes how you can modify these choices A2 13 1 Controlling Runtime Checks By default GNAT produces all runtime checks except arithmetic overflow checking for integer operations including division by zero and checks for access before elaboration on subprogram calls Two gnat switches gnatp and gnato allow this default to be modified See section A2 4 3 3 Runtime Ch
63. developing for multiple targets and sharing your work with other Mach users The symbolic link base src local which points to usr local src may be used to graft local source packages into this source object organization In section 11 14 Programming Example the source for the UNIX game rogue is used as an example of a program that can be compiled debugged and run on a Power Macintosh using Mach This source is in vase src bsd4 4 games rogue which further illustrates the structure of the BSD source file hierarchy used in Mach Power Machren User s Guide 219 11 2 PEF and XCOFF Mach uses PEF PowerPC Executable Format as its binary executable standard PEF is an Apple Computer standard for defining executable programs and executable code objects The PEF standard is native to the PowerPC Macintosh architecture By generating PEF files the Mach development tools achieve a large degree of synergy with other Power Macintosh development environments and the Power Macintosh OS PEF executable files are composed of one or more elements called Code Fragments The many advantages of Code Fragments include the run time dynamic linking between fragments and automatic code and data sharing between applications with shared libraries of Code Fragments PEF formatted files are developed as the last step in the Mach software production process Internally the Mach development tools rely on an IBM binary executable standard called
64. eemlable ar Fs fie her Pet hTe nF FS A 1RE_FFS Plat he rH FS Tenan Libraries Figure 15 Machren Application Folder When you double click on the MachTen icon Mach executes as a standard Macintosh application In the time between starting MachTen and the appearance of the login prompt Mach initialization takes place see Figure 16 Mach Initialization The UNIX boot process is controlled by parameterized scripts that work in conjunction with three UNIX database files MachTen Prefs MachTen Conf and Install conf built by the Mach control panel The Mach application s function is to load the Mach libraries into memory and begin executing as a UNIX kernel The UNIX kernel reads MachTen Prefs and configures some internal data tables accordingly The kernel then starts the first UNIX process init 8 46 Power Machren User s Guide init establishes a default environment for all subsequent processes It sets certain environment variables and takes care of Macintosh time to GMT mappings Once the default environment is set up init starts a program that reads the etc rc database and executes the commands in it With input from the etc rc conf configuration file generated from the Mach control panel settings the network interfaces are activated Also several server programs or daemons are started see Table 2 MachIen Daemons If successful in completing all of the commands in etc rc
65. entire screen including the area normally occupied by the menu bar When the menu bar is hidden pull down menus from the menu bar remain accessible by pressing the mouse button while dragging the cursor along the top edge of your X desktop Refer to the fs X server startup option in section 12 2 3 The X Server Program for more information on running the X server without a Macintosh menu bar 12 1 5 1 Menu Bar Shortcuts You can perform many of the menu bar functions described in this section using the Mach xtmenu utility program xtmenu is particularly useful when you configure the X server to run without a menu bar 256 Power Machren User s Guide xtmenu is called from a shell command line under Mach Run without options xtmenu toggle switches the accessibility of Macintosh menu bar pull down items on the X desktop when the menu bar is hidden xtmenu also accepts the following options h This option causes the visible X desktop to hide itself exposing the Macintosh desktop This is equivalent to selecting Hide from the Order item under the Window menu s When Mach is the foreground application and the X server is running but hidden from view this option exposes the X desktop This is equivalent to selecting the X Server item from the Window menu If the X server is not running this option will start the X server emulating the lt Command T gt hot key server startup sequence q
66. files Every file has an associated descriptor called an inode which contains ownership permissions time stamps and pointers to assigned data blocks A disk partition is divided into one or more areas called cylinder groups A small percentage of each cylinder group is taken for some bookkeeping information including a redundant copy of the super block inode slots a bitmap of available data blocks and data block usage summary information A static number of inodes is allocated when the file system is created The default policy is to create one inode per 2048 bytes of space in the cylinder group which is expected to be far more than will be needed UNIX files are a single stream of bytes with no operating system imposed format Text files use the ASCII LF character n to denote an end of line Binary files often begin with a four byte code identifying the format of the data that follows Power Machren User s Guide 89 6 1 2 File Names UNIX file and directory names are limited to 255 characters MacOS file names are limited to 31 characters Names may not include the character because it is used in path names to separate directory and file name components An absolute path name begins with a anything else is relative to the current working directory Name matching is case sensitive MacOS file names are not case sensitive however Tenon s extension enables case sensitivity in Tenon s
67. for Macintosh hardware The traditional UNIX software development tools ld nm ar etc have been ported to run in PowerPC native mode and produce PowerPC native mode Code Fragments 11 1 Mach Development Tools 11 1 1 Programs Libraries and Include Files Mach consists of a combination of programs libraries and include files from BSD4 4 hereafter simply referred to as BSD GNU Tenon Intersystems and other sources Most programs reside in usr bin and include files in usr include Programs libraries and include files targeting a particular system architecture are stored in the sub directories bin lib and include of a target directory in usr For the Power Macintosh the target directory is named usr macppc Support for other target architectures is planned for future releases The tools in the target directories run on the host system but produce objects and executables that run on the target system Environment variables and symbolic links will help determine which tools are run Mach software development tools include Tools for Managing Software Development Revision Control Automates the storing retrieval logging identification System RCS and merging of multiple revisions of text Tools for Supporting Source Code Development flex Generates lexical analysis programs indent Formats C code yacc yet another compiler compiler 214 Power Machren User s Guide Tools
68. for flow control To enable flow control set the dv field in etc remote SLIP host entry to dev ttyfa or dev ttyfb depending on the serial port you have chosen for your modem The f in the Mach device name indicates hardware flow control on that serial port Power Machren User s Guide 201 10 15 9 5 Tip Login Script The tip login script is used to communicate initial login authentication information to the remote login shell It is a collection of commands read by a specialized interpreter within tip after making a physical connection to the remote SLIP host The file etc sliphome login script joe is provided as an example authentication dialogue with a remote UNIX login 1 shell The file etc sliphome login script junc is an example dialogue with a Cisco terminal server using Tacacs The basic format of the available script commands are described below The label command label foo The goto command goto foo This command says branch to label foo The send command send dFooBar r The characters are sent to the remote host The backslashed characters follow the C programming language conventions with the following additions d delay 1 sec s space x break The recv command recv 10 error login This command means look for the string login but if its not seen in 10 seconds branch to label error The
69. for remote root access via NFS daemon Owner of certain background processes that handle system services such as print spooler pr 1 and network communication sync Special login to update write buffers Performs a sync and logs out bin Owner of most standard commands uucp Login assigned to uucp requests news Login used by netnews program This is a placeholder since news is not implemented in Mach Power Machren User s Guide 81 User accounts root Login for superuser The home directory is home root and the shell is bin csh toor Alternate login for superuser The home directory is home root and the shell is bin sh 5 6 10 Writing to All Users wall 1 reads its standard input until an end of file It then sends the message it read preceded by Broadcast Message toall users The sender should be superuser to override any protections that users may have invoked wall The system is going down in 5 minutes for maintenance SD The result on each user s active terminal window will be Broadcast message from root The system is going down in 5 minutes for maintenance 82 Power Machren User s Guide 5 6 11 Disabling User Logins If the file etc nologin exists no logins other than root will be allowed on your system See login 1 5 6 12 Removing Users To prevent a user from logging in use the passwd command and change the password string for the
70. for the application When started the application consults only the file in this directory corresponding to the class name of the application Power Machren User s Guide 263 User Level Resources e HOME lt application file gt The application default resource file may be copied to your home directory and customized according to your individual preferences The file XTerm will take precedence over usr X11 lib X11 app defaults XTerm when xterm is started e XAPPLRESDIR This is an environment variable you can set to an alternate search path for your application resource files For example setenv XAPPLRESDIR tmp app defaults causes the X client to search for its resource file from an app defaults sub directory under the tmp directory e HOME Xdefaults If the X server database described in the next section contains no resources resources are read from a Xdefaults file in your home directory when the application starts up This file is not specific to an application and may contain resources from any number of different X clients X Server Level Resources e X Server Database Any global resources that should be available to all clients can be stored in a database residing on the X server using the xrdb program This is typically done when the server starts up in the xinitrc file in the user s home directory If the file usr X11 lib X11 xinit Xresources containing server level resources is found the resource
71. from the compilation tools are discarded Detailed documentation may be found in Appendix A GNAT for the Macintosh in the online Power MachIen User s Guide 11 6 2 C C source files are compiled with gcc A symbolic link from cc to gcc is provided for compatibility with UNIX tradition The backend compiler engine is usr macppc lib gcc lib powerpc apple machten4 2 8 1 ccl Files witha c suffix are assumed normal C source files and those with i are interpreted as previously processed by cpp and passed directly to cc1 Files ending with s are assembly language files Using hello c as an example C source the following command illustrates creating the PEF executable hello from the single source file intermediate files are discarded gcc 0 o hello hello c The object file is sometimes needed or even the intermediate assembly code or preprocessor output Again using hello c as our example the following commands gcc O c hello c gcc O S hello c gcc E o hello i hello c generate the files hello o hello s and hello i respectively 226 Power Machren User s Guide 11 6 3 Objective C Objective C source files are compiled with gcc A symbolic link from cc to gcc is provided for compatibility with UNIX tradition The backend compiler engine is usr macppc lib gcc lib powerpc apple machten4 2 8 1 cclobj Files with a m suffix are assumed Objective C source files and those with i
72. generated and compilation is immediately terminated Here q is for quit really don t quit and this switch tells GNAT to continue with semantic analysis even if syntax errors have been found This may enable the detection of more errors in a single run On the other hand the semantic analyzer is more likely to encounter some internal fatal error when given a syntactically invalid tree Power Machren User s Guide A2 35 gnate Normally the compiler saves up error messages and generates them at the end of compilation in proper sequence This switch the e stands for error causes error messages to be generated as soon as they are detected The use of gnate usually causes error messages to be generated out of sequence Use it when the compiler blows up due to an internal error In this case the error messages may be lost Sometimes blowups are the result of mishandled error messages so you may want to run with the gnate switch to determine whether any error messages were generated see section A2 12 2 GNAT Crashes In addition to error messages corresponding to illegalities as defined in the reference manual the compiler detects two kinds of warning situations First the compiler considers some constructs suspicious and generates a warning message to alert you to a possible error Second if the compiler detects a situation that is sure to raise an exception at runtime it generates a warning m
73. in Ada or not If the main program is in Ada you proceed as follows 1 Compile the Ada units to produce a set of object files and ALI files 2 Compile the other language files to generate object files 3 Run the Ada binder on the Ada main program 4 Compile the Ada main program 5 Link the Ada main program Ada objects and other language objects If the main program is in some language other than Ada you use a special option of the binder to generate callable routines to initialize and finalize the Ada units You must insert calls to these routines in the main program or some other appropriate point The call to initialize the Ada units must occur before the first Ada subprogram is called and the call to finalize the Ada units must occur after the last Ada subprogram returns You use the same procedure for building the program as described previously In this case however the binder places the initialization and finalization subprograms into file b_xxx c instead of the main program A2 3 11 Comparison of GNAT Model With C C Compilation Model The GNAT model of compilation is close to the C and C models You can think of Ada specs as corresponding to header files in C As in C you don t need to compile specs they are compiled when they are used The Ada with is similar in effect to the include of a C header One notable difference is that in Ada you may compile specs separately to check them for semantic and syn
74. in the background by the shell using the amp sign to allow the entire client list to be processed Finally the startup script launches a special X application known as the window manager that allows you to move resize and iconify your X application windows The AfterStep Window Manager afterstep based on NeXTSTEP is launched by default Also available in Mach is the OpenLook Virtual Window Manager olvwm the Tab Window Manager twm and the Motif Window Manager mwm The operation of the OpenLook Virtual Window Manager is described in detail in section 12 2 2 The Window Manager Client The startup script you create in xinitrc in your home directory takes precedence over the default system startup script 12 2 1 2 Resources X Application Preferences Macintosh applications permit the setting of preferences to customize the application to the individual user s tastes for example background color window title font size etc Preferences are set for the application and typically stored ina single file in the Macintosh Preferences folder Under X preferences are set via application resources Resources are specified as strings that are read in from multiple source files when an application is run Application resources under X are inherently more flexible than Macintosh application preferences due to the client server model under which X operates As with Macintosh programs preferences can be spec
75. inch To be used when the server cannot determine the screen size from the hardware fc cursorFont Sets the default cursor font fn font Sets the default font fp fontPath Sets the search path for fonts This path is a comma separated list of directories which the X server searches for font databases Starts the server in full screen mode In this mode the Macintosh menu bar is hidden by the X desktop Pull down menus from the Macintosh menu bar remain accessible by pressing the mouse button while dragging the cursor along the top edge of the desktop This option may not work on PCI Macintosh systems help Prints a usage message I Causes all remaining command line arguments to be ignored ld kilobytes Sets the data space limit of the server to the specified number of kilobytes A value of zero makes the data size as large as possible The default value of 1 leaves the data space limit unchanged ls kilobytes Sets the stack space limit of the server to the specified number of kilobytes A value of zero makes the stack size as large as possible The default value of 1 leaves the stack space limit unchanged 280 mbm middle key Power Machren User s Guide Changes the middle mouse button keystroke mapping lt middle key gt is entered as a decimal value It represents the Macintosh virtual key code corresponding to the desired key Allowable values are
76. logger daemon Syslogd reads and forwards system messages to the specified log files and or users depending on the priority of the message and the originating facility A major reason for running this daemon is to log the results of sendmail activities Run syslogd while changing system configuration files for other daemons or when running sendmail but not otherwise inetd is only needed for incoming or loopback connections If a machine is not providing telnetd rlogind ftpd or other similar services inetd does not need to be run Note that telnet rlogin and ftp clients for outgoing connections can still be run on demand Router Service No daemons are necessary to provide IP forwarding although you may choose to run routed A system that is forwarding IP packets may allocate additional mbufs dynamically but these allocations are small compared to the size of most programs Serial Ports getty is a process like any other so an unused serial line with a waiting getty is consuming memory Ttys can be turned on and off when needed see init 8 Power Machren User s Guide wind The default profile and login files automatically start up the window daemon each time a login occurs in the con sole Note that the window daemon is started with the command exec usr libexec wind to free up the space of the invoking call 25 wind 8 is the window daemon controlling the Mach window environme
77. long filenames if corresponding unit names are very long for example if child units or subunits are heavily nested An option is available to shorten such long filenames called filename krunching This may be particularly useful when programs being developed with GNAT are to be used on operating systems such as MS DOS with limited filename lengths See section A2 10 2 Using gnatk 8 Of course no file shortening algorithm can guarantee uniqueness over all possible unit names if filename krunching is used it is your responsibility to ensure no name clashes occur Power Machren User s Guide A2 17 A2 3 4 Naming of GNAT Source Files If you want to examine the workings of the GNAT system the following brief description of its organization may be helpful e Files with prefix sc contain the lexical scanner e All files prefixed with par are components of the parser The numbers correspond to chapters of the Ada standard For example parsing of select statements can be found in par ch9 adb e All files prefixed with sem perform semantic analysis The numbers correspond to chapters of the Ada standard For example all issues involving context clauses can be found in sem_ch10 adb e All files prefixed with exp perform AST normalization and expansion using the same numbering scheme For example the construction of record initialization procedures is done in exp_ch3 adb e The fi
78. must be indented The compile considers violations of the layout rules a syntax error if you specify this switch gnatg Enforces a set of style conventions that correspond to the style used in the GNAT source code All compiler units are always compiled with the gnatg switch specified You can find the full documentation for the style conventions imposed by gnatg in the body of the package Style in the compiler sources in the file style adb You should not normally use the gnatg switch However you must use gnatg for compiling any language defined unit or for adding children to any language defined unit other than Standard A2 4 3 8 Character Set Control gnatic Normally GNAT recognizes the Latin 1 character set in source program identifiers as described in the reference manual This switch causes GNAT to recognize alternate character sets in identifiers c is a single character indicating the character set as follows 1 Latin 1 identifiers 2 Latin 2 letters allowed in identifiers 3 Latin 3 letters allowed in identifiers 4 Latin 4 letters allowed in identifiers p IBM PC letters code page 437 allowed in identifiers 8 IBM PC letters code page 850 allowed in identifiers f Full upper half codes allowed in identifiers n No upper half codes allowed in identifiers w Wide character codes allowed in identifiers A2 40 Power Machren Use
79. object file and where possible the call will be inlined See section A2 13 3 Inlining of Subprograms for further details on when inlining is possible Power Machren User s Guide A2 41 A2 4 3 11 Auxiliary Output Control gnatt Cause GNAT to write the internal tree for a unit to a file with the extension atb for a body or ats for a spec This is not normally required but is used by separate analysis tools Typically these tools do the necessary compilations automatically so you should never have to specify this switch in normal operation gnatu Print a list of units required by this compilation on stdout The listing includes all units on which the unit being compiled depends either directly or indirectly A2 4 3 12 Debugging Control gnatdx Activate internal debugging switches x is a letter or digit or string of letters or digits which specifies the type of debugging outputs desired Normally these are used only for internal development or system debugging purposes You can find full documentation for these switches in the body of the Debug unit in the compiler source file debug adb One switch you may wish to use is gnatdg which causes a listing of the generated code in Ada source form For example all tasking constructs are reduced to appropriate runtime library calls The syntax of this listing is close to normal Ada with the following additions new xxx storage_pool y
80. of memory to run If you are compiling large files during and have an elaborate program generation environment built compile up where a Makefile causes multiple copies of make to run at the same time this will require large amounts of memory and may cause either the C compiler or make to fail during some memory allocation request and thereby aborting the program generation A potential solution to this problem is to use some of make s more sophisticated features such as VPATH and to reorganize the program generation process to be completely controlled from one or two make invocations sticky bits The ccl cclplus f771 cclobs and gnat1 compilers are installed with the sticky bit set Once these compilers are used they remain in memory until Mach quits This speeds execution but may reserve too much memory if you are using multiple languages and have limited memory Removing the sticky bit will cause the programs to be loaded into memory each time they are used This may be done by typing the following command as root chmod 555 usr macppc bin lt filename gt Power Machren User s Guide 247 11 14 Programming Example 11 14 1 Rogue BSD includes a number of games some of which have a long history in the UNIX world This example uses the game rogue as an example for software development for the Power Macintosh using Mach 11 14 2 Building the Executable First it is necessary to build the executable
81. package spec to produce the object file for the package e Ifa package has both a spec and a body compile the body to produce the object file for the package The source file for the package spec need not be compiled in this case since there is only one object file which contains the code for both the spec and body of the package e For a subprogram compile the subprogram body to produce the object file for the subprogram The spec if one is present is as usual in a separate file and need not be compiled e In the case of subunits only compile the parent unit A single object file is generated for the entire subunit tree which includes all the subunits e Compile child units completely independently from their parent units though of course the spec of the parent unit must be present Do not compile Generic units specs and bodies The preceding rules describe the set of files that must be compiled to generate the object files for a program Each object file has the same name as the corresponding source file except that the extension is o as usual You may wish to compile other files for the purpose of checking syntactic and semantic correctness For example in the case where a package has a separate spec and body you would not normally compile the spec However it is convenient in practice to compile the spec to make sure it is correct before compiling clients of this spec since such compilations will fail if ther
82. printers Mach supports full UNIX print job control including the management of multiple printers multiple spooling queues and access to printers either local or accessible across a network In addition using the LaserWriter server daemon Iwsrv Mach can emulate a named AppleTalk LaserWriter This allows remote Macintosh applications to direct printer output to a Mach system which will in turn spool the output as a Mach print job 9 1 Mach amp Print Spooling Printing in a standard Macintosh environment requires competing for the exclusive use of a printer and waiting for the relatively slow printing process to complete With Mach every Macintosh is able to be more efficient in its printing by becoming a spooling client server system Ina Mach spooled system text that would normally be sent directly to an AppleTalk LaserWriter is instead directed to a client program The client transfers the data to a spooling area monitored by a spooling server program and returns control to the application Thus applications are only required to spend the amount of time it takes to transfer the print data from one disk to the spooling disk before being able to continue Since Mach is a multi tasking system the server continues to run in the background and feeds the spooled data to a designated printer one file at a time In a networked printing environment the server forwards the spooled data to a remote server for printing from the remot
83. route Power Machren User s Guide 203 10 15 9 8 Setting the MTU The MTU Maximum Transmission Unit in a SLIP connection is a hard limit on the output packet size The default MTU setting is a compromise between efficient serial line bandwidth utilization and good interactive performance For small settings relatively more bandwidth is consumed transmitting the IP protocol headers with each data packet Conversely since any small interactive packets on a connection must wait for in progress large packets to finish large MTU settings adversely affect interactive response time The default MTU value of 296 bytes was chosen to ensure good interactive performance while minimizing the header cost Adjustments to the MTU can be made in the Networking screen of the MachIen control panel The MTU setting is applied to all configured SLIP interfaces The use of header compression see section 10 15 9 6 Header Compression is recommended for all MTU settings where supported by your SLIP server 10 15 10 Configuring Machren as a Dial In SLIP Server Mach can be configured as a dial in server to enable SLIP connections initiated by remote systems The sliplogin 8 program and the database files etc ttys etc passwd and etc sliphome slip hosts are the primary user configurable components that allow dial in SLIP service under Mach 10 15 10 1 Serial Port Set Up For dial in SLIP service a modem must be connected to a serial port on your
84. shareable run time libraries are found by the Code Fragment Manager loaded into memory if they are not already in use and instantiated for use by the application Some compile time libraries do not have a corresponding run time library These libraries are not shareable hence the loader will statically bind them into the application execution image If another Power Macintosh software development environment MPW Metrowerks etc is used to build Mach applications the PEF libraries in System Folder Extensions Tenon Application Libraries should be used for both the compile time Header Call definitions and the run time dynamic linking The XCOFF libraries in usr macppc lib are usually not acceptable input to these Power Macintosh software development tools 222 Power Machren User s Guide 11 5 Header Files MachrIen includes a number of header files which declare functions data types values and macros for supported languages The C include files are ANSI compliant Machine independent files are located in usr include Files dependent on a specific target architecture are located in usr lt target gt include usr macppc include contains the include files specific to the Power Macintosh By default the preprocessor cpp scans the target dependent tree before it scans the generic tree 11 5 1 Pre Defined Names The following macro names are used extensively in the Mach header and source files to conditionally include
85. some interesting features including source debugging directly from the XCOFF file i e the debugger has the makesym function built in a flag to enter the debugger each time an application loads a Code Fragment a method of mapping xSyYM files to these newly loaded Code Fragments and an ability to present and trace Thread Manager stacks each Mach application uses a Thread Manager stack 11 10 2 3 Metrowerks Debugger The Metrowerks Code Warrior software development environment includes a symbolic source code debugger for Power Macintosh applications This debugger would be a logical choice for debugging Mach applications if the applications are also being developed using the other Code Warrior tools 234 Power Machren User s Guide 11 10 3 Environment Variables for Debugging and Monitoring Each Mach application is run with certain pre set information known as the environment The environment is a collection of variables stored as character strings Each string specifies the name and value of one variable Many environment variables are set during login and when starting a new shell For csh and tcsh the commands to set and unset environment variables are setenv lt variable gt lt value gt unsetenv lt variable gt For sh and bash the commands to set and unset environment variables are export lt variable value gt unset lt variable gt Consult the man page for your shell of choice for the complete deta
86. the Mach directory If the Mach CD ROM is inserted when Mach is started the Source_FFS fast file system will be automatically mounted and immediately available by reference to files and directories under the vase src directory The Source_FFS contains a great deal of the source that goes into making Mach and its applications 14 Power Machren User s Guide Mach runs as an application therefore all of the network and peripheral devices that your Macintosh supports are still supported when Mach is installed Since Mach internet software has been interfaced to MacOS LocalTalk MacOS EtherTalk MacOS TokenTalk and MacOS serial port hardware all of the Mach communications are equally applicable to LocalTalk EtherTalk TokenTalk or serial line networks individually or in combination with each other Follow the steps below to install the complete Mach software package 1 Site Preparation e Verify RAM Pull down the Apple menu and choose About this Computer It will display the version of the system as well as the amount of RAM configured for the system Make sure the Total Memory is at least 32MB Check MacOS version and Power Macintosh e Verify disk space Make sure the hard disk has at least 350MB available by viewing any folder on your hard disk using View by Icon If there is not ample free disk you will need to remove documents and folders to make additional space on your hard disk Ma
87. the Mach IP address will be on a different subnet than the OpenTransport IP address This will force OpenTransport to direct all packets destined for Mach s TCP IP to the router address specified in your OpenTransport TCP IP control panel Note that you should assign your OpenTransport IP address and subnet mask such that the OpenTransport IP address is on the same subnet as your default router On the Mach side launch the Machien control panel and display the Networking Preferences dialog Configure an IP address that now resides on a logical subnet different than the subnet containing the OpenTransport IP address and based on the OpenTransport subnet mask as configured in the OpenTransport TCP IP control panel No adjustment to the MachIen TCP IP subnet mask to match the OpenTransport subnet mask is necessary use your original subnet mask for Mach Next you must adjust the Mach TCP IP routing behavior routing local packets sent to your OpenTransport stack s IP address through your local gateway To achieve this you must manually edit the nfs etc rc local file and add an entry to the bottom of the file that looks like this sbin route add host lt OT IP Address gt SGATEWAY 1 where lt OT IP Address gt is the OpenTransport IP dot address as configured in your OpenTransport TCP IP control panel This tells Mach s TCP IP stack to direct all packets destined for your OpenTransport IP stack to the router When
88. the amount of disk space required to store Macintosh application programs since users no longer need their own individual copy of an application Moreover NFS eliminates file copying which often results in multiple potentially inconsistent copies of a particular file and reduces the need to Telnet to specific hosts to gain access to a resource With NFS multiple Macintoshes workstations and other PCs can give the appearance of having a single large file system Aside from the convenience and economy of file sharing NFS may provide better overall performance at a lower cost A server with a large high performance disk may provide better service than an environment where each PC has its own small disk Widely used read only files can be stored on several servers at the same time and a complete file system can be distributed across several servers to turn a network into a multiprocessor environment 124 Power Machren User s Guide 7 1 Using NFS Mach supports remote file system access over Ethernet AppleTalk TokenRing and SLIP and PPP connections MachIers extended file system is based on an industry standard developed by Sun Microsystems for file sharing and exchange called NFS Network File System A Mach system can be set up as either an NFS client or an NFS server or both This section describes the MachIen NFS installation operation and maintenance 7 2 How NFS Works The Mach NFS performs two major functions e
89. the assembler and any other utilities needed to complete the generation of the required object files It is possible to supply several filenames on the same gcc command This causes gcc to call the appropriate compiler for each file For example the command gcc c x adb y adb z c calls gnat1 the Ada compiler twice to compile x adb and y adb and cc1 the C compiler once to compile z c The compiler generates three object files x o y o and z o and the two ALI files x ali and y ali from the Ada compilations Any switches apply to all the files except for gnatx switches which apply only to Ada compilations A2 4 2 Switches for gcc The gcc command accepts numerous switches The following are the ones you will most likely need Note that these switches are case sensitive b target Compile your program to run on target which is the name of a system configuration You must have a GNAT cross compiler built if target is not the same as your host system A2 30 Power Machren User s Guide Bdir Load compiler executables for example gnat1 the Ada compiler from dir instead of the default location Only use this switch when multiple versions of the GNAT compiler are available See the gcc manual page for further details You would normally use the b or V switch instead C 7 Compile Always use this switch when compiling Ada programs Note that
90. the command ps ax to determine if wind is running see Figure 24 Using ps to Show What is Running To execute wind type wind at the prompt See also 12 1 3 Automatic Launch of the X Server The X server desktop window differs from a Mach terminal window in that the familiar Macintosh title bar close box zoom box scroll bar and size box are not present when the X server is running The entire window area below the Mach menu is devoted to the X desktop or root window The X desktop size automatically conforms to the physical dimensions of your screen larger monitors will provide more surface area for your X desktop X client applications appear in windows on the X desktop In Figure 30 The X Desktop the xconsole xterm and oluwm applications are running X client startup is discussed in section 12 2 1 Starting Clients 12 1 2 The Menu Bar The Mach menu bar appears above the X server desktop Figure 30 The X Desktop and controls the X server s visibility on the desktop relative to other Mach terminal windows and Macintosh applications you may be running Unlike a Mach terminal window lt Command gt key shortcut menu selections the hot keys are disabled when the X desktop is visible since the lt Command gt key is meaningful as an X lt Meta gt key within the X environment 252 Power Machren User s Guide 12 1 2 1 The File Menu The File menu lets you crea
91. the program test_factorial Here we will break not on an exception but every time the Factorial function is called Since Factorial is recursive we will stop at every new level of recursion gdb test_factorial GDB is free software and you are welcome to distribute copies of it under certain conditions type show copying to see the conditions There is absolutely no warranty for GDB type show warranty for details GDB 4 15 1 gnat 1 10 Copyright 1995 Free Software Foundation Inc First we stop at the first executable statement of the main program gdb break test_factorial Breakpoint 1 at Oxl6ee4 file test_factorial adb line 34 Now we set a break for each time we call Factorial gdb break factorial Breakpoint 2 at Oxl6dd0 file test_factorial adb line 23 gdb run Starting program test_factorial Breakpoint 1 at Ox2f6ef24 file test_factorial adb line 34 Breakpoint 2 at Ox2f6eel10 file test_factorial adb line 23 Breakpoint 1 test_factorial at test_factorial adb 34 34 Answer Factorial 4 and we continue the run gdb continue Continuing Breakpoint 2 test_factorial factorial n 4 at test_factorial adb 23 23 if N 1 then A1 18 Power Machren User s Guide Now we will set a watchpoint on the variable Result so that the program will stop every time Result acquires a new value gdb watch result Watchpoint 3 test_factorial factorial result gdb continue Continuing Watchpoin
92. the results of previous compilations without incorrectly depending on them First a definition an object file is considered up to date if the corresponding ALI file exists and if all the source files listed in the dependency section of this ALI file have time stamps matching those in the ALI file This means that neither the source file itself nor any files that it depends on have been modified and hence there is no need to recompile this file gnatmake works by first checking if the specified main program is up to date If so it is done and no compilations are required If not it compiles the main program to build anew ALI file that reflects the latest sources It examines this ALI file to find all the source files on which the main program depends and recursively applies the up to date test on all these files This process ensures that gnatmake only trusts the dependencies in an existing ALI file if they are known to be correct Otherwise it always recompiles to determine a new guaranteed accurate set of dependencies Thus the program is compiled upside down from what may be more familiar as the required order of compilation in some other Ada systems In particular clients are compiled before the units on which they depend The ability of GNAT to compile in any order is critical in allowing an order of compilation to be chosen that guarantees that gnatmake will recompute a correct set of new dependencies if necessary A2 64 Power M
93. the system and Mach heaps and it is necessary to have space available in both of these heaps in order to successfully run Mach applications The About This Computer dialog box under the Apple menu when Finder is the front application provides an easy means to approximate how much space is available in both the system and the Mach heaps However it is not easy to predict how much more memory a particular Mach application will require Mach libraries libc libm etc are shared libraries Mache applications that reference these libraries share a single instantiation of the library s code The library s data segments are not shared Each Mach application allocates a 244 Power Machren User s Guide private copy of the data segments for each shared library it references This dynamic sharing of the Mach libraries combined with the stack and memory allocations internal to Mach programs make it difficult to determine how much additional memory a Mach program will consume from the Mach and system heaps Examining the About This Computer display both before and after launching a Mach application provides a way to approximate memory requirements Using MacsBug or another debugger to dump the exact heap statistics provides a more precise means for calculating memory usage 11 13 1 4 Setting the Machren Heap Size Setting the size of the Mach heap varies the sizes of the code and data allocation pools Incre
94. the xterm default background color is overridden with a red background using the command xterm xrm XTerm VT100 background red Note that if the string contains characters interpreted by the shell e g an asterisk they must be quoted Any number of xrm arguments may be given on the command line Power Machren User s Guide 265 e Command Line Options A command line option to the X application takes ultimate precedence over all other resource locations An xterm s background will be blue regardless of all xterm background resource specifications in all locations when xterm is started with the command xterm bg blue Recommendations for Administering Resources Maintain unmodified copies of application resources in the usr X11 lib X11 app defaults directory Customize these resources for individual users by copying the customized variables from each resource file to a Xdefaults file in the user s home directory If in doubt as to which resources an X application will use when it is launched use the appres program to preview the application s resources For more information on the resource variables available to an application refer to the online manual page for the application 266 Power Mach User s Guide 12 2 2 The Window Manager Client The window manager is a program that runs with the X Window System and helps you manage the windows on your screen The window manager provides functions for
95. this category as are subprogram bodies if access before elaboration checks are being generated Package bodies and specs may or may not have NE set depending on whether or not elaboration code is required PK Unit is a package rather than a subprogram PU Unit has pragma Pure PR Unit has pragma Preelaborate RC Unit has pragma Remote_Call_Interface RT Unit has pragma Remote_Types SP Unit has pragma Shared_Passive SU Unit is a subprogram rather than a package The attributes may appear in any order separated by spaces Another line in the ALI file has the following form W unit name source name lib name E EA One of these lines is present for each unit mentioned in an explicit with clause by the current unit unit name is the unit name in internal format source name is the filename of the file that must be compiled to compile that unit usually the file for the body except for packages that have no body lib name is the filename of the library information file that contains the results of compiling the unit The E and EA parameters are present if pragma Elaborateorpragma Elaborate_All respectively apply to this unit In the case of generic units only unit name is present since generic units do not need to be compiled and generate no library information Note that the elaborate pragmas can be given for generic units but GNAT ignores them Following the unit information is an optional
96. type of Luid and a resource ID of 8192 or OxE000 The Luid resource contains a variable length list of numeric uids A uid is defined to be an unsigned short A ResEdit template for the Luid resource is included in Machien If the Luid resource does not exist or is empty only the user root may launch Macintosh applications Otherwise each entry in the resource is compared to the uid of the current user to check for a match If a match is found that user is permitted to launch Macintosh applications The uid OxFFFF is a wildcard which matches all users allowing any user to launch applications This is the default for Mache ROOT The ROOT resource ID 8192 names the FFS file which contains the Mach root file system The name is first looked for in the folder from which Mach is launched The default name is MachTen_FFS Power Machren User s Guide C 1 APPENDIX C Suggested Reading for Programming Languages The following books may be helpful in understanding and using the indicated programming language Ada Ada 95 Problem Solving and Program Design by Michael Feldman and Elliot Koffman Addison Wesley 1996 ISBN 0 201 87009 6 This book is suitable as a CS1 text with Ada as the language of instruction and the last few chapters combined with some language independent algorithm theory cover the rest of the Ada language in sufficient depth to serve as the language specific basis of a CS2 co
97. used in this guide e Functions utility program names standard names and classes e Option flags e Filenames button names and field names e Variables e Emphasis optional information or parameters e Examples are described by text and then shown this way Power Machren User s Guide A2 7 A2 2 0 Getting Started With GNAT This chapter describes the usual ways of using GNAT to compile Ada programs A2 2 1 Running GNAT Three steps are needed to create an executable file from an Ada source file 1 The source file must first be compiled 2 The source file then must be bound using the GNAT binder 3 All appropriate object files must be linked to produce an executable A2 2 2 Running a Simple Ada Program Any editor may be used to prepare an Ada program If emacs is used the optional Ada mode may be helpful in laying out the program The program text is anormal text file We will suppose in our initial example that you have used your editor to prepare the following file with Text_I0O use Text_I10O procedure Hello is begin Put_Line Hello WORLD end Hello This file should be named hello adb GNAT requires each file contain a single unit whose file name corresponds to the unit name with periods replaced by hyphens and whose extension is ads for a spec and adb for a body A2 8 Power Machren User s Guide You can compile the program using one of the fol
98. user thus preventing any possible match Then when convenient perhaps after backing up the deleted user s storage can be reclaimed Removing a user involves removing the entry from the etc master passwd file rebuilding the password databases with the command pwd_mkdb etc master passwd and deleting disk files 5 6 13 Changing the Message of the Day As root or superuser you can edit the file etc motd If this file does not already exist it can be created with the touch 1 command Whatever data you place in that file will be printed out each time a user logs into Mach except for the top two lines which are edited by the etc rc script at reboot and filled in with a version number Power Machren User s Guide 83 5 6 14 Special Characters A number of keyboard characters have special meaning in UNIX The chart in Figure 23 Special Keyboard Characters will help you use the UNIX command line environment TERMINAL HANDLER SPECIAL CHARACTERS e Line Termination The Return key indicates completion of input at the end of a line A command is initiated when the Return key is struck e Character Deletion The Delete key deletes a character e Word Deletion Control W deletes the last word of input e Line Deletion Control U deletes the entire line Output Suspend Control S temporarily halts output to the Restart screen Control Q restarts output e Program Interrupt Control C interrupts a program Programs th
99. want to experiment with mail try typing mail lt your_login_name gt The mail program will respond with Subject and await your input Enter a subject followed by a carriage return and then type a short message to yourself End the message with a period on a blank line For example Subject Test This is a test message The message will be sent to you You can see the message simply by typing mail with no user name A list of the messages to you will be printed out The list will indicate who sent the message the date it was sent the size of the message and a few words from the subject heading The list is formatted as follows mail Mail version 8 1 6 6 93 Type for help var mail laura 3 messages 3 new 3 unread U 1 jdineen NNSC NSF NET Thu May 2 13 56 1025 16318 Introduction to U 2 laura Fri May 3 10 05 14 346 Re Meeting You can read each message simply by typing the message number or a carriage return After reading a message you can delete it by typing a followed by a UI carriage return Or you can save the message to a file by typing s followed by a oo oy filename The mail program can be exited by typing x or q The Mail Reference Manual in the User s Supplementary Documents section on the Mach CD ROM will help you use all of the features of the Berkeley UNIX sendmail included with Mach In addition there are public domain mailers such as Eu
100. will be written If it is not specified all files are written to the current directory A2 8 4 Examples of gnatchop Usage gnatchop w hello_s ada gnat ichibiah files Chops the source file hello_s ada The output files will be placed in the directory gnat ichibiah files overwriting any files with matching names in that directory no files in the current directory are modified gnatchop s r collect Chops the source file collect into the current directory A compilation script is also generated and all output files have Source_Reference pragmas so error messages will refer back to the file collect with proper line numbers gnatchop archive Chops the source file archive into the current directory One useful application of gnatchop is in sending sets of sources around for example in email messages The required sources are simply concatenated for example using a Unix cat command and then gnatchop is used at the A2 68 Power Machren User s Guide other end to reconstitute the original file names Power Machren User s Guide A2 69 A2 9 0 The Front End Cross Reference Utility gnatf This chapter discusses gnatf a stripped down version of the GNAT compiler containing only the front end gnatf can preform full syntax and semantic checking and also has a cross reference analyzer built in that can perform a variety of functions A2 9 1 Overview of gnatf The GNAT system provides a stand alone
101. will result in a login prompt appearing on the screen Log out by typing logout or D depending upon what shell you are using 10 15 8 Using PPP The Point to Point Protocol PPP was developed to support serial communications in a multi protocol environment SLIP as its name implies is specifically for IP communications PPP on the other hand as described in RFC 1331 The Point to Point Protocol for the Transmission of Multi Protocol Datagram Links is designed to encapsulate protocols other than just TCP IP Because of its enhanced features which include password authentication PPP is the standard for serial communications by internet service providers Power Machren User s Guide 191 10 15 8 1 Setting up Machren PPP on Your Macintosh This section describes how to configure your Mach system to listen for PPP connections on your Macintosh modem port as a PPP server and to connect to remote PPP servers as a PPP client 10 15 8 2 Configuring your Machren System as a PPP Server The first step in setting up a PPP server is to connect one or more modems to your Macintosh The recommended procedure is to use the Communications ToolBox to handle the modem configuration Test each modem connection by using the tip command to dial out tip cm out To exit the tip program press the lt return gt lt gt lt gt keys and then press lt return gt again If you wish to access the serial ports dire
102. you will be able to use the networking protocols Telnet SMTP FTP HTTP etc to communicate with other hosts that are accessible over your internet Even if you are not connected to the global Internet you can benefit by using these protocols to form an internal company wide internet In Mach your host name and internet address are from information supplied in the Mach control panel The translation of your host name to an internet address is found in the file etc hosts This file is set up automatically when the system boots Mach employs two methods of translating host names to addresses by using the etc hosts table and by using a domain name resolver to query a centralized automated domain name server You can disable a translation method or specify which method is used first in the etc net_search_rules file see net_search_rules 5 Refer to section 10 4 Using Mach as a Domain Name Server for an explanation of the domain name system If your internet does not use domain name service add an entry for each host on your network in etc hosts Power Machren User s Guide 169 10 3 1 The Machren Networking Control Panel Mach allows for a multi homed internet networking environment permitting multiple independent networks to be connected to a single system Mach supports several physical interface types including Ethernet SLIP PPP TokenRing and LocalTalk in addition to a logical local loopback interface
103. 0 11 9 Symbol Information 230 11 10 Debugging 231 11 10 1 Debugging using gdb 231 11 10 2 Macintosh Debugging Tools 232 11 10 2 1 MacsBug 232 11 10 2 2 Macintosh Debugger for PowerPC 233 11 10 2 3 Metrowerks Debugger 233 11 10 3 Environment Variables for Debugging and Monitoring 234 11 10 3 1 DEBUGGERFIRST 235 11 10 3 2 STACKCHK 235 11 10 3 3 MEMSTATS 235 11 11 Making Macintosh Applications 236 11 11 1 Macintosh OS Header Definition Files 236 11 11 2 Macintosh OS Interface Libraries 237 11 11 3 Macintosh Application Startup Routine 238 11 11 4 Macintosh Application Construction 239 11 12 Cross Development Tools and Targets 240 11 12 1 Default Mach Environment 240 11 13 Porting Software to MachIen 241 11 13 1 Real Memory Issues 241 11 13 1 1 Stack Overrun 241 11 13 1 2 Allocating Memory in Mach 242 11 13 1 3 Calculating Memory Requirements 243 11 13 1 4 Setting the Mach Heap Size 244 11 13 1 5 Problem Areas 245 Power Machren Users Guide 11 14 Programming Example 11 14 1 11 14 2 11 14 3 Rogue Building the Executable Debugging Using MacsBug or Other Macintosh Debuggers 12 0 The X Window System 12 1 12 2 The X Desktop 12 1 1 Starting the X Server 12 1 2 The Menu Bar 12 1 3 12 1 4 12 1 5 12 1 2 1 The File Menu 12 1 2 2 The Window Menu Automatic Launch of the X Server Quitting the X Server Running the X Server Without a Menu Bar 12 1 5 1 Menu Bar Shortcuts Administering the X Window Software
104. 28 49 32 A1 22 f variable 18 prog25 adb The main progr usr local Power Machren User s Guide 23 43 3 45 28 49 36 am calls some procedures from Ada Text_IO adainclude a textio ads 960625050333 text_io package 30 13 prog25 adb 48 7 507 text_io new_l 1 10 24 7 26 7 27 7 29 7 32 7 34 7 36 7 39 7 41 7 44 7 46 7 prog25 adb ine procedure 141 14 26 15 29 15 36 15 41 15 46 15 50 15 text_io put procedure 217 14 prog25 adb usr local ada package 1 prog25 adb 5043 3 24 15 27 15 32 15 34 15 39 15 44 15 48 15 adainclude ada ads 960625050300 8 9 24 3 26 3 27 3 29 3 32 3 34 3 36 3 39 3 41 3 44 3 46 3 48 3 and from Rationals prog2l ads rationals pac prog25 adb 40 3 45 3 49434 rational priv prog25 adb function prog25 adb function prog25 adb 960922141400 kage 1 9 2 46 222613361426 1536 166 E726 1836 25 93 283 3323 3553 ate_type 15 8 37 8 2236 13216 14 16 TS L6 16316 17216 18316 19212 22 9 23 29 27 12 38 10 43 10 49 34 49 30 and from Rationals IO prog23 ads io package 2 prog25 adb io get proced prog25 adb io put proced prog25 adb 960922141400 19 3 16 25 13 28 13 33 13 35 13 40 13 45 13 49 13 ure 10 13 33 16 35 16 ure 18 13 25 16 28 16 40 16 45 16 49 16 Power Machren User s Guide A1 23 A1 6 Using gnatk8 We saw above how to override the GNAT file naming conventions using a
105. 48 configuring 143 148 testing 147 database search order 145 defined 143 domainname 144 nis 145 nis 145 nisplus 145 nisserver 144 portmap starting automatically 148 START_portmap 148 START_ypbind 148 testing 147 YP 143 defined 143 ypbind starting automatically 148 ypcat application 147 ypmatch application 147 ypserver 144 nis 145 nisplus 145 nisserver 144 NIST defined 143 nm development tool 214 non printable characters 95 O Objective C 226 olvwm 256 260 OpenGL 13 OpenLook environment illustrated 266 Virtual Window Manager 260 window menu illustrated 274 OpenTransport configuring 178 Macintosh DNS servers 179 networking with 15 replacing 164 using with MachIen TCP stack 164 177 vs MachIen TCP stack 165 166 operating system co resident 3 optimizing your system 22 25 order sub menu 59 60 P parameter passing 72 partitioning your disk 14 passwd command 51 program invoking 49 password changing 77 82 file 77 master file 77 root 74 penfsd 130 PEF 7 9 219 229 231 code fragments 231 performance optimizing 21 22 34 tuning 21 1 14 X server 286 Perl 2 13 permissions access 92 execute 89 file 18 101 example 101 mounting 107 read 89 write 89 Pine4 182 pipes 100 pmake 214 230 POP mail server using Mach as 180 POP3 Post Office Protocol 180 porting software 241 portmap daemon 47 125 143 147 starting automatically 148 positions sub menu 57 POSIX 6 Post Office P
106. 5 32 33 s 34 39x 36 IT 38 3 9 40 41 41 lines N Integer Dy Integer Dummy Character dummy character to hold the begin Get Ada Integer_Text_I0O Get Item gt N Ada Text_IO Get Item gt Dummy Ada Integer_Text_IO Get Item gt D Item N D end Get output procedure procedure Put Item in Rational is begin Put Ada Integer_Text_IO Put Item gt Item Numerator Width gt 1 Ada Text_IO Put Item gt Ada Integer_Text_IO Put Item gt Item Denominator Width gt 1 end Put end Rationals I0 No errors Finally gnatmake invokes the binder and linker gnatbind x prog25 ali gnatlink g prog25 ali Now we execute the demonstration program several times A1 14 Power Machren User s Guide ll E Ww E A B is 1 6 F C D is 2 1 A E F is 13 6 prog25 A 1 3 B 1 2 E A B is 1 6 F C D is 3 2 A E F is 5 3 prog25 A 1 3 B 1 2 Enter rational number C gt 1 0 raised RATIONALS ZERODENOMINATOR Here we entered a zero for the denominator of a rational This is not allowed mathematically so the exception is raised somewhere in the rationals package and propagated out of the main program We can get a full traceback showing where the exception was raised and how it propagated but we need gdb for that Power Machren User s Guide A1 15 A1 3 Using gdb to get a simple traceback G
107. 5 etext symbol 245 fragmentation 23 245 page boundary 245 running out during compile 246 sbrk 245 stack overrun 241 sticky bits 246 source code 218 ps command 23 84 purging files 23 Q quitting Mach 70 X Windows environment 277 R ranlib 214 rc daemon 47 RCS Revision Control System 213 read permission 89 reboot command 70 rebooting MacOS 18 reconfiguring Mach automated 28 manual 29 record locking on Desktop NFS volumes 132 reinstalling MachIen 26 27 remote print jobs receiving 155 printer spooling 1 149 154 configuring 154 to UNIX printer 154 Remote Procedure Calls RPC 124 removing FFS 118 file systems 118 users 82 repairing file systems 116 requirements disk space 14 memory 7 8 14 36 243 system 11 14 resource fork 139 sharing example 163 X Windows 260 restool 111 214 restore command 120 122 Revision Control System RCS 213 RFC 1094 Network File System Protocol Specification 125 rfork 111 root directory tree 103 file system layout 103 password 74 1 16 route command 175 176 routed daemon 24 routing IP packets 39 LocalTalk and Ethernet 39 RPC Remote Procedure Calls 124 RS232 cable 200 r series commands overview 185 run time libraries 220 naming conventions 221 S sbrk 245 scheduling priority slide bar 21 33 34 SCSI tape devices 120 security 73 file system 135 sendmail 24 48 180 daemon 47 Serial DMA 187 serial line communications 186 a
108. 6 6 Setting Up User Accounts 20 Power Machren User s Guide 4 Enter Your License Number Mach license numbers can be entered at any time before the temporary license expires To enter your license number execute the chnglicense program and type your license number into the dialog box Be careful to use proper case for the letters and include the dashes in the license number Input License No L E Figure 8 Chnglicense Dialog Box Click OK to complete the license number registration process Power Machren User s Guide 21 2 1 Performance Tuning Optimizing Machren Mach differs from other UNIX implementations in several significant ways Mach was designed to run on the Macintosh platform This includes machines with limited disk space and memory As services and capabilities are added to these systems it is inevitable that one or the other of these limits will be reached You can optimize Mach performance by tailoring your system to fit your system configuration Mach performance can be dramatically improved by giving some attention to the following configuration options Use a fast disk driver The efficiency of the disk device driver plays an important role in the overall performance of the system Choosing a fast disk and disk driver such as FWB and adhering to the guidelines of disk optimizing tools will improve the Mach system s performance e Use disk caching Setting th
109. 6 9 2 Checking Repairing File Systems A chief FFS maintenance activity is the periodic checking and repairing of FFS bookkeeping structures using the fsck 8 utility During startup Mache automatically checks each FFS registered in etc fstab unless the file clean_start exists This file is only present if Mach was cleanly shut down on the prior launch The Macintosh File Manager assumes responsibility for checking and making minor repairs to Macintosh HFS volumes Other Macintosh applications such as Disk First Aid perform more extensive checks and repairs Therefore Mach takes no additional action to check or repair UFS file systems 6 9 2 1 fsck Whenever the state of an FFS is in doubt run fsck 8 to check and correct the consistency of the FFS bookkeeping information The following command illustrates how to check an FFS within a file sbin fsck lt FSFile_pathname gt Power Machren User s Guide 117 6 9 2 2 Fast File First Aid The fsck utility is also available as a standalone Macintosh application Fast File First Aid located on the Mach CD ROM in the sub folder Utilities Fast File Utilities Fast File First Aid should be used when Mach is unable to boot due to root file system damage It performs a more aggressive and interactive repair of specified FFS files The document fsck pdf located on the Mach CD ROM in the sub folder Documentation MachTen UNIX Docs SysAdmin s Docs smm contains some informati
110. A2 3 0 The GNAT Compilation Model This chapter describes the compilation model used by GNAT Although similar to that used by other languages such as C and C this model is substantially different from the traditional Ada compilation models which are based on a library The model is initially described without reference to this traditional model If you have not previously used an Ada compiler you need only read the first part of this chapter The last section describes and discusses the differences between the GNAT model and the traditional Ada compiler models If you have used other Ada compilers you may find this section helps you to understand those differences A2 3 1 Source Representation Ada source programs are represented in standard text files using Latin 1 coding Latin 1 is ASCII with the additional characters used for representing foreign languages see section 3 2 Foreign Language Representation for support of non USA character sets The format effector characters are represented using their standard ASCII encodings as follows VT Vertical tab 16 0B HT Horizontal tab 16 09 CR Carriage return 16 0D LF Line feed 16 0A FF Form feed 16 0C The end of physical lines is marked by any of the following sequences LF CR CR LF or LF CR Standard Unix files simply use LF to terminate physical lines The other combinations are recognized to provide convenient processing for files
111. A2 79 A2 11 1 Using Other Utility Programs With GNAT A2 79 A2 11 2 The Naming Scheme of GNAT A2 79 A2 11 3 Ada Mode for Emacs A2 80 A2 12 0 Running and Debugging Ada Programs A2 81 A2 12 1 Getting Internal Debugging Information A2 81 A2 12 2 GNAT Crashes A2 81 A2 12 3 Using gdb A2 83 A2 13 0 Performance Considerations A2 84 A2 13 1 Controlling Runtime Checks A2 84 A2 13 2 Optimization Levels A2 85 A2 13 3 Inlining of Subprograms A2 86 Power Machren User s Guide A2 5 A2 1 0 About This Guide This guide describes the language itself as well as the various utilities that allow you to manipulate GNAT code A2 1 1 What This Guide Contains This guide contains the following chapters Getting Started With GNAT Describes how to get started running and compiling with GNAT the Ada programming environment The GNAT Compilation Model Describes the compilation model used by GNAT Compiling Ada Programs With gcc Describes how to compile Ada programs with gcc the Ada compiler Binding Ada Programs With gnatbind Describes how to perform binding in Ada programs with gnatbind the GNAT binding utility Linking Ada Programs Using gnatlink Describes gnatlink a program that provides for linking using the GNAT runtime library to construct a program consisting of a mix of Ada and C sources The GNAT Make Program gnatmake Describes gnatmake a utility that automatically determines and compiles the set of sources needed by an Ada compil
112. Disk This command passes the given username and password to the server for authentication In this case bwnfsd is used to do the authentication so a bwnfsd daemon must be running on the server If the authentication succeeds the volume will appear on the desktop and the credentials used will be those returned by bwnfsd Power Machren User s Guide 135 7 4 3 4 User ID and Password on Command Line It is also possible to specify the user ID and password on the dtmount command line This situation could be used if an administrator was setting up a Mach system for a particular user and it was desirable to mount the Desktop NFS volumes automatically without any interaction from the user To specify a user ID and password on the command line use dtmount o bw_auth3 userid password SharedDisk This command passes the given user ID and password to the server for authentication In this case bwnfsd is used to do the authentication so a bwnfsd daemon must be running on the server If the authentication succeeds the volume will appear on the desktop and the credentials used will be those returned by bwnfsd 7 4 4 File System Security As the sharing of file system data becomes more prevalent the possibility of external tampering or damage to local file data exists Mach enforces UNIX user name and group file system security for all exported NFS files and folders Each remote NFS request contains validated user and group identifiers whi
113. Environment 12 2 1 12 2 2 Starting Clients 12 2 1 1 The Startup Script 12 2 1 2 Resources X Application Preferences The Window Manager Client 12 2 2 1 Starting the Window Manager 12 2 2 2 Using the Mouse 12 2 2 3 Selecting a Window 12 2 2 4 Moving a Window 12 2 2 5 Changing the Size of a Window 12 2 2 6 Changing a Window Into an Icon 12 2 2 7 Moving an Icon xiii 247 247 247 248 249 250 250 251 252 253 255 255 255 255 257 257 257 260 266 266 267 267 268 270 272 273 xiv Power Machren User s Guide 12 2 2 8 Restoring a Window from an Icon 273 12 2 2 9 Displaying a Window Menu and Making Selections 274 12 2 2 10 Summary of Window Menu Functions 275 12 2 2 11 Raising a Window 276 12 2 2 12 Quitting the Window Environment 277 12 2 3 The X Server Program 278 12 2 3 1 X Server Startup Options 278 12 2 3 2 Mouse Button Mapping 281 12 2 3 3 Keyboard Mapping 284 12 2 3 4 Server Error Logging 285 12 2 3 5 X Server Performance Tuning Guide 286 12 2 3 6 The Default Font Path 287 12 2 3 7 Obtaining Fonts from a Network Font Server 288 12 2 3 8 Providing Fonts Over the Network 289 12 2 4 X Display Management Under Mach 289 12 2 4 1 The Mach X Server and XDM 290 12 2 5 X Over Serial Lines 293 12 3 Mach X Window Software Overview 294 12 3 1 Preparing Your Macintosh Control Panels 296 12 3 2 Getting Started With X 299 12 3 3 Building X Applications 299 12 3 3 1 Running X Client Applica
114. Ethernet ieO TokenRing trO Default Gateway Domain Name Domain Name Server SLIP MTU TokenRing MTU Figure 13 Networking Configuration Screen Mach will extract all default network parameters from the TCP control panel if available See section 10 0 Networking with Mach for more details on internetworking topics introduced by the Networking Configuration screen The default number of serial interfaces can be increased to satisfy custom serial interface requirements See the Configuration Resources technical note in the pub tech_notes directory on ftp tenon com Power Machren User s Guide 39 3 2 3 1 Enable IP Forwarding Check this box to enable forwarding of Internet Protocol IP packets IP packet forwarding enables the system to act as a router between LocalTalk and Ethernet or other interfaces 3 2 3 2 Enable Incoming Mail Check this box if you want to receive internet network mail messages directly on your system i e turn your Mach system into a mail server When checked the UNIX sendmail daemon is started automatically when Mach is launched If you use any other mail program e g QuickMail ccMail Eudora leave this box unchecked By default sendmail is disabled ts There is no need to enable sendmail to send electronic mail to the network or to send and receive local Machren mail among user accounts on your Machren Macintosh 3 2 3 3 Enable Incoming Connecti
115. Ethernet network using the following command route add net E O A 1 5 where E 0 means all addresses on Ethernet This command tells the Mach kernel to route all of the packets destined for the Ethernet to AppleTalk address A 1 Non routing Mach systems refer to routers as gateways Configure your system with a default gateway in the Networking screen of the Mach control panel Other routes may be added using the route 8 command 10 6 1 Invoking IP Forwarding If a host connected to more than one network desires to forward route IP datagrams check the Enable IP Forwarding box in the Mach control panel If the setting of the check box is changed the new setting takes effect after the system is rebooted Power Machren User s Guide 177 10 7 Dual Stack Configuration It may be convenient to configure both OpenTransport and the MachIen TCP IP for simultaneous operations on the same system This configuration requires configuring each TCP IP with a different IP address Using this configuration a single Macintosh has two Internet Protocol IP addresses The IP address configured for OpenTransport is contained in the OpenTransport TCP IP control panel The IP address configured for Mach is contained in the MachIen control panel under the Networking sub panel Simply configuring different addresses in each of these control panels and configuring Mach for Mach BSD TCP IP operations will provid
116. FS volume use dtmount SharedDisk The credentials used will be those of the user who issued the dtmount command 134 Power Machren User s Guide 7 4 3 2 Prompt for Username and Password To closely mimic the Apple File Sharing model a user may be prompted for a username and a password for each Desktop NFS volume added to the desktop This username and password are authenticated by the server If the authentication succeeds the server returns the credentials to be used when accessing this volume To prompt the user for a username and password use dtmount o bw_auth SharedDisk This command will display a Macintosh style dialog box requesting a username and a password Once the username and password are entered they are passed to the server for authentication In this case bwnfsd is used to do the authentication so abwnfsd daemon must be running on the server If the authentication succeeds the volume will appear on the desktop and the credentials used will be those returned by bwnfsd 7 4 3 3 Username and Password on Command Line It is also possible to specify the username and password on the dtmount command line This situation could be used if an administrator was setting up a Mach system for a particular user and it was desirable to mount the Desktop NFS volumes automatically without any interaction from the user To specify a username and password on the command line use dtmount o bw_auth2 username password Shared
117. II terminals modems or other Mach and UNIX systems Mach supports traditional UNIX use of these serial ports and provides a comprehensive set of applications for communications via these ports 10 15 1 Cabling and Connectors The serial ports require a Macintosh specific connector a mini 8 pin connector Macintosh dealers carry a modem cable that adapts a mini 8 pin connector to the traditional RS 232 DB25 connector which can be directly connected to most modems Typically a null modem is also needed to cross the send and receive lines between a Macintosh and an ASCII terminal or other UNIX systems 10 15 2 Matching Serial Ports to UNIX Devices Mach has two devices for accessing serial ports dev ttya used to communicate with the modem port and dev ttyb used to communicate with the printer port Two corresponding devices dev ttyfa and dev ttyfb are used when your application requires hardware flow control on the modem or printer port Note that the printer port is usually used as the AppleTalk networking port If LocalTalk is being used dev ttyb cannot be used In order to use dev ttyb AppleTalk must be turned off via the Chooser and the Macintosh must be rebooted Machren supports additional serial ports provided by add on serial port multiplexer boards Refer to the Additional Serial Ports technical note in the pub tech_notes directory on ftp tenon com for more information Power Machren User
118. Mach is targeted for a single user non networked system the mount and umount commands have been set to run as root This allows you to log in as a normal user and still be able to mount or unmount file systems without having to be superuser to gain temporary root privileges 108 Power Machren User s Guide 6 6 2 Automatic Mounting of Removable Media Mach provides a special UNIX daemon called macmntd 8 to handle automatic mounting of removable media like floppies CDs and Bernoulli Jaz Syquest and Zip disks macmntd watches for disk inserted events and passes the volume name of the inserted disk to the mount command If an entry for this volume exists in the etc fstab file the volume will be automatically mounted on the specified path If no entry exists macmntd will create a directory named volume lt volume name gt and mount the volume on this directory Once mounted whether automatically or explicitly by the mount command the volume can be used as a normal UNIX file system If you look in the volume directory you will see the floppy_name directory To change to the directory to see the files on your floppy the commands are as follows cd volume lt volume_name gt ls Now you can perform any valid operation on those files such as copying cp 1 moving mv 1 or executing by typing the name of the file followed by a carriage return 6 6 3 Unmounting Macintosh Volumes In Mach the umount 8 command has been
119. Machren User s Guide The following boolean variables determine whether or not an optional service is invoked or is started by rc CLEANUP_tmp Remove files from tmp aka var tmp at startup MOUNT_REMOTE_FILES Mount all file systems recorded in etc fstab fstab 5 at startup PRESERVE_EDITOR_FILES Preserve ex and vi edits in progress in the event of a system crash START_cron Execute commands by date time via cron 8 START_inetd Service incoming internet connections via inetd 8 START_lpd Manage spooled printer output via lpd 8 START_macmntd Automatically mount inserted floppies via macmntd 8 START_named Answer network queries for host names and addresses via named 8 the domain name server START_sendmail Enable incoming internet mail via sendmail 8 START_syslogd Log system messages via syslogd 8 By default this variable is set if the START sendmail definition is affirmative A null value or string is interpreted as negative any other value is interpreted as affirmative For example the entry START_sendmail yes will start the sendmail daemon during the boot process whereas the entry START_sendmail will not start sendmail Unused variables can be also be disabled made negative by preceding the entry with a pound sign Power Machren User s Guide 67 The following definitions are miscellaneous service definitions GATEWAY The host name or internet add
120. NAT does not come with its own debugger or even a built in traceback facility Instead it depends upon the GNU debugger gdb Let s use gdb to get a traceback from our rationals demonstration We type gdb prog25 and we are placed in gdb s command processor gdb s prompts are indicated by gdb GDB is free software and you are welcome to distribute copies of it under certain conditions type show copying to see the conditions There is absolutely no warranty for GDB type show warranty for details GDB 4 15 1 gnat 1 10 Copyright 1995 Free Software Foundation Inc gdb break __gnat_unhandled_exception We have indicated that we wish gdb to stop the program and accept more commands if an unhandled exception is raised The address of the breakpoint is given this will in general vary from machine to machine and even execution to execution The file a raise c is part of the GNAT runtime and not of concern to us here Breakpoint 1 at Oxl7dec file a raise c line 65 Now we tell gdb to run the program It will run normally unless that breakpoint is reached gdb run Starting program prog25 Breakpoint 1 at Oxlfa328c file a raise c line 65 A 1 3 B 1 2 Enter rational number C gt 1 0 Breakpoint 1 __gnat_unhandled_exception except 0x36abb58 at a raise c 65 A1 16 Power Machren User s Guide a raise c 65 No such file or directory Here we stop at the breakpoint because we entered that zero denomin
121. NOMEM Error not enough memory Run only the daemon processes that are needed If you do not need the services provided by a daemon you can disable it via rc conf 5 Use ps 1 to find out how much memory each process is consuming If available memory is filled terminate unwanted processes with kill 1 This will free up the memory those processes are consuming Keep the maximum memory that you are consuming below a high water mark to avoid memory fragmentation problems The probability of memory fragmentation increases as the percentage of free space decreases You can run many Macintosh applications at the same time by reducing each Macintosh applcation s memory allotment Under Finder select the application select Get Info from the File menu double click to select the number in the box labeled Application Memory Size click on the Close box 24 Daemon Processes NES Server This service is provided by three daemons portmap mountd and nfsd Power Machren User s Guide Run NFS daemons on NFS servers only There is no advantage to running multiple nfsd s under Machlen they only consume more memory sendmail sendmail is a large application It is required to receive network mail It is not required to send network mail If you are short on memory you may want to rlogin to another machine or use a POP client to read your mail syslogd inetd This is the system
122. OS Interface Libraries To include a standard Apple interface library with Mach application development commands requires a few careful preparation steps The file creator must be modified and potentially a translation must be specified from the name of the library file to the fragment name used to access the shared library by the Macintosh system System interface libraries are available in all standard Apple software development systems e g MPW Metrowerks typically in a libraries hierarchy of directories Under a libraries hierarchy there is a set of Power Macintosh interface libraries The Macintosh creator must be modified to incorporate one of these libraries on a MachIen command line Generally this has no effect on access to the library by the native development software Modifying a library creator to MUMM will allow Machiento access the file as a binary file The file should already have a Macintosh type identification of shlb which is used by Mach development tools to determine whether shared access to the PEF interface library is to be reflected in the final application File creator and type information is available by running finderinfo 1 or ResEdit and selecting the Get Info function from the File menu Creator information can be modified under ResEdit with traditional Macintosh point and click methods Do not to make a copy of one of the libraries using Mach applications until the creator has b
123. Optimization Guidelines The System Optimization Guidelines table which follows will help you customize Mach systems for particular environments A little system attention will go a long way to give you a smoothly running system It is important to remember that Mach relies solely on physical memory However if you monitor your system resources and are careful not to overload your system with unneeded daemons you will have good results with Mach even with limited memory Power Machren User s Guide 23 Table 1 System Optimization Guidelines Disk Space Limitations A system with 500MB or less of hard disk will probably require careful attention to tidiness of the available disk space By default the etc rc file will preserve the editor files and then automatically remove files in tmp on each restart Note that subdirectories in tmp are not purged A cron 8 entry may be created to purge old preserved editor files from var preserve If a server system is available with more disk space always use NFS Use df 1 to determine the capacity and available space of each mounted file system Memory Space Limitations Since Mach does not support paging nor does it swap processes from memory to disk all of the processes blocked sleeping and running consume real memory When the memory is filled up no new processes can be started Process instantiation execve 2 will fail with an E
124. Power Machren User s Guide Note that some of the very low baud rates have been mapped to the recently more popular higher baud rates dv The serial port with an attached or built in modem on your Macintosh to be used for the SLIP connection The standard modem port dev ttya is the default setting You may also use the printer port dev ttyb however the printer port is typically reserved for AppleTalk connections at A string representing the modem type pn The telephone number dialed to establish the connection If no phone number is given tip will use the system name to look up a phone number in the etc phones database See phones 5 sa The local SLIP internet address da The destination SLIP internet address sm The SLIP network mask st The protocol type by default SLIP Is A pathname to a special script that is run by tip after the connection is established The script typically communicates account name and password information to the remote host s login shell to authenticate the pending SLIP session Refer to section 10 15 9 5 Tip Login Script for details on the script s command format 10 15 9 4 Hardware Flow Control You will need to enable hardware flow control on your serial line depending on the capabilities of your modem and your RS232 cable type Apple Computer makes at least two different types of RS232 cable one lacks the Clear To Send CTS RS232 signal necessary
125. S the files should have only the UNIX permission Read Shared Folders A Desktop NFS folder with See Files See Folders and Make Changes permissions has the UNIX permissions Read Write and Search This mode is used to maintain a shared folder users can open read change add and delete files In Desktop NFS the permissions to Read or Write the files within a shared folder are granted by the permissions of the actual files themselves To implement a shared folder in Desktop NFS the files should have the UNIX permissions Read and Write Note that with Desktop NFS it is possible to mix bulletin board and shared folder styles with each file maintaining its own privileges Drop Folders A Desktop NFS folder without See Files and See Folders but with Make Changes permissions has the UNIX permissions Write and Search This mode is used to maintain a drop folder Users can deposit files or folders but cannot read remove or change anything in the folder Power Machren User s Guide 139 7 4 4 5 Differences Between Apple File Sharing and Desktop NFS With Apple File Sharing users can give away ownership of the files they own More specifically users can change the owner of a file from themselves to some other user In NFS only the superuser or root user can change the ownership of a file Therefore with Desktop NFS it is not possible for a
126. The previous section describing NFS server and client setup applies to DTNFS as well dtnfs is activated when the dtmount command is issued As an example the command mount t nfs o rw soft omar space mnt will mount the space file system from a remote NFS server named omar on the local client Mach system at mount point mnt The command dtmount mnt promotes the NFS file system to appear as a network volume icon named mnt on your local desktop Traditional Macintosh point and click operations using the volume icon will generate NFS requests on omar s space directory while having the appearance to the Finder and other Macintosh applications that the volume and all files and folders within it are on an AppleShare server Drag the DINFS volume to the Trash to remove it from the desktop This will sever the linkage between the desktop and the remote NFS server If you prefer udtmount 8 may be used to remove the volume udtmount mnt Finally to completely remove the NFS server from the NFS client use the umount 8 command umount mnt 132 Power Machren User s Guide 7 4 1 1 Automatic Mounting of Desktop NFS Volumes As with non DTNFS volumes the etc fstab file is searched for DTNFS volumes to mount in response to a mount a command A DTNFS entry is distinguished from anon DTNFS entry in etc fstab by the option dtfst omar space mnt nfs dtfst rw soft 0 0 7 4 2 Macintosh Record Locking on Desktop NFS V
127. The Debug pragma causes procedure to be called Note that pragma Debug may appear within a declaration sequence allowing debugging procedures to be called between declarations A2 4 3 3 Runtime Checks If you compile with the default options GNAT will insert many runtime checks into the compiled code including code that performs range checking against constraints but not arithmetic overflow checking for integer operations including division by zero or checks for access before elaboration on subprogram calls All other runtime checks as required by the Ada 95 Reference Manual are generated by default The following two gcc switches refine this default behavior gnatp Suppress all runtime checks as though you have pragma Suppress all_checks in your source Use this switch to improve the performance of the code at the expense of safety in the presence of invalid data or program bugs Power Machren User s Guide A2 37 gnato Enables overflow checking for integer operations and checks for access before elaboration on subprogram calls o stands for other checks This causes GNAT to generate slower and larger executable programs by adding code to check for both overflow and division by zero resulting in raising Constraint_Error as required by Ada semantics Similarly GNAT does not generate elaboration checks by default and you must specify the gnato switch to enable them Note that the gnato
128. The order and types of search for an NIS server can be specified as part of the Mach NIS client configuration The NIS server specifications for NIS version 2 YP operations are contained in the etc yp conf file The NIS server specifications for NIS version 3 NIS and NIST operations are contained in the etc nis conf file The order in which databases are searched is defined in the etc nsswitch conf file After a set of NIS servers and their search order are specified the system configuration file etc rc conf must be modified to start two NIS client software daemons portmap and ypbind After those configuration steps are complete NIS client operations should be available 144 Power Machren User s Guide 8 2 Set YP Configuration in etc yp conf To configure operations for a version 2 NIS server the etc yp conf file is modified The etc yp conf file contains ypserver and domainname entries To define a YP NIS server specify the internet address or name of the server on a ypserver line in the etc yp conf file There may be multiple ypserver entries in an etc yp conf file The servers are contacted in the order in which they are entered in the file until a match for the requested data is found ypserver entries have the following form ypserver 10 0 0 28 ypserver 10 0 0 29 Setting a domainname entry in etc yp conf maps all operations of a specific domain to the specified ypserver domainname tenon com 8 3 Set NIS Config
129. Varl C External_Name gt varl_name Var2 Integer pragma Export Var2 C Link_Name gt var2_link_ name end Exports In this case the link name for Var1 is var1_name and the link name for Var2 is var2_link_name One exception occurs for library level procedures A potential ambiguity arises between the required name _main for the C main program and the name we would otherwise assign to an Ada library level procedure called Main which might well not be the main program To avoid this ambiguity we attach the prefix _ada_ to such names So if we have a library level procedure such as procedure Hello S String the external name of this procedure will be _ada_hello A2 11 3 Ada Mode for Emacs In the subdirectory emacs ada mode you will find a set of files implementing an Ada mode under GNU emacs The mode is still under development but a number of features are complete For instance the Ada mode has the same indenting friendliness that C programmers get with the c mode you can toggle between specification and body with a few keystrokes etc This mode also uses gnatf to be able to point to an entity with the mouse click it and open a window with its definition This mode is copyrighted by Markus Heritsch and Rolf Ebert A2 82 Power Machren User s Guide A2 12 0 Running and Debugging Ada Programs This chapter discusses how to run and debug Ada programs A2 12 1 Gett
130. X system they are assigned individual and group IDs and are given a node in the directory tree structure This node also called the user s login directory or home directory designates a private storage area for that user In addition a user environment is established for each user The user environment is governed by the user s choice of UNIX shell see section 5 6 2 The UNIX Shell and associated login file s placed in the user s home directory The parameters that describe each user account are kept in a special password file called etc passwd see passwd 5 described in sections 5 6 7 The Password File and 5 6 8 The Group File Mach supplies a utility program adduser 1 for establishing login accounts and home directories See section 5 6 6 Setting Up User Accounts 72 Power Machren User s Guide 5 6 2 The UNIX Shell The UNIX shell is the UNIX command interpreter When you type commands in a MachrIen terminal window you are communicating with the shell Mach provides both the Bourne shell called sh and the C shell called csh If you have already logged in as root you are running under the C shell Both the Bourne shell and the C shell are powerful execution environments In addition both shells support programming languages that include flow control primitives parameter passing variables and string substitution The Bourne shell is more compact and uses less m
131. XCOFF eXtended Common Object File Format As the name implies this file format extends the amount of information kept about an application including its structure and data This results in a significantly larger disk file and longer dynamic relocation overhead For Machien debugging purposes it is possible to retain an XCOFF image of a PEF executable See section 11 7 Linking Executables for command line information to retain XCOFF file images 11 3 Shared Libraries The Machien development software supports the production of libraries of software that may be shared among application programs Using shared libraries a second copy of a program shares part of its memory with a first program instance Shared libraries result in large memory savings when families of applications are executing at the same time Secondarily shared libraries also aid in the introduction of a new version Since shared libraries are linked during the execution of a program rather than the development of a program a new version of a shared library can be introduced simply by replacing an older version and restarting the applications that use it In older non shared organizations each application would have to be re linked with the new library and then introduced into a system 220 Power Machren User s Guide 11 3 1 Shared Library Production To produce a shared library with the Mach development system you must specify that you want a shared library to b
132. a 83 Programs gnat83 Although GNAT is primarily an Ada 95 compiler it accepts this switch to specify that an Ada 83 mode program is being compiled If you specify this switch GNAT rejects Ada 95 extensions and applies Ada 83 semantics It is not possible to guarantee this switch does a perfect job for example some subtle tests of pathological cases such as are found in ACVC tests that have been removed from the ACVC suite for Ada 95 may not compile correctly However for practical purposes using this switch should ensure that programs that compile correctly under the gnat 83 switch can be ported reasonably easily to an Ada 83 compiler This is the main use of the switch With few exceptions most notably the need to use lt gt on unconstrained generic formal parameters it is not necessary to use the gnat 83 switch when compiling Ada 83 programs because with rare and obscure exceptions Ada 95 is upwardly compatible with Ada 83 This means that a correct Ada 83 program is usually also a correct Ada 95 program Power Machren User s Guide A2 39 A2 4 3 7 Style Checking gnatr Normally GNAT permits any code layout consistent with the reference manual requirements This switch r is for reference manual enforces the layout conventions suggested by the examples and syntax rules of the Ada Language Reference Manual For example an else must line up with an if and code in the then and else parts
133. a X security authorization library libXaw a The Athena widget set of buttons pull down menus labels etc libXdmcp a X Display Manager Control Protocol library libXext a X extensions library Power Machren User s Guide 217 Tools for Building X Window Programs continued libXi a Alternative input device extension library libXIE a X Image Extensions library libXmu a X miscellaneous utilities library libXpm a X pixmap image library libXt a X Intrinsics toolkit library libXtst a X Test library libXview a X View library 11 1 2 Documentation Mach documentation is available in many formats Online documentation includes the ubiquitous UNIX man pages in usr share man and the GNU info files in usr share info The top level Documentation folder on the Mach CD ROM provides extensive documentation in HTML and printable form The HTML collection includes several GNAT documents the Lovelace Ada tutorial many GNU package info documents and the UNIX man pages The printable collection includes many BSD supplementary papers in PDF format as well as PostScript versions of the man pages 218 Power Machren User s Guide 11 1 3 Program Sources The sources distributed with Mach may be found in the top level folder of the MachIen CD ROM in the Source_FFS fast file system file The source modules are organized into a number of directories indicative of their origin or use The default sou
134. a login console is displayed Mach daemons are described in detail in section 8 of the UNIX man pages In Mach the startup data files Table 3 Mach Data Files may be configured via the Mach control panel Mach data files are described in detail in section 5 of the man pages KEY ABA tuns B written database file i F f MachTen Prefs read database file Preferences Folder MachTen Control Panel MachTen misc Install conf 4 etc rc cont A MachTen Libraries MachTen unix MachTen misc re config etc resolv cont en etc sendmail cf MachTen Console a etc init 4 4BSD Unix console login etc ttys etc sendmail cw etc hosts etcirc usretc ifconfig ra ust etc route ee etc motd gt usr etc mount usr lib sendmail s _ P usr etc zoneinfo localtime etc rc local n l J s 2 d C nfsd mountd SS etc fstab m ig etc inetd conf etc printcap etc exports etc named boot usr lib crontab dev diskinsert etc syslog conf Figure 16 Machren Initialization Power Machren User s Guide 47 Table 2 Machren Daemons re Main configuration file contr
135. a window to and from an icon 272 273 file menu 252 illustrated 250 menu bar 251 mouse clicking and dragging 267 pointer shapes 267 moving a window 268 269 raising a window 276 277 selecting a window 267 sizing a window 270 271 using the mouse 267 window menu 253 displaying 274 functions 253 276 functions summary 275 Power Machren User s Guide X Display Management See X server XDM X Intrinsics Toolkit 262 X server automatic launching 255 command line options 278 281 database 263 default font path 287 error logging 285 getting started 299 menu bar shortcuts 255 network font server 288 performance tuning 286 providing fonts over network 289 quitting 255 running without a menu bar 255 starting 250 XDM 289 292 configuring 290 292 session 292 X Windows 249 303 AfterStep Window Manager 260 applications 1 building 299 300 running 301 clients starting 257 startup script 257 example 258 259 configuring 257 control panels 296 298 defined 249 desktop 5 250 development environment 301 tools 1 keyboards 259 Alt keys 285 1 21 international 284 X Meta keys 285 libraries 216 217 manager 5 260 AfterStep 5 hot keys 256 overview 266 starting 266 Motif Window Manger 260 mouse button mapping 281 Logitech 283 three button 281 283 configuration 281 default keystrokes 282 example 283 mwm 260 olvwm 260 OpenLook environment illustrated 266 Virtual Window Manager 260 over serial lines 293 overview 294
136. achren User s Guide A2 7 5 Examples of gnatmake Usage gnatmake hello adb Compile all files necessary to bind and link the main program hello adb containing unit Hello and bind and link the resulting object files to generate an executable file hello gnatmake q Main_Unit cargs 02 bargs 1 Compile all files necessary to bind and link the main program unit Main_Unit from file main_unit adb All compilations will be done with optimization level 2 and the order of elaboration will be listed by the binder gnatmake will operate in quiet mode not displaying commands it is executing Power Machren User s Guide A2 65 A2 8 0 Handling Files With Multiple Units With gnatchop This chapter discusses how to handle files with multiple units by using the gnatchop utility A2 8 1 Handling Files With Multiple Units The basic compilation model of GNAT requires a file submitted to the compiler have only one unit and there must be a strict correspondence between the file name and the unit name The gnatchop utility allows both of these rules to be relaxed allowing GNAT to process files which contain multiple compilation units and files with arbitrary filenames The approach used by gnatchop is to read the specified file and generate one or more output files containing one unit per file and with proper filenames as required by GNAT If you want to permanently restructure a set of foreign files so that they match t
137. ack Networking The choice of using OpenTransport Tenon TCP or dual stack networking is controlled by the placement of three libraries in the Tenon Kernel Libraries folder Table 5 shows the valid combinations for the location of these libraries To change configuration quit MachIen use the Finder to re position the libraries and re launch MachTren Table 5 Networking Configuration Choices Configuration Tenon Kernel Disabled Libraries Use OpenTransport default OT SocketLib SocketLib MacTCPdLib Replace OpenTransport SocketLib OTSocketLib MacTCPdLib Dual stack SocketLib OTSocketLib MacTCPdLib 168 Power Machren User s Guide 10 3 Using Mach as an Internet Host Mach supports internet communications The Internet is a collection of networks that provides global communications Each host on an internet is assigned an internet address which consists of a network identifier and a host identifier Mach supports the full range of internet class A through C internet addresses as well as internet subnetting capabilities You must contact Network Solutions in Herndon Virginia http www internic net to obtain an internet address for your network It is a good idea to get an official internet address even if you don t plan to connect to the Internet This will ease the transition downstream if and when you decide to join the global network Once your system is set up as an internet host
138. actly the same way they are applied to local directories The following man pages describe all of the NFS daemons commands and special files exports 5 fstab 5 inetd 8 mount 8 mountd 8 nfsd 8 portmap 8 and rpcinfo 8 You should have a general familiarity with the names and functions of these network file system components 7 3 Setting Up an NFS Server or an NFS Client Every Mach system can be set up as an NFS client an NFS server or as a system that acts both as a client and a server An NFS client system receives services from an NFS server an NFS server provides services to one or more NFS clients A client may or may not have a disk a server must have at least one local disk A client mounts directories while a server exports directories Clients play an active role initiating a binding between themselves and a server the server completes the binding The server plays a passive role simply advertising files that clients can access the clients actively mount directories that are advertised by the server 126 Power Machren User s Guide 7 3 1 Server Exporting The server advertises the directories that it is prepared to export in the etc exports file Each directory entry also contains any access restrictions that may apply This file is created by the system administrator using a text editor and processed by mountd upon startup An etc exports file has the following syntax directory option option hos
139. al do_console_display and add the name of the xdmuser account xdmuser e Edit the etc ttys file and find the line console usr libexec getty std 9600 vt100 on secure Change this line to console usr libexec getty display std 9600 vt100 on secure Mach will recognize the display variable in this file at boot time and automatically log into the account specified in usr local do_console_display e Create a windrc file in the home directory of the xdmuser account with a single entry x in the file This entry will cause the X server to launch automatically when the xdmuser account starts up the MachIen windows environment e Follow the instructions in section 12 2 3 1 X Server Startup Options to create custom X server parameters for the XDM managed desktop e Copy usr lib X11 startX startXrc to a startXrc file in the home directory of the xdmuser account Edit the startXrc file and change the following 1 Comment out the USE_XINIT variable 2 Uncomment the XDM_METHOD variable 3 Uncomment the XDM_SERVER lt hostname gt variable and change lt hostname gt to lt localhost gt 292 Power Machren User s Guide When the server starts up it will communicate with xdm to display the xdm login window on the local display e You can further automate the process to display an xdm login window when your Macintosh is powered on by using Finder to place an alias to the MachIen application in your S
140. am will send many messages to your console when a client connects This can be disabled by setting the SDEBUG_OFF to the DEBUG variable The easiest way to choose client addresses is to use addresses from you local subnet The proxyarp option is used by etc pppserver to make this work To terminate a PPP connection from Machrien first determine the process number for the pppd program by typing the following command ps ax Terminate the pppd process by typing the following kill lt pid gt where lt pid gt is the process number of the pppd process 194 Power Machren User s Guide 10 15 8 3 Configuring your Machren System as a PPP Client The first step in setting up a PPP client is to connect a modem to your Macintosh The recommended procedure is to use the Communications ToolBox to handle the modem configuration Test the modem connection by using the tip command to dial out tip cm out If you wish to access the serial ports directly the Macintosh modem port is ttya and the printer port is tt yb The tip commands are tip ttya or tip ttyb Mach supports hardware flow control for the devices tt yfa and ttyfb Note that hardware flow control requires a special cable If you are using the Communications ToolBox using the cm out line will cause a Communications ToolBox dialog to appear 1 Adjust the settings for your modem and dial out
141. amp using for background processing 85 A access permissions 89 92 accessing Mac files from UNIX applications 110 source files 30 Ada 1 2 12 224 documentation 12 ADDRINFO_ variable 65 adduser command 75 193 administration 63 86 file major 106 system 115 login accounts 80 MachrIen 63 AfterStep desktop 5 X Window manager 5 260 aliases defined 93 allocating memory 36 allocation blocks defined 91 Alpha 2 Apache 173 Apple menu 53 Remote Access 293 AppleDict 159 AppleDouble 139 AppleShare access privileges NFS 135 AppleSingle encapsulation 110 AppleTalk 65 124 293 applications hybrid 9 archiving file systems 120 AutoDoubler disabling 16 automatic booting of MachT 67 mounting Desktop NFS volumes 132 removable media 108 background program execution 85 backing up file systems 120 tar command 121 baud rates 152 187 table 187 BBEditLite 2 12 173 Berkeley Internet Name Domain BIND 170 r series commands 185 BINA file types 97 98 binary file types 97 98 BIND Berkeley Internet Name Domain 170 BLK file types 99 block devices 93 99 booting up Mach automatically 67 Bourne shell 49 72 broadcasting messages 81 buckets defined 235 buffers increasing the number of 22 UFS and NFS 22 37 bulletin board folders 138 bwnfsd 130 UID and GID mapping 133 compiler 1 225 shell 49 72 C compiler 1 226 cable GPI 188 cabling and connectors for serial po
142. an The George Washington University 7 Copyright 1996 Michael B Feldman All Rights Reserved 8 9 TOG procedure Get Item out Rational T Pre None 12 Post The first integer number read is the numerator of Item 13 the second integer number is the denominator of Item 14 A between the two numbers is optional TS The Rational constructor is called 16 to produce a rational in reduced form Lis 18 procedure Put Item in Rational 19 Pre Item is defined 20 Post displays the numerator and denominator of Item 2e 22 end Rationals IO 22 lines No errors Power Machren User s Guide A1 9 Now we are ready to build Test_Rationals_1 gnatmake g v gnatl f prog25 adb GNATMAKE 3 05 960607 Copyright 1995 Free Software Foundation Inc gcc c g gnatl prog25 adb GNAT 3 05 960607 Copyright 1991 1996 Free Software Foundation Inc Compiling prog25 adb source file time stamp 1996 09 22 14 14 01 1 with Ada Text_I0O 2 with Rationals use type Rationals Rational 3 with Rationals I10 4 procedure Test_Rationals_l is on 6 Very rudimentary test of package Rationals and Rationals IO Tat 8 Author Michael B Feldman The George Washington University 9 Copyright 1996 Michael B Feldman All Rights Reserved 10 Last Modified July 1995 LTs 12 1 33 A Rationals Rational 14 B Rationals Rational TS
143. and b_mainprog o files without g the binder removes these files by default name is the name of the linker to be invoked You normally omitthis switch in which case the default name for the linker is gcc A2 58 Power Machren User s Guide A2 7 0 The GNAT Make Program gnatmake A typical development cycle when working on an Ada program consists of the following steps 1 Edit some sources to fix bugs 2 Add enhancements 3 Compile all sources affected 4 Rebind and relink 5 Test The third step can be tricky because not only do the modified files have to be compiled but any files depending on these files must also be recompiled The dependency rules in Ada can be quite complex especially in the presence of overloading use clauses generics and inlined subprograms gnatmake automatically takes care of the third and fourth steps of this process It determines which sources need to be compiled compiles them and binds and links the resulting object files Unlike some other Ada make programs the dependencies are always accurately recomputed from the new sources The source based approach of the GNAT compilation model makes this possible This means that if changes to the source program cause corresponding changes in dependencies they will always be tracked exactly correctly by gnatmake Power Machren User s Guide A2 59 A2 7 1 Running gnatmake The gnatmake command has the form gnat
144. and how these files are being used Each ALI file consists of a series of lines of the form Key_Character parameter parameter The first two lines in the file identify the library output version and Standard version These are required to be consistent across the entire set of compilation units in your program V XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX This line indicates the library output version as defined in gnatvsn ads It ensures that separate object modules of a program are consistent It must be changed if anything changes that would affect successful binding of modules compiled separately Examples of such changes are modifications in the format of the library information described in this package modifications to calling sequences or to the way data is represented S XXXXXKXKXKXXKXKXKXXKXKXXK This line contains information regarding types declared in packages Standard as stored in Gnatusn Standard_Version The purpose on systems where for example the size of Integer can be set by command line switches is to ensure that all units ina program are compiled with a consistent set of options Power Machren User s Guide A2 21 The following line is present only for a unit that can be a main program It has the form M type priority type is either P for a parameterless procedure or F for a function returning a value of integral type The latter is for writing a main program that returns an exit status priority is pres
145. ange 80 FF are allowed in identifiers This gives Ada 95 compatibility for identifier names For precise data on the encodings permitted and the uppercase and lower case equivalences that are recognized see the file csets adb in the GNAT compiler sources Wide Character Coding GNAT allows wide character codes to appear in character and string literals and also optionally in identifiers using the following possible encoding schemes Hex Coding In this encoding a wide character is represented by the following five character sequence ESC abcd Where a b c dare the four hexadecimal characters using uppercase letters of the wide character code For example ESC A345 is used to represent the wide character with code 16 A345 This scheme is compatible with use of the full Wide_Character set Power Machren User s Guide A2 15 Upper Half Coding The wide character with encoding 1 6 abcd where the upper bit is on in other words a is in the range 8 F is represented as two bytes 16 ab and 16 cd The second byte may never be a format control character but is not required to be in the upper half This method can be also used for shift JIS or EUC where the internal coding matches the external coding Shift JIS Coding A wide character is represented by a two character sequence 16 ab and 16 cd with the restrictions described for upper half encoding as described above The internal charac
146. anual of Style by Nathan Gurewich Ori Gurewich Ziff Davis Press ISBN 156276408X Includes The building blocks of Java programming how to use the Java Developer Tool Kit and how to create applets that will maximize the interactivity in your site The Java Programming Language The Java Series by Ken Arnold James Gosling Addison Wesley ISBN 0201634554 Co authored by the creator of Java technology The Java Programming Language is the definitive resource for all serious Java programmers Power Machren User s Guide C 5 X11 The following books published by O Reilly amp Associates are recommended for learning more about X Volume 1 Xlib Programming Manual Volume 2 Xlib Reference Manual Volume 3 X Window System User s Guide Details the X Window System and common X client applications This volume is available in an OSF Motif Edition focusing on the Motif user environment and mwm Motif is not included with Mach Volume 4 X Toolkit Intrinsics Programming Manual Volume 5 X Toolkit Intrinsics Reference Manual Comprehensive guides to programming with the X library and X Toolkit Volume 8 X Window System Administrators Guide Comprehensive guide to administering the X Window System This volume is a highly recommended companion to the Mach X Window Software package C 6 Power Machren User s Guide Power Machren User s Guide INDEX Symbols prompt 51 75
147. ape Devices Mach supports DAT 4mm and Exabyte 8mm tape drives The Mach tape interface has been designed to support a generic SCSI tape device and has been tested specifically using the following mechanisms DAT Models using the Archive Python tape drive e g ClubMac and Wang DAT 2600 Exabyte Model EXB 8200 Power Machren User s Guide 121 Mach can be configured to simultaneously support up to four tape drives and is configured by default for a single tape device e g MAKEDEV mt0 in the following example has already been done Additional tape device files may be created by executing the following commands see mtio 4 and dev MAKEDEV cd dev MAKEDEV mt1 MAKEDEV mt2 MAKEDEV mt3 Mach uses four device files for each tape drive For example the following device files apply to the first tape drive unit 0 Machien uses a scan of the SCSI chain from ID 6 to ID 0 to identify tape sub systems and associate them with unit numbers The first tape drive found is unit 0 the second is unit 1 and so on dev xrmt0 unit 0 rewind on close dev rmt4 unit 0 no rewind on close dev xrmt8 unit 0 compressed rewind on close dev rmt12 unit 0 compressed no rewind on close The minor device number encodes two attributes whether or not to rewind the tape on completion and whether or not to use compression if supported by the tape hardware 6 9 7 2 tar The
148. application development usr X11 man mann X11 manual pages 296 Power Machren User s Guide 12 3 1 Preparing Your Macintosh Control Panels When launched the X server will configure itself based on the settings in the Monitors amp Sound Mouse and Keyboard control panels The X server s performance characteristics can be tuned in the MachTen Controls control panel You must visit the Monitors amp Sound control panel prior to running the X server Open your Monitors amp Sound control panel and select anything but the 4 or 16 Colors or Grays settings Review the sound and intensity X clients that ring the system bell will generate the selected sound The X server will also honor X client requests to change bell duration and to turn on or off the bell These requests will not affect your Monitors amp Sound control panel settings 2 monitors Characteristics of selected monitor 7 0 Oo Grays iy Colors Black amp white A 4 256 Thousands 4 Drag monitors and menu bar to rearrange them SS cents Figure 45 Monitors amp Sound Control Panel In a multi screen or video mirroring configuration the X server runs on the main screen the screen containing the menu bar You are prevented from changing the monitor characteristics while the X server is running Doing so will cause the X server to exit abruptly Power Machren User s Guide 297 Open your Mouse c
149. arameter preserves the XCOFF formatted output file which will be used as explicit input to the mkpef application The mkpef application can then be run with the command mkpef lt lfilename fragmentname gt creator lt xxxx gt type shlb lt inputfile xcoff gt lt outputfile gt where xxxx is a four character Macintosh creator Multiple file name to fragment name translations can be included on the same command line A creator of something other than MUMM must be specified and a type of sh1b must also be specified for a shared library or a type APPL for an application Creator types should be registered with Apple Computer at http www devworld apple com dev cftype 11 11 3 Macintosh Application Startup Routine Standard Mach applications use a startup routine that sets UNIX parameters and environment variables The startup routine then calls a subroutine called main and on return from main calls the standard UNIX system call exit A standard Macintosh application has different requirements for startup preparation The initial routine must declare a QuickDraw variable named qd call the main application and on return call the Macintosh standard ExitToShel1 system call A pre compiled file conforming to Macintosh startup requirements has been included with the Mach distribution under the file name usr lib MacOS Mac_start o A slightly modified version that enters the
150. arranged and the obscured window s contents become exposed the window is instantly redrawn by the X server With the option disabled the remote X client must retransmit the window s contents over the serial line when the window becomes exposed Refer to section 12 2 3 1 X Server Startup Options for details on how to start the X server with the wm option The X server uses more system memory when started with the wm option 294 Power Machren User s Guide 12 3 Mach e X Window Software Overview This release of the Mach X Window software is based on the public release of X11 release 6 from MIT Its purpose is to provide the necessary tools to allow for the development and display of X applications under MachIen on a Macintosh To that end the release contains an X Window server fonts a font server programming libraries configuration files and documentation from the X11R6 release adapted for use under Mach Programming and server environments in the OpenLook GUI style based on Sun Open Look 3 1 are included The release also includes a suite of public X client applications in source form as a reference aid in program development The main display server components provided are XMachTen The Mach X Window server olvwm The OpenLook Window Manager and user environment fonts X11 fonts in Portable Compiled Format and a network font server The main client development and run time library compon
151. asing the size of the Mach heap generally increases the size of the data allocation memory area at the expense of decreasing the code allocation size To set the Mache heap size first confirm that Mach is not running Next find the Mach application icon and highlight it with a single mouse click Then pull down and select Get Info from the Finder File menu This will display information about the Mach application The lower right hand corner of the display will contain a Suggested Size setting for Mach Select the box and raise or lower the setting according to your system s needs Close the display by clicking the close box Restart MachIen Verify the new size by opening the dynamic memory display by selecting About This Computer in the Finder s Apple menu Power Machren User s Guide 245 11 13 1 5 Problem Areas Not having virtual memory means that programs deal with physical addresses and have limited available memory and a limited stack The following real memory problems are known to exist etext edata end In a virtual memory environment a program can make assumptions about the relative locations of the program s text data and bss sections In real memory these assumptions simply are not valid Programs using the symbols etext edata and end probably require modifications to not depend on the relative locations of these symbols sbrk Some programs tha
152. ass and chroot commands to make changes to the actual password database which will automatically be reflected in the etc passwd file The etc passwd 5 ASCII file contains entries for the following name login name contains no uppercase dummy password field numerical user ID numerical group ID user s real name office extension home phone home directory program to use as shell Each field is separated by a colon Each user is separated by a new line Since Mach uses shadow passwords the real password is stored in etc master passwd and the password field consists of a single asterisk in the etc passwd file If the shell field is null then bin sh is used If a user forgets his or her password the system administrator can change their password using the chpass command Each user should have a unique user ID In Figure 21 The etc passwd File notice that root has selected the C shell By using the chpass command you can change the root default shell to the Bourne shell 78 Power Machren User s Guide root 0 1 Operator home root bin csh toor 0 1 Bourne again Operator home root bin sh nobody 65534 65534 Unprivileged user tmp sbin nologin ftp 65533 65533 Anonymous FTIP home ftp sbin nologin ppp 65532 65532 PPP Dialin Account tmp etc pppserver daemon 1 1 sbin nologin synci iIi p i bin syne operator 2 5 System amp home operator bin csh bin 3 7 Binaries Commands and S
153. at a command line argument that has a colon in it is a displayname If you accept command line abbreviations make sure that you also accept the full display 8 Use geometry geomspec to specify window geometry Do not simply assume that command line argument that begins with an equal sign is a window geometry If you accept command line abbreviations make sure that you also accept the full geomet ry 9 Use the man suffix for program manual page sources Power Machren User s Guide 303 12 3 3 3 Programming Notes Mach supplies each UNIX process with a fixed 36K byte stack Applications that define large stack based storage should add the following lines to the associated Imakefile requesting a larger process stack when the program is linked ifdef MachTenPPCArchitecture LOCAL_LDFLAGS Xlstack lt stacksize gt endif To increase the application stack size to 100K bytes use the command LOCAL_LDFLAGS Xlstack 100000 Refer to section 11 0 Mach Programming Environment for further information on programming under Mach 304 Power Machren User s Guide Power Machren User s Guide A1 1 APPENDIX A GNAT For The Macintosh What is GNAT GNAT is a high quality compiler for the entire Ada 95 language including all annexes The compiler is integrated with the GCC compiler system The entire GNAT product is distributed freely with sources under the Copyleft policy of the Free Soft
154. at do not intercept this input are terminated and the command interpreter is given control End of File Control D demarks the end of a series of input lines End of Session Control D is used by one of the command interpreters to demark end of session and log a user out of the system sh only e Program Suspension Control Z suspends execution of interactive programs and takes a user to the command interpreter fg foreground returns the user to the program csh only e Escaping Input Preceding special characters with a ping inp P backslash escapes the special character and passes it on as regular input COMMAND INTERPRETER SPECIAL CHARACTERS ee Matches zero or more characters in a filename May be used to match filename strings s Matches one single character pattern Figure 23 Special Keyboard Characters 84 Power Machren User s Guide 5 7 Managing Your UNIX Environment 5 7 1 Whats Running Since Mach runs multiple programs at the same time there will be times when you will want to see which programs are executing how much system time they are using and if they are not running why not The program ps prints the process status of each Macintosh and UNIX program that is running Figure 24 Using ps to Show What is Running shows the sample output from a ps lax command COMMAND fete init xx fusr bin macmntd fusr fete inetd fusr lib 1lpd fusr fete mind in rlogind sh sh
155. atin 1 A2 13 A2 3 2 2 Other 8 Bit Codes A2 13 A2 3 3 File Naming Rules A2 16 A2 3 4 Naming of GNAT Source Files A2 17 A23 5 Generating Object Files A2 18 A2 3 6 Source Dependencies A2 19 A2 2 Power Machren User s Guide A2 3 7 The Ada Library Information Files A2 20 A2 3 8 Representation of Time Stamps A2 23 A23 9 Binding an Ada Program A2 24 A23 10 Mixed Language Programming A2 25 A23 11 Comparison of GNAT Model With C C Compilation Model A2 25 A2 3 12 Comparison of GNAT Model With Traditional Ada Library Model A2 26 A2 4 0 Compiling Ada Programs With gcc A2 28 A24 1 Compiling Programs A2 28 A2 4 2 Switches for gcc A2 29 A2 4 3 Switches for GNAT A2 31 A2 4 3 1 Error Message Control A2 32 A2 4 3 2 Debugging and Assertion Control A2 36 A2 4 3 3 Runtime Checks A2 36 A2 4 3 4 Using gcc for Syntax Checking A2 37 A2 4 3 5 Using gcc for Semantic Checking A2 38 A2 4 3 6 Compiling Ada 83 Programs A2 38 A2 4 3 7 Style Checking A2 39 A2 4 3 8 Character Set Control A2 39 A2 4 3 9 File Naming Control A2 40 A2 4 3 10 Subprogram Inlining Control A2 40 A2 4 3 11 Auxiliary Output Control A2 41 A2 4 3 12 Debugging Control A2 41 A244 Search Paths and the Run Time Library RTL A2 43 A24 5 Order of Compilation Issues A2 44 A2 4 6 Examples A2 45 Power Machren User s Guide A2 5 0 A2 6 0 A2 7 0 A2 8 0 A2 9 0 Binding Ada Programs With gnatbind A2 5 1 Running gnatbind A2 5 2 Consistency Checking Modes A2 5 3 Error Me
156. ating the user and running a session When your Mach system is configured to run the X server with xdm your users will be presented with a friendly uniform entry into the X Window System xdm has many configuration options which are described in detail in the online xdm manual page This section will concentrate on configuring Mach and the X server to be controlled by xdm 290 Power Machren User s Guide 12 2 4 1 The Mach amp X Server and XDM On a typical UNIX workstation the xdm program will launch the local X server and present an xdm login window on the local display When the user session completes or the X server quits xdm is notified and restarts the server with a fresh login window Because Mach must share the X window environment with the Macintosh window environment xdm is prevented from arbitrarily starting the X server Instead xdm is typically started at Mach boot time via an entry in the etc rc file When the X server is subsequently launched with special XDMCP startup options it communicates with the xdm process via the XDMCP protocol and the login window appears XDMCP server parameters are described in section 12 2 3 1 X Server Startup Options Under Mach the X server may run only after a user logs in through the Mach console window and starts the wind 8 program Thus the xdm login window may be displayed only after entering the Machien windows environment via a user account in etc master pass
157. ation unit Handling Files With Multiple Units With gnatchop Describes gnatchop a utility that allows you to preprocess a file and split it into several other files one for each compilation unit The Front end Cross Reference Utility gnatf Discusses gnatf a modified version of the GNAT compiler Filename Krunching With gnatk8 Describes the gnatk filename krunching utility Other Utility Programs Discusses several other GNAT utilities including gnatk8 and gnatf This chapter also contains information on cross references smart recompilation and cross reference file structure Running and Debugging Ada Programs Describes how to run and debug Ada programs Performance Considerations Reviews the trade offs between using defaults or options in program development A2 6 Power Machren User s Guide A2 1 2 What You Should Know Before Reading This Guide This user s guide assumes that you are familiar with Ada 95 language as described in the International Standard ANSI ISO TEC 8652 1995 Jan 1995 A2 1 3 Related Information For further information about related tools refer to the following documents e GNAT Reference Manual which contains all reference material for the Silicon Graphics Ada programming language e Ada 95 Language Reference Manual which contains all reference material for the Ada 95 programming language A2 1 4 Conventions Following are examples of the typographical and graphic conventions
158. atlink utility used to link the Ada application A2 5 1 Running gnatbind The form of the gnatbind command is gnatbind switches mainprog ali switches where mainprog adb is the Ada file containing the main program unit body If no switches are specified gnatbind constructs a C file whose name is b_mainprog c For example if given the parameter hello ali for a main program contained in file hello adb the binder output file would be b_hello c When doing consistency checking the binder takes any source files it can locate into consideration For example if the binder determines that the given main Power Machren User s Guide A2 47 program requires the package Pack whose ALI file is pack ali and whose corresponding source spec file is pack ads it attempts to locate the source file pack ads using the same search path conventions as previously described for the gcc command If it can located this source file the time stamps must match In other words any ALI files mentioning this spec must have resulted from compiling this version of the source file The effect of this consistency checking which includes source files is that the binder ensures that the program is consistent with the latest version of the source files that can be located at bind time Editing a source file without compiling files that depend on the source file cause error messages to be generated from the binder For e
159. ator Ignore the last line about a raise c We request a traceback which gdb calls a backtrace gdb backtrace 0 __gnat_unhandled_exception except 0x36abb58 at a raise c 65 1 Oxlfa33c4 in gnat_raise_nodefer_with_msg except 0x36abb58 at a raise c 108 2 0x1lfa3438 in gnat_raise_nodefer except 0x36abb58 at a raise c 120 3 Oxlfa34cc in __gnat_raise except 0x36abb58 at a raise c 130 4 Oxilfa2510 in rationals x 1 y 0 at prog22 adb 47 5 Oxlfa288c in rationals io get item numerator 0 denominator 1 at prog24 adb 25 6 Oxlfa2b08 in test_rationals_1 at prog25 adb 33 7 Oxlf8b64c in main argc 1 argv 0xlf8a3ec envp 0xlf8a3f4 at b_prog25 c 40 8 Oxlf8b4e8 in _ start 0x4186001lc 0x81620008 0x1 9 Oxlf8b4a0 in _ start 0x1f8a59f Oxlf8a5c6 0xlf8a5d1 Refer back to the listings above The interesting part of the traceback lines 4 6 shows that the exception was raised in the function at line 22 of Rationals which was called from the procedure Get at line 25 of Rationals IO which in turn was called from line 33 of Test_Rationals_1 The first four traceback lines and the last 3 lines give trace information from the GNAT runtime system Normally you can ignore these lines gdb quit The program is running Quit anyway and kill it y or n y Power Machren User s Guide A1 17 A1 4 Tracing a Program with gdb We can show some more gdb commands by returning to
160. between 0 and 127 Refer to section 12 2 3 2 Mouse Button Mapping for a table of keys and virtual key codes mbr right key Changes the right mouse button keystroke mapping menu MO Starts the server in dedicated full screen mode In this mode the Macintosh menu bar is hidden by the X desktop and access to Macintosh pull down menus is completely disabled The xtmenu n program run from your X window manager menu environment may be used to temporarily restore access to your Macintosh desktop NOTE This option locks out access to Finder and other running Macintosh applications Specifies that the Macintosh lt Option gt key will be used in combination with the mouse button keystroke to simulate the middle or right mouse button When used without the mbm or mbr startup options the default middle and right mouse button keystrokes become lt Option Left Arrow gt and lt Option Right Arrow gt respectively Selecting this option causes all arrow keys including the lt Up gt and lt Down gt arrows to function normally static Runs the server in StaticColor mode preventing X client modification of the Macintosh color table SU to seconds Disables save under support on all screens Sets the default connection time out in seconds WM Forces the default backing store of all windows to be WhenMapped an easy way of getting backing store to appl
161. bility for configuring the modem No special configuration action by the user is required beyond following the instructions for the particular program 10 15 6 Connecting a Terminal ASCII terminals can be connected to the serial ports on the back of a Macintosh These terminals may be used as time shared login ports Note that ASCII terminals cannot be used to execute Macintosh programs but can execute any UNIX program provided by Mach 190 Power Machren User s Guide 10 15 7 Configuring the System to Support an ASCII Terminal After connecting an ASCII terminal with the proper cabling to the selected serial port Mach must be properly configured to communicate with the terminal The etc ttys and etc gettytab files are the databases for connected terminals The simplest configuring case requires editing the etc ttys file for the selected port Change the string of to on and select the appropriate baud rate in the std XXXx string This is all the configuring necessary for most dumb ASCII terminals For the more difficult ASCII terminals see ttys 5 termcap 5 gettytab 5 and getty 8 In order to tell init 8 about the changes to the terminal database execute the command kill HUP 1 Once the port is configured and the terminal connected type several carriage returns on the connected terminal etc getty is listening on that port and looking for a login string and password Typing carriage returns
162. binary image for the rogue program The Makefile has already been set up for the Mach environment so you need only to execute the few steps below You should examine the Makefile for the details cd base src bsd4 4 games rogue pmake objdir pmake The first pmake command creates the directory that the symbolic link obj points to if it does not already exist In this example it is base macppc bsd4 4 games rogue This is the directory in which the objects and executable will be generated 248 Power Machren User s Guide 11 14 3 Debugging Using MacsBug or Other Macintosh Debuggers The rogue sources have been modified to include a call to enter a Macintosh debugger This Debugger call is contained within an ifdef DEBUG conditional so this call is made only if the compile options include the DDEBUG flag pmake COPTS DDEBUG The Debugger library call has been added to libc When this call is made control is passed to the debugger and the debugger indicates that the next instruction to be executed is the first line after the Debugger library call If you do not have a Power Macintosh debugger installed do not use the Debugger library call It would result in a program error unknown trap and would cause Mach to quit executing In order to pass this Debugger call through to the MacOS rename the Mach application to MachTennoexcept and restart MachIen Power
163. ble programs are created by loading the appropriate XCOFF files and needed libraries All or part of this activity may be orchestrated with gcc which executes the appropriate tools in turn The following sections present a very brief illustration of the commands for generating object files and executables Optimization 0 is used in the commands that invoke the backend compiler causing it to try to produce code that is smaller and faster Detailed documentation is available in various formats including man pages HTML documents and PDF and PostScript files The reference materials found in Appendix C of the online Power Mach User s Guide may also prove useful 11 6 1 Ada Compiling and loading Ada source files is similar to that for C and C however it requires a binding step between compilation and loading to check consistency and elaboration order The backend compiler engine is usr macppc bin gnat1 Using hello adb as an example Ada source the following command illustrates the typical command for generating a PEF executable gnatmake hello Power Machren User s Guide 225 gnatmake is a master program that invokes the tools to perform necessary compilation binding and linking in the proper order Alternatively gcc may be used to generate an object file or assembly source as shown below gcc c O hello adb gcc S O hello adb These commands generate the files hello o and hello s respectively Intermediate files
164. ccessing serial ports 186 cabling and connectors 186 networks 14 running X over 293 serial ports accessing 186 cabling and connectors for 186 set up SLIP 203 servers NFS 123 setstackspace 214 shared folders 138 libraries 6 7 100 219 243 overview 219 Power Machren User s Guide producing 220 sharing control panel 35 cooperative 6 files 3 21 printers 3 shells Bourne 49 72 C 49 72 files example 86 UNIX 72 SHLB file type 100 Simple Mail Transfer Protocol SMTP 168 180 size sub menu 58 SLIP 38 65 124 169 293 C shell scripts bringing down example 211 expediting connections 210 setting up example 210 default route 202 hardware flow control 200 header compression 202 logging in 207 manual connections 206 MTU Maximum Transmission Unit 43 203 overview 197 setting up dialing in 203 dialing out 197 login authentication 204 serial port 203 sliplogin program 205 starting 207 stopping 205 209 testing 208 tip Power Machren User s Guide activity log 198 configuration database example 198 200 login script 201 sliplogin program 205 SMTP Simple Mail Transfer Protocol 168 180 SOCK file types 99 sockets 99 164 software development 213 248 compiler engines ccl 215 cclobj 215 cclplus 215 771 215 gnatl 215 compiling source code 224 C 225 C 226 Fortran 227 Java 228 Objective C 226 cross development tools and targets 240 documentation 217 include files 213 libraries 215 217 Mach d
165. cesses if no q option the Macintosh is shut off like Finder selecting Shut Down When the Finder is used and either Restart or Shut Down is selected from the Special menu Mach invokes sbin reboot to kill the UNIX processes and then quit MachIen Control returns to the Finder to Shut Down or Restart as appropriate When Mach menus are used and the Quit item under the File menu is selected MachIen invokes sbin reboot Holding down the lt Shift gt key while selecting this item invokes sbin reboot q This also applies to the hot key combinations lt Command Q gt and lt Shift gt lt Command Q gt Power Machren User s Guide 71 5 6 Login Accounts Since Mach supports parallel execution of programs it is possible to support multiple users at the same time Each user whether accessing the system locally or over a network has a user name and a password The password is used to convince the system that the users are really who they say they are While login names are used for a variety of public purposes such as receiving electronic mail passwords are meant to be kept as private as possible and therefore are not echoed by the system Having individual login accounts enables each user to have a customized working environment without modifying another user s files and environment 5 6 1 The Concept of a Home Directory and a User Environment When users are given accounts on a UNI
166. ch can also set these attributes for Macintosh files Note that this protection only applies to file access from Mach it does not apply to the Finder or other Macintosh applications On Macintosh HFS file systems Mach stores the protection attributes for a directory in a special file within the folder This file has the name and is invisible to the Finder However other Macintosh applications may see this file It should not be deleted or changed ls la total 3391 drwxr xr x 2 bin 9216 Apr 28 15 55 drwxr xr x 2 bin 1024 Apr 17 22 51 rYwxr xXr xX bin 25576 Apr 24 08 45 acp rwxr Xr xX bin 14597 Apr 18 09 32 apply Ywxr Xr xX bin 38373 Apr 18 09 32 ar rwxr xr x bin 87161 Apr 18 09 35 awk YWX xXr k bin 12807 Apr 18 09 32 basename rwxr xr x bin 34108 Apr 18 09 32 bc rwxr xr x bin 21711 Apr 18 09 32 cal rwxr xr x bin 20173 Apr 18 09 32 cat Figure 25 Example of File Permissions t The MachTIen application has resources which allow the user to configure the default UNIX access privilege modes for Macintosh files and folders see Appendix B Resources MachrIen Application in the online Power Mach User s Guide 102 Power Machren User s Guide 6 4 7 Time Stamps When Mach examines the time stamps of a Macintosh file the file s Macintosh creation time is used for the UNIX data modification time The file s Macintosh modification time is used for the UNIX attribute m
167. ch determine whether a file or directory folder can be accessed or modified The Mach chown and chmod commands can be used to set ownership and access rights for both UNIX and Macintosh files These rights will be enforced by the NFS server 7 4 4 1 AppleShare Access Privileges AppleShare access privileges are imposed on each folder on an AppleShare server These privileges apply to the files and folders within a folder They also apply to the index of a folder The index of a folder is the list of entries within the folder i e a list of files and other folders 136 Power Machren User s Guide The access privileges for AppleShare folders are See Permission to read the index of a folder Permission to read the Files files listed in the index See Permission to read the index of a folder Permission to see the Folders folders listed in the index Make Permission to read the index of a folder Combined with See Changes Files or See Folders provides permission to add or delete index entries for files or folders respectively Combined with See Files provides permission to make changes to the files listed in the index Permissions to make changes to the folders listed in the index are subject to the access privileges of each of those folders 7 4 4 2 UNIX Access Privileges UNIX access privileges are imposed on each file and directory on a file system The access privileges for UNIX fil
168. ch does not have to be installed on the MacOS boot volume Much of Mach is contained within Mach fast file system files These are UNIX file systems that exist within MacOS files See section 6 3 Mach FFS for a complete discussion of Mach fast file systems t The free disk space requirement numbers are based on a target volume with an unformatted capacity of 1GB Due to the MacOS block allocation scheme large capacity disks will require more free space for the complete software distribution smaller capacity disks will require less disk space A 1GB capacity disk will require up to 450MB for Machren To conserve disk space we suggest installing Machren on HFS partitions Mach will run with 32MB of RAM However 48MB of RAM is recommended for good performance Power Mach itself consumes about 14MB of RAM during normal operation excluding X Windows Power Machren User s Guide 15 Prepare your hard disk The efficiency of the disk device driver plays an important role in the overall performance of the system Reformatting your hard disk with a high performance device driver can noticeably improve overall performance Mach works with HFS partitions All MacOS system software network drivers and other peripheral software should be installed before the Mach application is started The Mach Installer adds extensions and control panels to your System Folder so make sure your System Folder is not pro
169. cifies the C shell Only the username is required adduser will assign default values to the remaining parameters A group ID of 10 is suggested for user accounts As an example to establish an account for user John in group 10 enter adduser john g 10 n John Brown adduser creates default login and cshrc files for the new user A portion of the cshrc file is shown in Figure 20 A cshrc File Once the system recognizes a user it sets the current working directory executes a series of commands to perform any automatic startup processing checks to see if any electronic mail has arrived and prints a prompt indicating that the system is waiting for input For non root logins a is the default prompt for sh 1 users for csh 1 users the default prompt string includes your user name host name and the character in the form username host3 76 Power Machren User s Guide cshre File set host hostname tty tty Set up some additional useful shell variables set mail usr spool mail SUSER Tell the shell where to look for new mail It will check every 10 minutes and notify you if there is anything new if prompt then Run only the following on interactive shells cd Change directory to home directory every time setenv EDITOR usr bin vi Set Mail control variables setenv SHELL bin csh setenv VISUAL usr bin vi setenv EXINIT set shell bin csh magic redraw setenv SHELL bin cs
170. command to perform tasks that require extra privilege The su command will give you the same capabilities as the root login and will expect the root password Only users listed as belonging to the wheel group in the etc group file can use the su command see Figure 22 The etc group File osu password lt root_password gt whatever you need to do d typing lt Control gt d ends the session He ae Note that the system prompt for an ordinary user is different than the superuser or root prompt This difference will remind you to exit from su once administrative tasks have been completed Read the next few sections and then set up an account for yourself and for any others that will be using the system When you are setting up login accounts you can give certain users the privilege of becoming superuser Power Machren User s Guide 75 5 6 6 Setting Up User Accounts A user account is added to the system using the adduser 1 command adduser username g gid u uid p passwd n user d home s login g gid Group ID of the new user u uid User ID of new user p passwd Text form of the user password default is username n user Specifies user information e g John Brown default is username d home Specifies the user s home directory default is home username s login Specifies program to run as login shell default is bin sh Bourne shell The entry bin csh spe
171. configuration is modified or you use the Macintosh lt Option gt key in combination with another key to simulate a mouse button all arrow keys revert to their original functions Power Machren User s Guide 283 Example Three Button Mouse Configuration Suppose you own a Logitech Mouse and would like to map the middle and right mouse buttons to the lt Option F14 gt and lt Option F15 gt key combinations when running the Mach X server Your Logitech MouseMan control panel would look something like this MouseKey Opt Fi4 Dpt F15 General CodeBuilder Mouse Tracking Slow oO oO oO Fast Double Click Speed Slow D D Fast Sensitivity Normal O High Launch Key Opt Shift Return Figure 44 Logitech MouseMan Control Panel The Xparams configuration file in your home directory would look like this mo mbm 107 mbr 113 cmdkey meta 284 Power Machren User s Guide 12 2 3 3 Keyboard Mapping The default layout for keyboard keys in the X server corresponds to the U S character set under Mac OS Special characters and symbols including characters with diacritical marks are available by pressing the lt Option gt key in combination with certain letter and number keys Refer to the Macintosh User s Guide for more information on typing special characters Configuring International Keyboard Layouts Your Keyboard control panel indicates the keyboard layout in force for your Macintosh If your keyboar
172. creen oriented program such as vi on the remote system After connecting to the remote system the stty 1 command will inform the remote system of the terminal size to use Power Machren User s Guide 61 4 2 5 The Fonts Menu The Fonts menu is created at startup time and contains all fixed width fonts found in the current system with point size choices of 9 10 12 14 18 24 and 36 The current font size of the active window is checked and the font sizes of real fonts are displayed in outline font Real fonts are non scaled and tend to look nicer for standard UNIX command interactions Some commonly found fixed width fonts are Courier and Monaco Courier 10 Point 12 Point 14 Point 18 Point 24 Point 36 Point Font sizes can be changed to the next larger smaller size by typing lt Command gt lt up arrow gt and lt Command gt lt down arrow gt Variable width fonts in the system will not appear in the Machren Fonts menu 62 Power Machren User s Guide Power Machren User s Guide 63 5 0 Mach e Administration This section deals with Mach system initialization user accounts file system maintenance and virtual memory Mach requires considerably less administration than traditional UNIX systems Since the underlying operating system is the Macintosh Operating System MacOS running Mach is in general no more complex than running a MacOS application MachrIen however is a multiuser sy
173. ct file is needed or even the intermediate assembly code or preprocessor output Again using hello C as our example the following commands g O c hello c g O S hello c g E o hello ii hello c generate the files hello o hello s and hello ii respectively 11 6 5 Fortran Fortran files are compiled with g77 g77 is a special wrapper program that executes gcc with options appropriate for compiling and loading Fortran sources wy Mh Ee The backend compiler engine is usr macppc bin f771 The file suffixes F and for all denote Fortran source files Using hello F as an example Fortran source the following command illustrates creating the PEF executable hello from the single source file intermediate files are discarded g77 O o hello hello F Sometimes the object file is needed or even the intermediate assembly code or preprocessor output Again using hello F as our example the following commands g77 O c hello F g77 O S hello F g77 E o hello i hello F generate the files hello o hello s and hello i respectively 228 Power Machren User s Guide 11 6 6 Java Mach comes with Kaffe a virtual machine to execute Java bytecode Java source files have the suffix java The following environment variables are set for kaffe CLASSPATH usr share kaffe classes zip KAFFEHOME usr share kaffe LD LIBRARY PATH usr lib The following command illustrates compilin
174. cters Latin_1 in file a chlatl ads You may use any of these extended characters freely in character or string literals In addition the extended characters that represent letters can be used in identifiers A2 3 2 2 Other 8 Bit Codes GNAT also supports several other 8 bit coding schemes Latin 2 Latin 2 letters allowed in identifiers with uppercase and lowercase equivalence Latin 3 Latin 3 letters allowed in identifiers with uppercase and lower case equivalence Latin 4 Latin 4 letters allowed in identifiers with uppercase and lower case equivalence A2 14 Power Machren User s Guide IBM PC code page 437 This code page is the normal default for PCs in the U S It corresponds to the original IBM PC character set This set has some but not all of the extended Latin 1 letters but these letters do not have the same encoding as Latin 1 In this mode these letters are allowed in identifiers with uppercase and lowercase equivalence IBM PC code page 850 This code page is a modification of 437 extended to include all the Latin 1 letters but still not with the usual Latin 1 encoding In this mode all these letters are allowed in identifiers with uppercase and lower case equivalence Full Upper 8 bit Any character in the range 80 FF allowed in identifiers and all are considered distinct In other words there are no uppercase and lower case equivalences in this range No Upper Half No upper half characters in the r
175. ctly the Macintosh modem portis tt ya and the printer port is tt yb The tip commands are tip ttya or tip ttyb Mach supports hardware flow control for the devices tt yfa and ttyfb Note that hardware flow control requires a special cable If you cannot dial out no one can dial in Once you have established that your modem is indeed connected and accessible it is time to configure for dial in access The file etc ttys controls which lines are used for dial in by the getty program The first few lines already have entries You will have to add more entries if you have more lines Change the status flag from of to on to enable a line Whenever you make changes to the ttys file you must also signal the init program to act upon those changes A HUP signal to the init process process 1 will accomplish this Use the following command to signal the init process kill HUP 1 192 Power Machren User s Guide If you are using the Communications ToolBox you must first dial in using the cm in line and save its parameters to create the cm in1 line 1 Edit etc ttys and set the status for cm in to on 2 Signal the init process A Communications ToolBox dialog should appear 3 Adjust the settings for your modem You should then get a Waiting message 4 Dial in to your modem You should get a Login prompt 5 IMPORTANT While you hav
176. ctory on ftp tenon com Power Machren User s Guide 41 Users running EtherTalk or TokenTalk on their system may elect to configure the corresponding Ethernet or TokenRing interface under Mach in addition to the AppleTalk interface This requires the assignment of a unique IP address that is different than the address assigned to AppleTalk to the Ethernet or TokenRing interface described below In this configuration on Ethernet users would have direct access to other non Macintosh internet hosts from Mach without the overhead of EtherTalk packet conversion by an AppleTalk to Internet gateway while still enjoying connectivity with AppleTalk hosts via EtherTalk In effect two logically distinct network nodes are created on your Macintosh and share a common Ethernet cable to send and receive packets The host name on EtherTalk assigned by MachIen and corresponding to the AppleTalk IP address entered would be host_a The Ethernet host name corresponding to the Ethernet IP address entered would be host with an alias of host_e where host is the host name selected in the General Configuration screen of the Mach control panel Ethernet ie0 If your Macintosh is connected to an Ethernet this field represents the assigned internet address of the Ethernet network interface The IP address from the MacTCP control panel will appear by default if MacTCP has been configured for communication over Ethernet In a multiple int
177. d Links 6 4 3 Directory Link Counts 6 4 4 Locked Files 6 4 5 File Types 6 4 6 File Permissions 6 4 7 Time Stamps Mach Root File System Layout 6 5 1 The root Directory Tree 6 5 2 The usr Directory Tree 6 5 3 The var Directory Tree 6 5 4 Major System Administration Files Mounting Macintosh Volumes 6 6 1 Mounting Permissions 6 6 2 Automatic Mounting of Removable Media 6 6 3 Unmounting Macintosh Volumes 6 6 4 Automatic Unmounting 6 6 5 Formatting Floppies Accessing Macintosh Files from UNIX Applications 6 7 1 AppleSingle Encapsulation 6 7 2 Differentiating UNIX and Macintosh Files 6 7 3 Utilities for Manipulating Macintosh Files 6 7 3 1 dfork and rfork 6 7 3 2 finderinfo 6 7 3 3 restool Text File Manipulation 6 8 1 Alternating Between Macintosh and UNIX Text 6 8 1 1 mactext 6 8 1 2 unixtext 96 96 97 97 97 101 102 103 103 104 105 106 107 107 108 108 109 109 110 110 110 111 111 111 111 112 112 112 113 Vi 6 9 6 8 2 6 8 3 Power Machren User s Guide 6 8 1 3 Unix lt gt Text 6 8 1 4 dfork text Editing Tools 6 8 2 1 UNIX Editors 6 8 2 2 Macintosh Editing Applications UNIX to Macintosh Copy and Paste File System Administration 6 9 1 6 9 2 6 9 3 6 9 4 6 9 5 6 9 6 6 9 7 Creating File Systems 6 9 1 1 Creating an FFS Within a File Checking Repairing File Systems 6 9 2 1 fsck 6 9 2 2 Fast File First Aid Mounting File Systems 6 9 3 1 Mounting an FFS Within a
178. d by the software that processes the file Lines that begin with a name followed by a are lines that specify the order in which different databases are searched to satisfy a request for data of the type specified by the name parameter The passwd name specifies the database search order for user and password requests The hosts name specifies the database search order for host names and addresses The files search order designation refers to a local data file The dbm designation refers to a local database file The nisplus and plus designations refer to remote NIS requests to NIS version 3 and NIS version 2 protocol servers The NOTFOUND return file search order designation specifies that a search should terminate if all previous database entities have been checked and have responded negatively to a request If a search failed for some other reason such as NIS server not responding or unavailable the search continues with the next entry The previous example contains the default settings included with Mach NIS The order of these settings is fairly standardized and typically requires little or no modification Power Machren User s Guide 147 8 5 Testing the Basic NIS Configuration After etc nis conf etc yp conf and etc nsswitch conf have been reviewed and their configurations set appropriately it is possible to test the basic NIS network configuration for proper operation First the portmap and ypbind
179. d cd to usr users macada public ACT provides GNAT compilers for all platforms including the Mac at this site ftp cs nyu edu pub gnat As of this writing the relevant files are in directories mac68k and powermac For other mirror sites see the link FTP and Mirror Sites on the ACT Home Page http www gnat com What is Ada Ada is the language of choice where software engineering reliability cost effectiveness large scale development and reuse matter It is an industrial strength programming language for real time systems and DSP programming Ada is currently used for applications in such domains as financial services avionics aeronautics air traffic control telecommunications medical devices power plants railroads astrophysics satellites and defense to name a few The Internet provides extensive resources for learning about all aspects of Ada We recommend the Ada Home Page http www adahome com for up to date links directly or indirectly to every Ada related Ada resource on the Internet For beginners there are links to Ada tutorial material for more advanced users there are links to the documentation defining the language To learn more about HBAP try the Welcome Tour link on the HBAP Home Page Power Machren User s Guide A1 3 Documentation Supplement for GNAT Part 1 An Introduction to Some GNAT Tools Michael B Feldman The George Washington University Copyright 1996 Michael B Feld
180. d files in these volumes are intercepted by Mach and translated into requests for foreign NFS file access Desktop NFS has been designed to operate as much as possible like Apple File Sharing Desktop NFS provides support for both AppleSingle and AppleDouble file formats To make an NFS volume visible on the desktop use the dtmount command after mounting the NFS volume For example to make the directory Marketing from the server Opus visible on the desktop as the volume named Shared use the following command mount t nfs o rw soft Opus Marketing Shared dtmount Shared Note that the path Shared must exist on the Mach system The name Shared will be the Macintosh volume name assigned to the NFS volume It will appear under the NFS server icon on the Finder desktop Desktop NFS mounts can also be entered in the etc fstab file see fstab 5 Mach DTNFS automatically recognizes and performs the proper file system text translations for Macintosh applications This transparent file translation enables Macintosh applications to operate on UNIX text files residing on a Desktop NFS volume Mach DTNFS optionally supports Macintosh file and record locking via bwnfsd or penfsd which are locking daemons that run on the NFS server Note that Mach s NFS server provides bwnfsd but not penfsd Power Machren User s Guide 131 7 4 1 Desktop NFS Volume Mounting Mach DTNFS is in essence an NFS client with special capabilities
181. d layout is an international non U S layout the default U S X key layout must be re mapped to match your country s layout when the X server is launched The xmodmap program is used to re map the default U S character set within the X server for use in other countries xmodmap is run by the xinitrc script when the X server starts up The script searches for a key mapping file called Xmodmap in the directory usr X11 lib X11 xinit If found xmodmap configures the X server using the contents of the mapping file Mapping files are named Xmodmap XX where XX represents the country code for the desired keyboard layout Code Country Code Country DE Germany IT Italy DK Denmark NO Norway ES Spain PT Portugal FI Finland SE Sweden FR France FC French Canadian GB Great Britain CA Canada To change the X default U S keyboard layout enter the following from a Mach terminal window prior to starting the X server the first time In usr lib X11 xinit Xmodmap XxX usr lib X11 xinit Xmodmap Power Machren User s Guide 285 This command creates a Xmodmap link file to your country s X key map The Xmodmap file will be read into the server by xmodmap each time the server starts up via the xinitrc file To restore the X key map to the default U S layout delete the link file and restart the X server For international X keyboard map files not listed above contact Tenon Technical Support X Me
182. d on the source file being modified The important result of these differences are that order of compilation is never significant in GNAT There is no situation in which you are required to do one compilation before another What shows up as order of compilation requirements in the traditional Ada library becomes in GNAT simple source dependencies in other words it shows up as a set of rules saying what source files must be present when a file is compiled A2 28 Power Machren User s Guide A2 4 0 Compiling Ada Programs With gcc This chapter discusses how to compile Ada program and the switches passed to the compiler A2 4 1 Compiling Programs The first step in creating an executable program is to compile the units of the program using the gcc command You must compile the following files e the body file adb for a library level subprogram e the spec file ads for a library level package that has no body e the body file adb for a library level package that does have a body You need not compile the following files e the body or spec of a generic library unit e the spec of a library unit which has a body subunits because they are compiled as part of compiling related units GNAT compiles generic units when a client instantiates the generic specs when the corresponding body is compiled and subunits when the parent is compiled If you attempt to compile any of these files you will get this erro
183. dd the routing table entry The default gateway address is usually constructed by changing the last byte of the SLIP internet address assigned by the SLIP server to 1 Call your network rep or consult a local expert to verify that this is true in your case sbin route add net default l r 1 1 Power Machren User s Guide 211 The following script can be used to bring down SLIP at the end of the SLIP session This script should be called slipdown and it takes one parameter the internet address returned by the SLIP server Example C Shell Script to Bring Down a SLIP Connection bin csh Use csh because of clever substitution below in route line Disconnect a MachTen host from a SLIP server Undo the work of slipup 1 is the internet address assigned by SLIP server Delete the routing table entry sbin route delete net default S l r 1 Bring down the SLIP interface sbin ifconfig s10 down Kill the slattach process kill 9 ps ax egrep slattach egrep v egrep awk print 1 Don t forget to hang up the phone connection by powering off the modem echo Don t forget to hang up the phone connection by powering off the modem 212 Power Machren User s Guide Power Machren User s Guide 213 11 0 Mach Programming Environment Mach provides a rich UNIX software development environment The Mach software tool suite has been modified to work in real memory
184. ded 2 2 1 1 Automated Reconfiguration In automated configuration the following files are updated according to the information entered in the Networking Configuration screen of the Mach control panel etc re conf etc resolv conf etc sendmail cf etc sendmail cw etc hosts usr etc zoneinfo localtime usr lib sendmail Take the following actions Quit Mach Open the MachTen control panel Choose Control Panels from the Apple menu and open MachTen Controls Press the Networking button make the appropriate changes and press the Save button Change settings Make the appropriate changes in the General or Memory configuration screen and click the Save button Click on Cancel to abort the changes see section 3 0 The Mach Control Panel Power Machren User s Guide 29 e Launch Machren During the normal boot process updated configuration parameter values will be noted and applied Comments similar to the following will be displayed Applying Installation configuration parameter settings Creating directory etc PRE Aug_20_13 54 01 to preserve original copies Setting timezone to US Pacific Updating etc hosts Creating etc sendmail cw Updating etc sendmail cf Creating etc resolv conf Updating etc rce conf etc PRE Aug_20_13 54 01 may be removed when the original copies it contains are no longer of interest for review or recover
185. different versions of the same header The rules in Ada do not permit such an inconsistent program to be built For example if two clients have different versions of the same package it is not possible to build a program containing these two clients These rules are enforced by the GNAT binder which also determines an elaboration order consistent with the Ada rules The GNAT binder is run after all the object files for a program have been compiled It is given the name of the main program unit and from this it determines the set of units required by the program reading the corresponding ALI files It generates error messages if the program is inconsistent or if no valid order of elaboration exists If no errors are detected the binder produces a main program in C that contains calls to the required elaboration procedures followed by a call to the main program This C program is compiled using the C compiler to generate the object file for the main program The name of the C file is b_xxx c where xxx is the name of the main program unit Finally the linker is used to build the resulting executable program using the object from the main program from the bind step as well as the object files for the Ada units of the program Power Machren User s Guide A2 25 A2 3 10 Mixed Language Programming You build a program that contains some Ada files and some other language files in one of two ways depending on whether the main program is
186. domain name servers 0 0 0 51 SRI NIC ARPA 26 0 0 73 SRI NIC ARPA 28 102 16 10 NS NASA GOV 26 3 0 103 A ISI EDU 28 20 1 2 BRL AOS ARPA 92 5 25 82 BRL AOS ARPA 92 5 22 82 BRL AOS ARPA 26 1 0 13 GUNTER ADAM ARPA 28 213 5 17 C NYSER NET 0 10617 TERP UMD EDU Figure 28 Example etc hosts File 172 Power Machren User s Guide The example boot file in etc named boot follows Boot file for YourZone primary master name server T domain YourZone directory etc named primary YourZone zone primary 255 254 253 in addr arpa zone rev primary 127 in addr arpa local cache cache To enable named at startup set the START_named variable in etc rc conf 10 4 2 The Domain Name Resolver An associated component of the domain name system the domain name resolver allows the etc hosts table to be reduced simply to the host name and internet address of your name server and your gateway Each time you attempt to send electronic mail or open a connection to another host the resolver queries the name server and furnishes the correct address The file etc resolv conf contains your domain name and the internet address not the internet name of your network name server domain your domain name nameserver 253 254 255 101 When you install Mach the only requirement in order for your Macintosh to make use of the resolver is to specify your domain name and the internet address of your name server i
187. dora and Pine 4 that work very well with Mach f ftp ftp qualcomm com eudora Power Machren User s Guide 183 10 10 Using FTP Mach supports both client and server File Transfer Protocol FTP to support the exchange of data on a file by file basis with a wide variety of UNIX and non UNIX computers Mach based Macintosh clusters as well as other processors can exchange binary and text files using FTP The FTP file exchange is controlled by user name and password access Given the proper authorization remote sites can transfer files to and retrieve files from your Macintosh You in turn can transfer and retrieve files from any connected system that supports FTP See ftp 1 MachIen will interoperate with Macintosh FTP applications such as Fetch Binary transfers between Mach and Macintosh FTP applications should be performed in AppleSingle mode the Macintosh foreign file format used by Mach Refer to the section 6 7 Accessing Macintosh Files from UNIX Applications for more information 10 11 Using Machren as an Anonymous FTP Server A pre configured secure anonymous FTP directory hierarchy is in the home ftp folder The default configuration of FTP permits anonymous FTP access to the home ftp directory If you would like to disable anonymous FTP service modify your password database to exclude the ftp line or uncheck the Enable Incoming Connections box in the Mach Networking control pan
188. dvertently destroyed When logged in as an ordinary user typing su will enable you to become superuser for performing tasks that require extra privilege 5 6 4 A Word About Security Since Mach is implemented as an application on a non secure operating system the MacOS traditional UND style security is not enforced by Macintosh applications However since Mach imposes traditional UNIX permissions on files and supports traditional UNIX password protections Mach files are protected from users logging in remotely and Mach permissions are enforced on NFS exported files Since the Mach file system is simply the native Macintosh file system traditional Macintosh security software such as FolderBolt works well with Mach for file protection In addition security relevant database files such as the password file can be stored on remote secure UNIX servers and accessed via NFS 74 Power Machren User s Guide 5 6 5 The Root Password In a newly installed Mach system the root account has the password MachTen Once you log in you should immediately invoke the passwd 1 program and change the password for the root login This is done by typing the following passwd New password lt new_root_password gt Retype new password lt new_root_password gt As a precaution in order to ensure that system resources will not inadvertently be destroyed you should normally log in as an ordinary user and use the su superuser
189. e Changes permission A Desktop NFS folder with Make Changes permitted actually has the UNIX permissions Write and Search A Desktop NFS folder without Make Changes permitted does not have the UNIX permission Write and may not have the UNIX permission Search depending on the setting of the See Files and See Folders permissions as above 138 Power Machren User s Guide 7 4 4 4 Access Privilege Strategies Locked Folders A Desktop NFS folder without See Files See Folders or Make Changes permissions has none of the UNIX Read Write or Search permissions This mode is used to maintain complete privacy on a folder and is called a locked folder Desktop NFS locked folders are as secure as AppleShare locked folders and require no additional permission settings on the individual files within the folder Bulletin Board Folders A Desktop NFS folder with See Files and See Folders permissions but without Make Changes permissions has the UNIX permissions Read and Search This mode is used to maintain a bulletin board style of privacy users can open and read the files but are prevented from changing or deleting them In Desktop NFS the permissions to Read or Write the files within a bulletin board folder are granted by the permissions of the actual files themselves To implement a bulletin board folder in Desktop NF
190. e name HFS stores the length of the file name hence the names are unique within HFS UNIX requests use a null terminated string comparison for identifying files hence the appropriate file is matched as long as the first of the four appended bytes is NULL Mach guarantees that this is the case For subsequent collisions a new integer is used Since the HFS limit on file name length is 31 characters this method of resolving case sensitivity is limited to file names 27 characters or less in length Attempting to create a new file that collides with an existing case insensitive file name of greater than 27 characters will fail Power Machren User s Guide 95 6 4 1 3 Component Separators a The Macintosh File Manager uses the character to separate names into volume folder and file name components Thus Macintosh file names cannot contain the character UNIX uses the character for the same purpose Mach automatically maps all occurrences of which is valid in UNIX file names into which is valid in Macintosh file names before passing UNIX file names to the Macintosh File Manager 6 4 1 4 Non Printable Characters Macintosh file names often include unprintable characters the trademark symbol for example Although these characters are not invalid in UNIX file names they are impossible to type or display on a UNIX command line For this reason non printable ASCII characters in Macintosh fi
191. e advantages and details for setting up this dual stack configuration are discussed in section 10 7 Dual Stack Configuration The TCP stack in Mach is more robust better performing and more fully featured than Apple s OpenTransport When Mach is running Macintosh applications that are accustomed to using MacTCP will automatically use the TCP protocols in MachIen Table 4 Mach TCP IP Protocol Stack shows the differences between Tenon s TCP stack and Apple s OpenTransport t OpenTransport 1 3 includes single link multihoming Power Machren User s Guide 165 Table 4 Machren TCP IP Protocol Stack Comparison with OpenTransport OpenTransport Machren s TCP Performance Multihoming Caters to LANs OpenTransport 1 3 Supports single link multihoming Buffering strategies window management and packet re transmission algorithms are designed to maximize both LAN and WAN performance Supports multi link multihoming Support for multiple network interfaces allows you to have redundant network connections and allows Mach to act as a gateway to forward IP packets Maximum Number of TCP Connections No limitation No limitation Control Over Interface Options Routing Conirol No intrinsic control Many individual shareware packages are available to fulfill various control functions Supports single default route Provides a range of mana
192. e disk cache in the MacOS Memory control panel is essential to getting the most performance from your Macintosh MacOS file manipulation software operates much more efficiently when disk caching is enabled and set to a large value In some cases the larger the value the better A disk cache size of 512K is recommended e Turn off file sharing Disable the file sharing option located in the File Sharing control panel Close control panels after use Do not keep the Mach Scheduling Priority slide bar or any control panel on the desktop An open control panel consumes valuable CPU cycles See http www fwb com or phone 650 482 4800 tt Refer to section 3 0 The Mach Control Panel for a more details on using the Scheduling Priority slide bar 22 Power Machren User s Guide Adjust your search path When running Mach in the default configuration the following directories are searched in the order listed when a Mach command is executed usr bin Din usr X11 bin usr libexec If the user is root these two additional directories are searched sbin usr sbin Adjust your search path in the login or profile file in your home directory e Increase UFS and NFS buffers Increase the number of UFS and NFS buffers in the Mach Memory control panel Increasing the number of buffers to 32 or 64 can significantly improve performance by increasing the frequency of file system cache hits 2 1 1 System
193. e display partially covering the first window as shown in Figure 42 A Partially Concealed Window Step 1 Position the Pointer Position the pointer on any visible portion of the concealed window s frame Figure 42 A Partially Concealed Window Power MachrTen User s Guide 277 Step 2 Press the Select Button Click the select button on the mouse The partially concealed window moves to the front of all other windows as shown in Figure 43 The Window Revealed Figure 43 The Window Revealed 12 2 2 12 Quitting the Window Environment Before exiting the window environment exit any application programs and stop any commands that may be running in terminal windows Pull down the File menu from the MachIenmenu bar and select Close Window This removes all terminal windows from the screen as well as the windows for clocks and similar windowed programs and terminates the X server 278 Power Machren User s Guide 12 2 3 The X Server Program When the X server starts up it takes over the display except for the Macintosh menu bar running horizontally along the top of the display Use the menu bar to suspend the X server to access the Mach terminal window environment or other running Macintosh applications The X server program is the file usr X11 bin X11 XMachTen or by its linked name usr X11 bin X By default xinit will automatically run usr X11 bin X You are prevented from running the X
194. e for a configuration that allows Mach networking applications to take full advantage of the strength of the Mach TCP IP stack At the same time the OpenTransport TCP IP is fully configured and operational for any Macintosh applications that wish to take advantage of its capabilities There are a few things you should consider if you decide to use the dual stack configuration First more RAM will be required to run both stacks Second communication between the two stacks may be configured 10 7 1 More RAM More RAM will be used when running both TCP IP implementations You should be prepared to dedicate as much as 850K of extra RAM to simultaneous TCP IP operations This RAM will not be available to your applications 10 7 2 Cross Talk Since both TCP IP implementations are running on the same physical interface on the same machine under normal circumstances they cannot talk directly to each other If you have no requirement for the OpenTransport applications to talk to Mach applications on the same machine this may not be an issue However if such communications are necessary there is a solution 178 Power Machren User s Guide 10 7 2 1 Routing Between Machren and OpenTransport Mach allows the deft administrator to use a local router as an intermediary for packet exchange between the two TCP IP stacks The trick is to configure OpenTransport with an IP address and a subnet mask where from OpenTransport s point of view
195. e is an error in the spec GNAT provides the option for compiling such files purely for the purposes of checking correctness such compilations are not required as part of the process of building a program Power Machren User s Guide A2 19 A2 3 6 Source Dependencies A given object file clearly depends on the source file which is compiled to produce it Here we are using depends in the sense of the Unix make utility in other words an object file depends ona source file if changes to the source file require the object file to be recompiled In addition to this basic dependency a given object may depend on additional source files as follows e Ifa file being compiled with s a unit X the object file depends on the file containing the spec of unit X This includes files that are with ed implicitly either because they are parents of with ed child units or they are runtime units required by the language constructs used in a particular unit e Ifa file being compiled instantiates a library level generic unit the object file depends on both the spec and body files for this generic unit e Ifa file being compiled instantiates a generic unit defined within a package the object file depends on the body file for the package as well as the spec file e Ifa file being compiled contains a call to a subprogram for which pragma Inline applies and inlining is activated with the gnatn switch the object file depends on the file contain
196. e line usr bin X11 X fp tcp gordo 7000 e Change this line to usr bin X11 X fp tcp hostname 7000 where hostname is the name of the network host running a font server program Power Machren User s Guide 289 12 2 3 8 Providing Fonts Over the Network The xfs program is a font server that runs on your Mach system and provides fonts to other network based X terminals and servers xfs has many configuration options which are described in detail in the online manual page In most environments xfs will run using the default configuration To run the font server perform the follow steps e As the root user start the xfs program usr bin X11 xfs amp To start the font server automatically when Mach boots add an entry to your etc rc local file if x usr bin X11 xfs then SECHO Starting the font server gt dev console usr bin X11 xfs amp fi A template etc rc local file is in usr local etc httpd tenon etc rc local and can be modified with a Macintosh editor 12 2 4 X Display Management Under Machren The xdm program manages a collection of X displays which may only be on the local host with Mach The design of xdm was guided by the needs of X terminals as well as the X Consortium standard XDMCP the X Display Manager Control Protocol xdm provides services similar to those provided by init 1 getty 1 and login 1 on character terminals prompting for login name and password authentic
197. e only service desired of bwnfsd is the UID and GID mapping In this case UIDs and GIDs are mapped to the strings user Yod and group Yd where d represents the numeric UID or GID To disable this default use of the bwnfsd s mapping services use dtmount o nobw_map SharedDisk 7 4 3 Authentication Options Desktop NFS requires the specification of a user s credentials when an NFS server is being promoted to the desktop Once these credentials are authenticated they will be used for all accesses made of the NFS server caused by the Macintosh applications that use this Desktop NFS volume The Desktop NFS credentials can be specified in a number of ways and may be authenticated using either the local etc passwd database or the server s etc passwd database via bwnfsd or lockd The mechanisms to mount Desktop NFS volumes are described below In each case it is assumed that the NFS server opus Marketing has already been mounted on the path SharedDisk by the root user for access by the UNIX processes Typically this is done by listing the NFS servers in the etc fstab file etc rc will then automatically mount these file systems 7 4 3 1 Credentials of Current User In the traditional case it is desirable to use the credentials of the user who mounts the Desktop NFS volume In this case the user has already been authenticated at login time and has been assigned a valid set of credentials To use these credentials for the Desktop N
198. e physical interface This allows you to run one instance of the httpd server with the Web server s home page and document directory changing depending on the local IP address alias received on a particular incoming HTTP connection request Power Machren User s Guide 175 10 6 Using Mach as a Router The Mach internet routing service is typically used to connect Mach systems on an AppleTalk network to Mach systems and other UNIX systems on an Ethernet By supplying an Ethernet interface to any Macintosh running Mach that Macintosh can serve as a router between a set of Ethernets and a set of AppleTalk networks The Mach system providing the routing service must be connected to both the AppleTalk network and the Ethernet The other hosts Mach UNIX and others need to know which Mach host is the routing server so that they can send packets destined for other networks to the routing server The routing server then forwards those packets on to their destination network The command used to tell Mach the address of the routing server is the route 8 command Mach systems on either network will have full connectivity to each other and to other systems supporting internet protocols NFS and remote printer access Consider the example in the section 9 5 Extending Remote Printing to Macintosh Applications of an AppleTalk network and an Ethernet each supporting Mach hosts as well as other hosts All Mach hosts on the Appl
199. e produced by using the Xlsharedlibrary flag on the compile or loader command line You must also specify which symbols within the library you want exported for linkage with an application The command line flag Xlexpal1 exports all global symbols in the shared library The command line flag Xlexport lt filename gt exports the symbols named in the file filename For example if the file some_symbols contained the following lines symbA symbB symbC by using the command line flag Klexport some_symbol1s the three symbols would be found in the shared library and would be set up for export and linkage when an application program requested that the library be included in its import file list 11 3 2 Run Time and Compile Time Libraries The specification of the Xlsharedlibrary flag will create two libraries a run time library and a compile time library The run time library should be put in the run time search path of the loader that is launching the application that requested the library for shared library import Mach uses the MacOS Code Fragment loader the MachTen Application Libraries folder found in the MachTen Libraries folder is in its search path Thus the run time version of shared libraries should be put in the MachTen Application Libraries folder for use by the MacOS Code Fragment loader The compile time library should be used on the compile command line of applications during software
200. e system Thus Mach provides not only local printer spooling but remote printer spooling as well 150 Power Machren User s Guide The client program in the Mach print spooling system is lpr 1 The background server program also known as the print daemon is pd 8 Detailed information on lpr lpd and other programs used by the Mach spooling system can be found in the online manual pages as well as in the document 4 3BSD Line Printer Spooler Manual in the System Manager s Manual section on the Mach CD ROM 9 1 1 The Print Spooler Database The etc printcap file see printcap 5 is the master database for the Mach printing system It describes all printers directly attached to your system as well as printers accessible across the network Mach is shipped with an initial etc printcap file that will print to a Chooser selected LaserWriter over AppleTalk which you may need to modify depending on your printing configuration 9 2 Local Printing In order to print with a minimum of system configuration Mach comes configured for local spooling of print data With local spooling a Mach system acts as both a print spooling client and server Mach supports two local print capabilities for UNIX and Macintosh applications e Spooled printing to a PostScript LaserWriter on AppleTalk This is the default configuration e Spooled printing to an ASCII based ImageWriter or DeskWriter connected directly to a serial p
201. e the Login prompt on the machine you are dialing in with return to the Mach pull down the File menu and select the last item in the menu You will be presented with a standard Save dialog box Save cm in1 into your dev folder The file name must be seven characters or less Use cm in2 cm in3 etc for more lines 1 Edit etc ttys to break the dial in connection 2 Set the status for cm in to off and set the status for cm inl to on 3 Signal the init process At this point you should have consistant dial in access to Mach Power Machren User s Guide 193 The next step is to set up login accounts for your PPP clients The user ppp is set by default If you want clients to have their own passwords or internet addresses use the adduser command to create more Mach users The key is to use etc pppserver as the shell for PPP client accounts The following command will set up user ppp1 adduser pppl s etc pppserver Once dial in access has been established and the PPP accounts have been set up it is time to edit the etc pppserver script You will probably want to print out this script and study it a bit before making any changes It contains complete instructions In a nutshell you must set your Mach address to the SERVER variable and your client s address to the CLIENT variable There is a debugging flag which is initially set to DEBUG_ON The pppd progr
202. eTalk network must have an internet address with the same network identifier and a unique host identifier Correspondingly each host on the Ethernet must have an internet address with the same network identifier which is different than the network identifier of the AppleTalk network and a unique host identifier The routing server must have two internet addresses one for its connection on each of the two networks For the example below assume that the router s address on AppleTalk is A 1 and that the router s address on Ethernet is E 4 Each internet host other than the Mach routing server needs to add a route to its attached network using the route command This command could be executed at any time but typically it is put in the etc rc file and is executed each time Mach is booted Each host on the Ethernet needs to invoke the route command as follows route add net A O E 4 5 where A 0 means all addresses on AppleTalk 176 Power Machren User s Guide The route command tells the Mach kernel to route all packets destined for the AppleTalk network to the Ethernet address E 4 The final parameter is a heuristic used by the router to evaluate the desirability of a route Although it is not needed by the router in this trivial routing case it is necessary to include it as a parameter to the route command Each AppleTalk host other than the routing server needs to add a route to the
203. ecific page of instructions is made by the application Only then is memory allocated and the specific page of instructions copied into memory from disk This is a significant benefit for large libraries that are only used a little at a time 1 3 4 Integrated Software Development Tools Power Mach creates binary PEF files that integrate directly with other Macintosh development tools Software produced by development systems from Apple Metrowerks and others may be freely intermixed with the output of the Mach development system With Mach UNIX software development tools can be used to generate Macintosh applications and Macintosh software development tools can be used to generate UNIX applications This enables developers to build hybrid applications that make both MacOS and Mach system requests Such hybrid applications will be able to simultaneously take advantage of the power of the MacOS and UNIX 1 3 5 Native Fast File System Mach uses a derivative of Berkeley s BSD Fast File System to dramatically increase speed and save space The Fast File System circumvents the limitations imposed by the Macintosh Hierarchical File System More information about the Fast File System FFS is available in section 6 0 The Mach File Systems 10 Power Machren User s Guide Power Machren User s Guide 11 2 0 Installing Mache Mach will run on all Power Macintoshes with MacOS version 7 1 2 or later The enti
204. ecks Our experience is that the default is suitable for most development purposes We treat integer overflow and elaboration checks specially because these are quite expensive and in our experience are not as important as other runtime checks in the development process Note that the setting of the switches controls the default setting of the checks They may be modified using either pragma Suppress to remove checks or pragma A2 86 Power Machren User s Guide Unsuppress to add back suppressed checks in the program source A2 13 2 Optimization Levels The default is optimization off This results in the fastest compile times but GNAT makes absolutely no attempt to optimize and the generated programs are considerably larger and slower You can use the On switch where n is an integer from 0 to 3 on the gcc command to control the optimization level 00 no optimization the default O1 medium level optimization 02 full optimization 03 full optimization and also attempt automatic inlining of small subprograms within a unit see section A2 13 3 Inlining of Subprograms The penalty in compilation time and the improvement in execution time both depend on the particular application and the hardware environment You should experiment to find the best level for your application Note Unlike the case with some other compiler systems gcc has been tested extensively at all optimization leve
205. ecompilation The cross reference information gathered by the x3 and x4 switches is a subset of the information specified by the x5 switch The former information is specifically tailored to the smart recompilation system currently under development When x3 or x4 are specified the cross referencing tool gnatf produces the following information for each compilation unit analyzed We refer to that unit as unit in the following list The full graph of the source files directly or indirectly loaded as a result of compiling Unit along with their time stamp This graph includes the with ed unit graph rooted at unit and also other units automatically loaded by GNAT during code generation generic bodies subunits and bodies of inlined subprograms e The list of entities that can be exported from unit to other Ada sources along with their line and column of definition and use in unit If unit is a subprogram or package specification the notion of exported entity matches the set of entities listed therein If unit is a package body with no generics or inlined subprograms then no entities are exported In general however the set of entities exported from unit is the set of entities that are needed across compilation units by gnat when generating code Specifically inlined subprogram bodies or generic bodies are always exported since these are inlined at the point of use or instantiation The same happens for
206. ed in directories Each directory and file is assigned an integer ID which uniquely identifies it on a given volume Every volume has a top directory known as the root directory with a directory ID of 2 When a volume is mounted for use the MacOS assigns a volume reference number that remains valid as long as the volume is mounted Macintosh files are uniquely specified with a volume reference number a parent directory ID and a file name 92 Power Machren User s Guide 6 2 1 2 File Contents A Macintosh file has two forks a data fork and a resource fork File data resides in the data fork while file resources are stored in the resource fork An application would typically have resources such as menus dialog boxes icons and even code segments A document file could have resources such as preference settings window locations fonts and icons Files are marked with a four byte creator and type usually shown as alphanumeric tags such as APPL TEXT or BINA The creator identifies the application that created the file and the type generally indicates the file content Text files use the ASCII CR character r to denote an end of line 6 2 2 File Names Macintosh file and folder names are limited to 31 characters Names may not include the character because it is used in path names to separate volume directory and the file name components An absolute path name begins with a
207. editor 214 229 libraries compile time 220 naming conventions 221 Mach 220 run time 220 naming conventions 221 shared 6 7 100 219 243 overview 219 producing 220 software development 215 217 Power Machren User s Guide Tenon 27 UNIX 7 traditional 221 X Windows 216 217 link editor ld 229 LINK file types 99 linked files 96 links count 90 directory counts 97 dynamic 7 8 219 hard 90 96 100 symbolic 90 loader 229 local printing 150 LocalTalk 14 38 39 169 lockd daemon 132 locked files 97 folders 138 logging in 49 71 74 SLIP 207 logical blocks defined 91 login accounts 71 administrative 80 home directory 71 user environment 71 authentication SLIP 205 console 49 50 directory 71 disabling 82 privileges 72 login file 72 86 loopback mode 169 lp program 162 lpd daemon 25 47 150 lpq program 162 lpr program 150 lwsrv configuration files 158 daemon 149 diagram 158 enabling 160 Mach kernel 6 Mach administration 63 86 application 11 booting 18 45 automatic 67 manual 67 components of 11 configuration automatic startup of portmap and ypbind 148 options 21 console window 18 19 control panel 18 33 168 172 configuring 18 startup files 46 65 warning dialog box 32 daemons 46 table 47 defined 1 desktop 3 documentation 12 GNAT documents 217 HTML 217 man pages 217 PDF 217 domain name service 170 configuring 170 1 10 file systems 87 122 folder contents 17
208. een changed to MUMM Access to a library not created by MUMM will automatically create an AppleSingle version of the copied data and make it unusable by Mach development tools Interface library fragment names are the names of the Code Fragments that are used by the Macintosh system to dynamically relate application programs to a shared library Each shared library has a fragment name which is typically the same as the name of the Macintosh file containing the fragment A shared library Code Fragment name is contained in the shared library s CFRG resource This resource may be viewed and modified with the ResEdit application If the file name and Code Fragment name are the same then no further action is necessary The Machien development tools will place a reference in the resulting PEF output to a Code Fragment with the same name as the Macintosh file containing the Code Fragment 238 Power Machren User s Guide However if the library name and Code Fragment name are different a translation between the two must be specified during the PEF production phase of the Mach development tools To specify a non standard file name to Code Fragment name mapping the mkpef application must be run as an explicit separate program step with a mapping specification To prepare for a separate mkpef step the X1xcoff parameter must be specified during compilation or during the Mach loading phase The X1xcoff p
209. efault environment 240 Macintosh applications 236 notes 303 overview 213 source code 218 tools 213 217 ar 214 as 214 building libraries and programs 214 cpp 214 flex 213 g 214 g77 214 gcc 214 gdb 214 gnatmake 214 indent 213 Id 214 make 214 nm 214 pmake 214 ranlib 214 restool 214 setstackspace 214 yacc 213 under X 301 X Windows programs 216 217 source code 218 compiling 224 files accessing 30 Source_FFS 13 30 218 space management 119 special keyboard characters 83 spooling printer 1 11 149 stack overrun 241 stamps time 93 102 START_cron variable 66 START_inetd variable 66 START_lIpd variable 66 START_macmntd variable 66 START_named variable 66 172 START_portmap 148 START_sendmail variable 66 START_syslogd variable 66 START_ypbind 148 starting Mach 45 1 18 automatically 67 manually 67 SLIP 207 startup environment 65 Startup Items folder 67 sticky bits 246 string substitution 72 sucommand 72 73 74 superuser 72 symbol information 230 symbolic links 90 syslogd daemon 24 47 system administration files 106 architecture 7 8 limitations 25 logger daemon 24 optimization guidelines 22 25 requirements disk space 14 memory 7 14 36 243 system 11 14 System Folder protected 15 T Tab Window Manager 260 tailoring Mach windows 68 UNIX environment 69 tape devices 120 SCSI 120 drives support for 120 tar command 120 121 example 122 tel tk 2 TCP Power Machren User s Guide
210. eferences to the Trash Empty the Trash 4 Install the New Mach ren System 5 Restore the Saved Control Panel Settings Open the Mach control panel Before launching Mach open the Mach control panel and visit each configuration screen Verify that your installation parameters are correct Press the Save button even if no changes were made 6 Launch Mach by Double Clicking the Machren Application 7 Restore the Remaining Saved Configuration Files e Check files in the Preserve and etc folders When the Mach re installation is complete compare any customized configuration files from the Preserve folder to the corresponding files in the etc and home folders If you have not explicitly made changes to a configuration file do Ts not restore it Configuration files sometimes change in new releases of Mach and restoring old configuration files may make the new release behave unexpectedly 28 Power Machren User s Guide 2 2 1 Reconfiguration If you change your control panel settings or if you installed Mach before you were attached to a network numerous files must be updated This may be done automatically by using the Mach control panel or manually by updating the necessary files by hand Some network service changes such as disabling ftpd or enabling fingerd will require manual intervention as noted below Where possible the automated approach to network reconfiguration is strongly recommen
211. el and retstart Mach If you leave the anonymous FTP service in place documents for public consumption should be placed in the home ftp pub folder t ftp ftp dartmouth edu pub software mac 184 Power Machren User s Guide 10 12 Using Telnet Mach supports both user and server Telnet enabling each Mach system to access remote systems and to offer timesharing services to others Telnet allows you to access other systems from your Macintosh via terminal emulation This terminal style capability lets you access processor and memory intensive UNIX applications on a centralized Macintosh eliminating the need to upgrade each Macintosh with memory disk and other resources In addition Mach supports terminal access to non Macintosh UNIX systems and non UNIX systems supporting Telnet for accessing applications and data on those machines See telnet 1 10 13 Using a Distributed File System NFS Mach implements client and server Network File System NFS NFS allows you to create a network wide file system Files on one system can be accessed on a block by block basis by remote systems Server NFS allows you to configure a Mach system as a centralized file server for a cluster of Macintoshes or other NFS aware machines For detailed information about NFS and setting up clients and servers see section 7 1 Using NFS Power Machren User s Guide 185 10 14 Using Berkeley r series Commands Mach supports the Berkeley
212. em damage mnt Temporary mount point sbin Basic system administration utilities 104 Power Mach e User s Guide Name Description tmp Directory for temporary files usr Contains majority of system utilities and files var Multi purpose log temporary transient and spool files volume macmntd creates subdirectory mount points for removable volumes 6 5 2 The usr Directory Tree Name Description X11 Symbolic link to Mach X Window software X11R6 X11R6 Mach X11R6 software bin Binaries doc Miscellaneous documentation include C and C header files info Documentation for GNU programs lib Compile time libraries libexec Catchall for system daemons local Mount point for file system containing local applications and support files macppc PowerPC specific files go here man troff source for man pages sbin System administrator binary files share Text and database files readily shared among 4 4BSD systems src rpm support tree Power Machren User s Guide 105 6 5 3 The var Directory Tree Name Description adm Administrative files at Timed command scheduling files backups Miscellaneous backup files cron cron data files db Database files games Miscellaneous game status and log files lib Dynamic machine specific application support files lock Storage for emacs file locking log Miscellaneous system log files msgs Sy
213. emory The Bourne shell relies on a profile file in the user s home directory while the C shell uses login and cshrc files to determine the user s environment As part of establishing a user account you may stipulate a particular shell by specifying the appropriate parameter to the adduser script or you may change shells at a later time using the chpass lt username gt command 5 6 3 Superuser and Privileges Intrinsic to each user login is the concept of login privileges When you are logged in as root you are the most privileged user on the system the superuser The superuser has access to and authority over system resources that are not available to all users The superuser has access to private user data can add and delete users from the system and can provide support when a user has forgotten his or her password You can become superuser by logging in as root or by typing su when logged in as anormal user In order for an ordinary user to become superuser access must be granted via the etc group wheel group and you must know the root password su Password your_root_password privileged operations D Power Machren User s Guide 73 If an ordinary user is also the system administrator it is advisable to log in as superuser only when doing administrative tasks and to revert to the normal user login otherwise This is a security precaution to ensure that key system resources are not ina
214. ems Symbolic links may point to other symbolic links Power Machren User s Guide 91 6 2 Macintosh Hierarchical File System Overview The MacOS method of organizing files is known as the hierarchical file system HFS Detailed information about the Macintosh file system and File Manager may be found in the Files manual which is part of the Inside Macintosh documentation series published by Addison Wesley 6 2 1 File System Organization Each Macintosh hard disk is formatted into a number of 512 byte addressable units known as logical blocks A volume is a consecutive sequence of these blocks Small disks are typically used whole as a single volume while large disks are often partitioned into two or more volumes 6 2 1 1 Volumes and Folders A volume consists of overhead file storage and free space The overhead includes boot blocks bitmap master directory blocks catalog and extents files The catalog file maintains the hierarchy of directories and files on a volume and the extents overflow file tracks assignment of allocation blocks to files which cannot be stored in the catalog file File storage is assigned in units of allocation blocks which are one or more consecutive logical blocks A volume has at most 65 536 allocation blocks This addressing constraint dictates the ratio of logical blocks to an allocation block Files are stored in directories also known as folders which are themselves stor
215. en User s Guide 4 2 4 2 The Size Sub Menu Window Positions Original Size 0 Full Height 3 amp F Zoom Window B Don t Save Scrolled Lines Rempue S lt roeiied Lines Save Window Environment Send Window Size S Terminal 1 1 Terminal 2 Original Size Command O Return the active window to the size it was when it was opened Full Height Command F Make the active window as tall as will fit on the screen Zoom Window Command B Make the active window as big as will fit on the screen This is a toggle command if the active window is full size it will return to its previous size The results of this command are identical to clicking in the zoom box of the active window Power Machren User s Guide 59 4 2 4 3 The Order Sub Menu Window Positions Size Hide Terminal 2 3H 5 Hide All 0 Don t Save Scrolled Lines Shagi Hi BK Remeie Sc rpiied Lines Last Window 3L Save Window Environment Rotate Windows 3R Send Window Size 5 Terminal 1 31 Terminal Hide Terminal Command H Make the active window invisible A hidden window can be made visible using the Show All command described below or by selecting that window Hide All Command D Make all windows invisible Show All Command K Make all windows visible Last Window Command L Make the previously active window the current active window Rotate Wind
216. ename the file accordingly mv some_file adb verlonuninamlonchilpackname adb A1 24 Power Machren User s Guide Power Machren User s Guide A2 1 APPENDIX A Documentation Supplement for GNAT Part 2 GNAT User s Guide C Copyright 1995 1996 Ada Core Technologies Inc GNAT is free software you can redistribute it and or modify it under terms of the GNU General Public License as published by the Free Software Foundation either version 2 or at your option any later version GNAT is distributed in the hope that it will be useful but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY without even the implied warranty of MERCHANT ABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE See the GNU General Public License for more details You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License along with GNAT see file COPYING If not write to the Free Software Foundation 675 Mass Ave Cambridge MA 02139 USA Part 2 GNAT User s Guide A2 1 A2 1 0 About This Guide A2 5 A2 1 1 What This Guide Contains A2 5 A2 1 2 What You Should Know Before Reading This Guide A2 6 A2 1 3 Related Information A2 6 A2 1 4 Conventions A2 6 A2 2 0 Getting Started With GNAT A2 7 A2 2 1 Running GNAT A2 7 A2 2 2 Running a Simple Ada Program A2 7 A2 2 3 Running a Program With Multiple Units A2 9 A224 Using the gnatmake Utility A2 11 A2 3 0 The GNAT Compilation Model A2 12 A2 3 1 Source Representation A2 12 A23 2 Foreign Language Representation A2 13 A2 3 2 1 L
217. ent only if there was a valid pragma Priority inthe corresponding unit to set the main task priority It is an unsigned decimal integer Following these header lines a set of information lines appears for each compilation unit that appears in the corresponding object file In particular when a package body or subprogram body is compiled there will be two sets of information one for the spec and one for the body with the entry for the body appearing first This is the only case in which a single ALI file contains more than one unit Note that subunits do not count as compilation units for this purpose and generate no library information since they are inlined The lines for each compilation unit have the following form U unit name source name version attributes This line identifies the unit to which this section of the library information file applies unit name is the unit name in internal format as described in package Uname and source file is the name of the source file containing the unit version is the version given as eight hexadecimal characters with lower case letters This value is a hash code that includes contributions from the time stamps of this unit and all its semantically dependent units A2 22 Power Machren User s Guide The optional attributes are a series of two letter codes indicating information about the unit EB Unit has pragma Elaborate_Body NE Unit has no elaboration routine All subprogram specs are in
218. ents provided are X The X11 library containing the core of the X protocol Xt The X Intrinsics Toolkit library Xaw The Athena Widget set of buttons pull down menus labels etc Xmu The X Miscellaneous Utility used by the Athena widget set Xau The library supporting a security authorization for client server connections Power Machren User s Guide Xext The library supporting the Shape Multi buffering and MIT misc extensions Xi The library of the Input extension to the protocol supporting alternative input devices xview The xview widget library olgx The OpenLook graphics library Phigs The Application Protocol Interface library supporting the creation of PEX protocol version 5 1 PEX5 The Xlib level C interface library to the PEX protocol version 5 1 Xdmcp The library of X Display Manager Control Protocol routines Imake The configuration system for generating Makefiles Clients A source distribution of MIT client and demonstration programs 295 The software in this release is contained on CD ROM When installed the X11 software will reside in the following directories after the installation usr X11 lib X11 library archive files libX a usr X11 lib X11 X11 configuration files fonts and application default resource files usr X11 bin X11 executable files usr include X11 X11 include files for
219. equired other than creating the directories on which to mount them 6 9 1 1 Creating an FFS Within a File Mach includes an installer utility to greatly simplify the task of adding fast file systems to your Mach system FFS_Installer is an installer program for creating additional fast file systems for Mach To create a new FFS launch this program and select the desired size FFS Install it into the MachTen folder and launch MachIen This new FFS will be mounted automatically when Mach starts up To create a custom FFS within a file first decide on the amount of storage you need Identify the HFS volume that will accommodate it and if necessary mount it for access under MachIen See section 6 9 3 Mounting File Systems for more information on mounting Then use the newfsf 8 command as follows newfsf s lt size gt lt FSFile _pathname gt where size is the number of 512 byte blocks that provide the desired storage and pathname specifies the name of the FFS file to create 116 Power Machren User s Guide Following creation an FFS within a file must be mounted under Mach before it can be used If necessary create the directory on which you will mount it The mount command syntax is as follows sbin mount t ffs lt FSFile_pathname gt lt directory gt If you plan on using this file system on a regular basis consider making an entry in etc fstab so that it is automatically mounted on each launch of Mach
220. er Power Machren User s Guide Edit the etc printcap file and uncomment the entry starting with dw lp DeskWriter The DeskWriter entry differs from the ImageWriter entry in the setting of the serial port speed baud rate designated by the br lt table entry gt field in the entry Modify this field as necessary to match the baud rate of your DeskWriter according to the following table br entry DeskWriter Baud Rate 50 14 4 Kbps 75 28 8 Kbps 110 57 6 Kbps 300 300 bps 600 600 bps 1200 1200 bps 1800 1800 bps 2400 2400 bps 4800 4800 bps 9600 9600 bps 19200 19 2 Kbps 38400 38 4 Kbps The default serial port speed setting for DeskWriter entry in etc printcap is 57 6K baud 2 If the printer is connected to the printer port change the line that says lp dev ttyfa toread lp dev ttyfb If the printer is connected to the modem phone port skip this step printcap is already set in this configuration Power Machren User s Guide 153 3 Print a UNIX file by using one of the following two commands pr lt file_name gt lpr Piw lpr Piw lt file_name gt The first version will paginate the output the second version will produce raw output If Ipd is not running the following error message will appear lpr connect No such file or directory jobs queued but cannot start daemon In order to start Ipd you must su to root and sta
221. er is launched by default with a U S keyboard mapping If you operate the X server using a non U S keyboard the Xmodmap file should be linked to one of the international keyboard map files in usr X11 lib X11 xinit Details on using the international keyboard map files are found in section 12 2 3 3 Keyboard Mapping The startup script runs xrdb and xmodmap again using the Xresources and Xmodmap files from your home directory These files can be maintained in individual user home directories to customize the default server resources or key map for that user The startup script uses xsetroot to change the background or root window to a grey color Choose any color from the list of colors in usr X11 lib X11 reb txt Next xinitrc starts a console X window as an icon on the X desktop Mach console output is redirected to the xconsole window and is visible when the icon is de iconified or opened with a double click of the mouse button 260 Power Machren User s Guide xinitre then starts the X applications and by default an xterm virtual terminal window The window s geometry title and icon name corresponding to the local host name are provided as command line parameters when starting the xterm client You can add to the list of clients to be run at this point in the script Note that the xclock client is not run by default because of the comment preceding the command Also note that each application is placed
222. eral Kana fonts from Sony Corporation two JIS Kanji fonts two Hangul fonts from Daewoo Electronics two Hebrew fonts the standard cursor font two cursor fonts from Digital Equipment Corporation and cursor and glyph fonts from Sun Microsystems It also has various font name aliases for the fonts including fixed and variable usr X11 lib X11 fonts 75dpi This directory contains bitmap fonts contributed by Adobe Systems Inc Digital Equipment Corporation Bitstream Inc Bigelow and Holmes and Sun Microsystems Inc for 75 dots per inch displays An integrated selection of sizes styles and weights are provided for each family 288 Power Machren User s Guide Font databases are created by running the mkfontdir program in the directory containing the compiled versions of the fonts the pcf files Whenever fonts are added to a directory mkfontdir should be re run so that the server can find the new fonts If mkfontdir is not run the server will not be able to find any fonts in the directory 12 2 3 7 Obtaining Fonts from a Network Font Server By default the X server will look for fonts from the local directories described in the previous section To obtain fonts from a network font server when the X server starts up follow these steps e Copy the file usr lib X11 xinit xserverrc to your home directory as xserverrc cd cp usr lib X11 xinit xserverre xserverrc e Edit the xserverrc file and find th
223. erface configuration the host name assigned by Mach to this interface will be host where host is the host name selected in the General Configuration screen The host name alias host_e will also be assigned to this interface TokenRing tr0 If your Macintosh is connected to a TokenRing this field represents the assigned internet address of the TokenRing network interface The IP address from the MacTCP control panel will appear by default if MacTCP has been configured for communication over TokenRing In a multiple interface configuration the host name assigned by Mach for this interface will be host_t where host is the host name selected in the General Configuration screen If this interface is the only configured interface the host name associated with the IP address entered will simply be host 42 Power Machren Users Guide Default Gateway This field represents the internet address in standard internet dot decimal format of the default gateway system on your network and defaults to the gateway field in the MacTCP control panel All access to systems not on your network will be made through the default gateway Domain Name Server and Domain Name The Domain Name Server field represents the internet address in internet dot format of the network domain name server The domain name is an ASCII string for example tenon com representing your network domain name Both entries default to
224. es are Read Permission to read the file Write Permission to write the file Execute Permission to execute the file the file is a program The access privileges for UNIX directories are Read Permission to read the index of a directory Write Permission to make changes to the index of a directory Execute Permission to locate a directory entry given the entry is in the index In UNIX there is a separation of the actions of finding an entry in the index and actually locating this entry on the file system The permission to locate the entry is the Search permission Power Machren User s Guide 137 Note that in UNIX permissions to read or write the files within a directory are not granted by the permissions of the directory but rather by the permissions of the files themselves Also the permissions to Read Write or Search the index of a directory does not differentiate between files and directories in the index 7 4 4 3 Mapping AppleShare Access Privileges into UNIX Access Privileges The default Apple File Sharing permissions allow all other users and groups to access newly created files and folders Desktop NFS mimics this behavior by assigning the access privilege of Read Write and Execute for each of the owner group and others when a Macintosh application creates a file or folder on a Desktop NFS volume Since the Apple F
225. es should be adequate for single user Macintoshes If you have multiple users logged in to your system over the network you may have to increase this parameter Open files This entry specifies the number of files Mach can have open at one time The default number of open files is 118 UFS buffers This entry is the number of 8 kilobyte UNIX file system UFS buffers available for buffering file transfer to and from the local disk Increasing this number from the default 16 buffers will speed up your system at the expense of increased memory usage NFS buffers This entry is the number of 8 kilobyte Network File System NFS network buffers available for NFS access Increasing this number from the default 16 buffers will speed up your system at the expense of increased memory usage 38 Power Machren Users Guide 3 2 3 Networking Configuration Screen MachIenallows for a multi homed internet networking environment permitting multiple independent networks to be connected to a single system Mach supports several physical interface types including Ethernet SLIP TokenRing and LocalTalk in addition to a logical local loopback interface Mach also supports multiple interfaces of the same type including up to four Ethernets three SLIP and or PPP lines and a single LocalTalk Networking Configuration oO Enable IP Forwarding o Enable Incoming Mail o Enable Incoming Connections IP Addresses Netmasks AppleTalk atD
226. esh gt 226 Transfer complete root caravel I 1886 bytes received in 0 seconds 1 8 Kbytes s ftp D Terminal 2 A rooteathena mail Iaura tenon com a Subject lunch tomorrow hi laura just a note to let you know we are heading over to Lito s tomorrow for lunch Interested Ce root athena Figure 27 Resource Sharing FTP mail rlogin 164 Power Machren User s Guide 10 1 Using OpenTransport or Replacing OpenTransport Mach has been programmed with two alternative TCP IP protocol implementations The first is an implementation of the standard Mach sockets interface which has been mated with MacOS OpenTransport In this configuration calls to the Mach sockets interface are translated into one or more calls onto the MacOS OpenTransport TCP IP implementation In addition the results of any OpenTransport calls are translated into Mach sockets operations This is the default Mach configuration It provides for complete compatibility between Mach networking applications and other MacOS networking applications The second TCP IP configuration provides for the replacement of OpenTransport with Tenon s Mach TCP IP stack This implementation is an industrial strength BSD UNIX TCP IP implementation containing many features not found in OpenTransport such as multi link multihoming t A third alternative is to simultaneously use both OpenTransport and Tenon s TCP IP stack Th
227. essage The following shows an example of warning messages e adb 4 24 warning creation of object of this type may raise Storage_Error e adb 10 17 warning static value out of range e adb 10 17 warning Constraint_Error will be raised at runtime Two switches are available to control the handling of warning messages gnatwe The w stands for warning and the e stands for error The gnatwe switch causes warning messages to be treated as errors The warning string still appears but the warning messages are counted as errors and prevent the generation of an object file gnatws The s stands for suppress This switch completely suppress the output of all warning messages A2 36 Power Machren User s Guide A2 4 3 2 Debugging and Assertion Control gnata The pragmas Assert and Debug normally have no effect and are ignored This switch where a stands for assert causes Assert and Debug pragmas to be activated The pragmas have the form pragma Assert Boolean expression static string expression pragma Debug procedure The Assert pragma causes Boolean expression to be tested If the result is True the pragma has no effect other than possible side effects from evaluating the expression If the result is False the exception System Assertions Assert_Error is raised passing static string expression if present as the message associated with the exception
228. esult SO end Factorial Sls 32 begin Test_Factorial 33 34 Answer Factorial 4 SDs Ada Text_IO Put Item gt The value of 4 is 36 Ada Integer_Text_IO Put Item gt Answer Width gt 11 aie Ada Text_IO New_Line 38 39 end Test_Factorial 39 lines No errors Successful compilation invoke the binder and linker gnatbind x test_factorial ali gnatlink g test_factorial ali Now we run the executable test_factorial The value of 4 is 24 A1 6 Power Machren User s Guide A1 2 Overriding the GNAT default file naming conventions GNAT requires that each source file contain only one compilation unit see gnatchop in the GNAT User s Guide for details on how to split multi unit files GNAT prefers that each file name agree with the name of the unit in that file e g Test_Factorial is in the file test_factorial adb Note that the file name is always in lower case and that the file extension should be ads for a package spec and adb otherwise These conventions are sometimes inconvenient for example when porting in Ada source code from another compiler with different conventions It is possible to override these preferences using a configuration file called gnat adc If this file is present in the current directory gnatmake will use it to map the file names to the unit names Let s look at a set of files making up a program to do rational number arithmetic Here are the contents of gnat adc
229. f the window and press the select button Drag the pointer down the menu until you highlight the Restore Size selection Release the mouse button The window is restored to its former size and location Table 8 Functions in the Window Menu lists the Window menu functions 12 2 2 10 Summary of Window Menu Functions Table 8 Functions in the Window Menu To do this Choose Restore a window from an icon or after maximizing Restore Size Change the location of a window Move Change the size of a window Resize Shrink a window to its icon representation Close Enlarge a window to be as tall as the root window Full Size Send a window to the back or bottom of the window Back stack the position closest to the root window Immediately stop a window and make it disappear Quit When a menu function is meaningless its name is grayed out and you cannot select it 276 Power Mach User s Guide 12 2 2 11 Raising a Window With the Focus Follows Mouse model you can raise a window by simply placing the mouse over the window With the Click to Focus model you can bring a partially concealed window to the front of the root window by clicking on the window To demonstrate this with the Click To Focus model create another terminal window by typing this command in the existing terminal window xterm amp lt CR gt The new window appears in the upper left corner of th
230. f view of existing Ada compiler systems are the following e There is no point in compiling generics or specs except for package specs with no bodies since these are compiled as needed by clients If you attempt a useless compilation you will receive an error message It is also useless to compile subunits since they are compiled as needed by the parent There are no order of compilation requirements and performing a compilation never obsoletes anything The only way you can obsolete something and require recompilations is to modify one of the dependent source files e There is no library as such apart from the ALI files see section A2 3 7 The Ada Library Information Files for information on the format of these files For now we find it convenient to create separate ALI files but eventually the information therein may be incorporated into the object file directly When you compile a unit the source files for the specs of all units that it with s all its subunits and the bodies of any generics it instantiates must be available findable by the search paths mechanism described above or you will receive a fatal error message Note The above may seem surprising However we are not violating the strict Ada consistency rules these rules are enforced instead by the binder Power Machren User s Guide A2 45 A2 4 6 Examples The following are some typical Ada compilation command line examples gcc c xyz adb Compi
231. fce2 unsigned system__storage_elementsS 0x86195344 unsigned system__task_specific_dataB 0x924bf9bc unsigned system__task_specific_dataS 086195344 unsigned system__tasking_soft_linksB 0x0c32a681 unsigned system__tasking_soft_linksS 086195344 BEGIN Object file option list usr local adainclude system o usr local adainclude s stoele o usr local adainclude s taspda o usr local adainclude s tasoli o usr local adainclude s stalib o p o hello o END Object file option list The __main_priority function records the environment task priority A value of 1 indicates that the main program has no pragma Priority the normal case Next there is code to save the argc and argv values for later access by the Ada Command_Line package The variable gnat_exit_status saves the exit status set by calls to Ada Command_Line Set_Exit_Status and is used to return an exit status to the system Power Machren User s Guide A2 49 The call to___gnat__initialize and the corresponding call at the end of execution to __gnat_finalize allow any specialized initialization and finalization code to be hooked in The default versions of these routines do nothing The calls to system__task_specific_data___elabb and p___elabs perform necessary elaboration of units in the program In our example only the library routine System Task_Specific_Data body and P spec required elaboration the main program hello adb did not require any elab
232. for Building Libraries and Programs ar Library archive utility as PPC assembler cpp GNU preprocessor g Wrapper for calling gcc with appropriate options for compiling and loading C objects 877 Wrapper for calling gcc with appropriate options for compiling and loading Fortran objects gcc GNU compiler forks the appropriate tools for compiling and loading objects gdb Symbolic debugger gnatmake GNAT make program Id Combines several object files into one resolving external references and searching libraries make Executes a scripted set of commands to update one or more target files GNU version nm Prints lists of symbols in object files pmake Executes a scripted set of commands to update one or more target files BSD version ranlib Converts archives to a form which d can load more rapidly restool Provides access to Macintosh file resources setstackspace Adjusts size of program stack Power Machren User s Guide 215 Compiler Engines ccl GNU C language compiler cclplus GNU C language compiler 771 GNU Fortran language compiler gnatl GNU Ada language compiler cclobj GNU Objective C compiler Libraries libc The C library libobjc a The Objective C library libcap a Columbia AppleTalk Protocol library libcompat a Contains obsolete BSD4 3 functions for compatibility libcurses a Old screen functions with cursor motion
233. ful additional library functions provided by GNAT The sources for these units are needed by the compiler and are kept together in one directory The ALI files and object files generated by compiling the RTL are needed by the binder and the linker and are kept together in one directory typically different from the directory containing the sources In a normal installation you need not specify these directory names when compiling or binding Either the environment variables or the built in defaults cause these files to be found Besides the assistance in using the RTL a major use of search paths is in compiling sources from multiple directories This can make development environments much more flexible A2 5 9 Examples of gnatbind Usage This section contains a number of examples of using the GNAT binding utility gnatbind gnatbind hello ali The main program Hello source program in hello adb is bound using the standard switch settings The generated main program is b_hello c This is the normal default use of the binder gnatbind main_program ali o mainprog c x e The main program Main_Program source program in main_program adb is bound excluding source files from the consistency checking A full list of elaboration dependencies is output to stdout and the file mainprog c is generated gnatbind xe main_program ali o mainprog c This command is exactly the same as the previous example Switches may appea
234. g Java source javac hello java It generates the file hello class which may be loaded and executed by the following command kaffe hello Note that the argument to kaffe is the class name not the file name Power Machren User s Guide 229 11 7 Linking Executables 11 7 1 Id MachTen uses ld the link editor a k a the loader to produce executables and shared libraries It combines object files searches specified libraries to resolve external function and data references and produces IBM binary standard format XCOFF files It relies on an external program called mkpef to translate XCOFF output to Apple PEF format for use on the PowerPC Typically the XCOFF version of the file is deleted after the PEF file is produced Optionally the XCOFF file may be saved by adding the X1xcoff parameter to the ld execution command The XCOFF output is stored in a file with the same name as the target PEF file with a trailing xcoff For example if the loader is producing a file called myprog the XCOFF version of the loader s output will be put in myprog xcoff This program is automatically called by gcc in the default case so typically you will not have to execute this program or build specific rules into your Makefile structure Since Mach runs in real memory stack sizing considerations enter into the development of a program Mach provides a Xlstack lt stackbytes gt parameter that provides the ability to
235. g MachIen as a Domain Name Server 10 4 2 The Domain Name Resolver Using MachIen as a Web Server 10 5 1 Importing Macintosh Image Files 10 5 2 Multihoming Your Mach Web Server Using Mach as a Router 10 6 1 Invoking IP Forwarding Dual Stack Configuration 10 7 1 More RAM 10 7 2 Cross Talk 10 7 2 1 Routing Between Mach and OpenTransport sing Mach as a POP Mail Server sing Electronic Mail sing FTP sing Mach as an Anonymous FTP Server sing Telnet sing a Distributed File System NFS U U U U U U Using Berkeley r series Commands U sing Serial Line Communications 10 15 1 Cabling and Connectors 10 15 2 Matching Serial Ports to UNIX Devices 163 164 167 168 169 169 170 170 172 173 173 174 179 176 177 177 177 178 180 180 183 183 184 184 185 186 186 186 Power Machren Users Guide 10 15 3 Baud Rates Supported 187 10 15 4 General Purpose Interface GPI Serial Cable 188 10 15 5 Connecting a Modem to a Mach Serial Port 189 10 15 6 Connecting a Terminal 189 10 15 7 Configuring the System to Support an ASCII Terminal 190 10 15 8 Using PPP 190 10 15 8 1 Setting up Mach PPP on Your Macintosh 191 10 15 8 2 Configuring your Mach System as a PPP Server 191 10 15 8 3 Configuring your Mach System as a PPP Client 194 10 15 8 4 IP Addressing Strategy for Multiple PPP Clients 196 10 15 9 Using SLIP 197 10 15 9 1 Configuring Mach to Dial Out to SLIP Servers 197 10 15 9 2 Tip Activi
236. g it to a new location and then release the window Step 1 Grab the Title Bar with the Pointer Point to the title bar of the window The title bar is the rectangular area across the top of the window where the word xterm appears When properly positioned the pointer is an arrowhead as shown in Figure 35 Grabbing the Title Bar chussreioceBuL dere ll Figure 35 Grabbing the Title Bar When the pointer is positioned press and hold the select button Power MachrTen User s Guide 269 Step 2 Drag the Window to a New Location While still holding the select button slide the mouse to the right across your desktop Now slide the mouse toward you As you move the mouse the pointer on the screen drags an outline of the terminal window as shown in Figure 36 Repositioning the Window The outline shows you where the window will be moved when you release the mouse button Figure 36 Repositioning the Window Step 3 Release the Window Move the outline to the center of the screen When the outline is where you want it for now release the mouse button The window moves to the new position 270 Power Machren User s Guide 12 2 2 5 Changing the Size of a Window You can change the size of a window by grabbing an area of the window s frame with the pointer dragging the frame to the desired size and then releasing the frame Step 1 Grab the Frame with the Pointer Where you grab the window
237. g the Startup Environment Changes made in the Mach control panel screens are recorded in the file etc Install conf Whenever etc rc sees changes in this file it invokes the shell script etc rc config to update several system files including etc rc conf etc rc then reads the variables defined in etc rc conf and initializes the services and daemons specified Most variable definitions in rc conf reflect the configuration settings entered in the Mach control panel When you modify the control panel the changes are applied to rc conf the next time Mach boots For definitions not covered by the control panel edit rc conf and modify the variable directly All rc conf definitions are described below The first set of variable definitions controls the configuration of the network interface s installed in your system HOSTNAME The name of the machine running Mach ADDRINFO_ The host name of the machine on Ethernet e AppleTalk a SLIP s and or TokenRing t All assigned names should also appear in the etc hosts file IFCONFIG_ The network interface configuration parameters for Ethernet ie0 AppleTalk at0 SLIP sl0 and or TokenRing tr0 This variable is only defined if the interface is installed in the system and is to be initialized by Mach NETMASK_ The internet subnetwork mask for a configured network interface on Ethernet e AppleTalk a SLIP s and or TokenRing t 66 Power
238. gcc with the v verbose switch In this mode gcc produces ongoing information about the progress of the compilation and provides the name of each procedure as code is generated This switch allows you to find which Ada procedure was being compiled when it encountered a code generation problem 3 Run gcc with the gnatdc switch This is a GNAT specific switch that does for the frontend what v does for the backend The system prints the name of each unit either a compilation unit or nested unit as it is being analyzed 4 On systems that have gdb available most Unix systems start gdb directly on the gnat1 executable gnat1 is the front end of GNAT and can be run independently normally it is just called from gcc You can use gdb on gnat1 as you would on a C program but see section A2 12 3 Using gdb for caveats The where command is the first line of attack the variable 1 ineno seen by print lineno used by the second phase of gnat1 and by the gcc backend indicates the source line at which the execution stopped and input_filename indicates the name of the source file A2 84 Power Machren User s Guide A2 12 3 Using gdb gdb awaits modifications to handle Ada properly and for now can only be used as it would be for a C program In the meantime the following naming conventions allow you to find the Ada entities defined in your program e The names of all entities variables subprograms and so on are
239. gement options such as ARP table management statistics reporting and reconfiguration without rebooting Allows many routing entries and supports dynamic routing configuration via routed and gated Domain Name Resolution Supports single remote domain name server and uses a non standard hosts file Supports multiple domain name servers local and remote and uses a standard hosts file 166 Power Machren User s Guide OpenTransport Machren s TCP Simultaneous Yes when used with Yes unless the application Support of UNIX Mach is OpenTransport only and Macintosh Applications Multicast No Yes Loopback Yes Yes Operation IP Aliasing Yes Supports multiple IP addresses on single network interface Mach internetworking is designed to be self configurable upon installation However the installation process assumes that you are installing Mach on an existing internet that you already have an internet address and that you know the internet address of your gateway and your domain name server if they exist Consult the following setting up sections for steps that need to be performed to set up or change your network environment and to keep your network running 10 3 Using Mach as an Internet Host 10 4 Using Mach as a Domain Name Server and 10 6 Using Mach as a Router Power Machren User s Guide 10 2 Configuring Tenon TCP or Dual St
240. gnation using either an rm at or explicit local printer series of specifications Without this configuration a logical print loop will result which has wsrv handing its output to pd and Ipd handing its output to wsrv Explicit declaration of a printer for Ipd is important in avoiding this recursive configuration Naturally this is true of multiple wsrv Ipd Ipd lpd lwsrv situations as well and should be carefully understood when picking a name for wsrv to advertise to its AppleTalk zone When a Mach system is using a remote lwsrv to support local Ipd operations the local etc printcap must have an at entry and an r1 entry in the form at mylaser LaserWriter rl indicating the remote LaserWriter is a synthetic system and is unable to support normal maintenance PostScript requests such as PostScript page count Refer to section 9 4 Selecting an Alternate Printer 2 Ifthe printer you are accessing is a LaserWriter or LaserWriter Plus proceed to the next step Otherwise while still on Max see Figure 26 Spooling Printer Output to UNIX Printers Using lwsrv obtain the font list from the printer and install it in a file in usr lib lt something gt Font Use one of the techniques described in the section 9 5 1 1 Font Lists Power Machren User s Guide 161 3 Start lwsrv The command usr sbin lwsrv n mylaser a usr lib adicts f usr lib LWPlusFonts 1 var adm lwsrv e
241. gv values passed to it A2 5 8 Search Paths for gnatbind The binder must be able to find both the ALI files and the source files For source files it follows exactly the same search rules as gcc see section 4 4 Search Paths and the Run Time Library RTL Search paths are used for finding the ALI files The binder takes the name of an ALI file as its argument and needs to locate other ALI files in its recursive processing These are found in the following directories in the following order 1 The current working directory 2 All directories specified by 1 switches on the gnatbind command line in the order given 3 Each of the directories listed in the value of the ADA_OBJECTS_PATH environment variable Construct this value the same as the PATH environment variable a list of directory names separated by colons 4 The default location for the GNAT Run Time Library RTL files determined when GNAT was built and installed on your system A2 54 Power Machren User s Guide For source files accessed by the binder the search procedure is as described above for object files except that in step 3 the environment variable ADA_SOURCE_PATH is used The binder generates the bind file a C language source file in the current working directory The packages Ada System and Interfaces and their children make up the GNAT Run Time Library together with the package GNAT and its children which contain a set of use
242. h ex vi settings SET UP CSH CONTROL VARIABLES set filec Enable filename completion with lt esc gt and d Normally csh will log out when d is typed at start of command line set ignoreeof Disable this feature set noclobber Tell csh not to write over existing files during I O redirection set notify Tell csh to provide immediate job completion messages set history 20 Tell csh to remember the last 20 commands set savehist 20 Tell csh to remember last 20 commands from previous login set prompt Suser Shost Set prompt to include the user s name and local host s name COMMAND ALIAS SECTION alias psh pushd Set up some useful short versions of often alias pop popd used commands alias hi history alias j jobs 1 alias cd set old Scwd chdir alias back set back Sold set old Scwd cd Sback unset back dirs Set up alias for cd back cd works like regular cd and sets shell variable old so that the back alias will put us back to the previous directory alias new ls aglt head 15 Set up alias that will show the 15 newest files in the local directory newest first endif Figure 20 A cshrc File Power Machren User s Guide 77 5 6 7 The Password File Once you are set up as a user you should add a password using passwd In 4 4BSD the etc passwd 5 file is an ASCII file which is a shadow of the actual password database file Do not make changes to this file Use the passwd chp
243. h10 A Mach console window will appear with system configuration information taken from the Mach control panel Power Machren User s Guide 19 MachTen Console MachTen 4 1 1 Copyright lt c gt 1997 1998 Tenon Intersystems Using Open Transport TCP IP with Multihoming Mounting Mac file systems MachTen CO on volume COROM read only gt Checking Root Fast File System clean 75739 free 3499 frags 9030 blocks 1 88 fragmentation Configuring loopback interface fuuc A Checking Fast File Systems clean 12238 free 2110 frags 1266 blocks 3 38 fragmentation Mounting Fast File Systems fvolume COROM Source_FFS on base sre read only fMachTenFolder X11R6_FFS on usr X11R6 Mounting Root File System Read Write Linking to MachTen Folder Cleaning up tmp volume var run fete dev var spool output mqueue P Starting local configuration Starting system logger Mounting remote filesystems Starting daemons inetd macmntd Local configuration finished Oct 5 11 35 31 fred init kernel security level changed from O to 1 MachTen fred console gt login Jj Figure 7 Machren Console Window Your Mach system is now ready to use Please read section 4 1 The Mach Login Console for information on how to log in Refer to the following sections for additional set up procedures 3 0 The Mach Control Panel 5 6 5 The Root Password and 5
244. hapter discusses the gnatk8 filename krunching utility A2 10 1 About gnatk8 The normal rule in using GNAT is that the filename must be derived from the unit name The exact default rule is Take the unit name and replace all dots by hyphens except that if such a replacement occurs in the second character position of aname replace the dot by a plus instead of a hyphen The gnatknn switch of the compiler activates a krunching circuit that limits filenames to nn characters where nn is a decimal integer This is primarily intended for use on MS DOS and similar systems where nn 8 to fit in the 8 3 limitation on filenames found in these systems The gnatk8 utility can be used to determine the krunched name for a given file when krunched to a specified maximum length A2 10 2 Using gnatk8 amp The gnatk8 command has the form gnatk8 name length name can be an Ada name with dots or the GNAT name of the unit where the dots representing child units or subunit are replaced by hyphens The only confusion arises if a name ends in ads or adb gnatk8 takes this to be an extension if there are no other dots in the name and the whole name is in lower case length represents the length of the krunched name The default without any argument given is 8 characters A length of zero stands for unlimited in other words no chop except for system files which are always 8 The output is the krunched name The output has an ex
245. he GNAT rules and do the remaining development using the GNAT structure you can simply use gnatchop once generate the new set of files and work with them from that point on Alternatively if you want to keep your files in the foreign format perhaps to maintain compatibility with some other Ada compilation system you can set up a procedure where you use gnatchop each time you compile regarding the source files that it writes as temporary files that you throw away A2 66 Power Machren User s Guide A2 8 2 Command Line for gnatchop The gnatchop command has the form gnatchop k r s w filename directory The only required argument is the filename of the file to be chopped There are no restrictions on the form of this filename The file itself contains one or more Ada files in normal GNAT format concatenated together When run in default mode gnatchop generates one output file in the current directory for each unit in the file For example given a file called hellofiles containing procedure hello with Text_IO use Text_I10O procedure hello is begin Put_Line Hello end hello the command gnatchop hellofiles generates two files in the current directory one called hello ads containing the single line that is the procedure spec and the other called hello adb containing the remaining text The original file is not affected The generated files can be compiled in the normal
246. here is still a guarantee that the resulting program is A2 50 Power Machren User s Guide self consistent If a source file has been edited since it was last compiled and you specify the x switch the binder will not detect that the object file is out of date with the source file For most purposes the default mode is appropriate and this is the mode that is normally used when gnatmake or gnatbind is used to do the bind operation A2 5 3 Error Message Control The following switches provide control over the generation of error messages from the binder Verbose mode In the normal mode brief error messages are generated to stderr If the v switch is present a header is written to stdout and any error messages are directed to stdout All that is written to stderr isa brief summary message b Generate brief error messages to stderr even if verbose mode is specified This is relevant only when used together with the v switch mn Limits the number of error messages to n a decimal integer in the range 1 999 The binder terminates immediately if this limit is reached ws Suppress all warning messages we Treat any warning messages as fatal errors Yet Ignore time stamp errors Any time stamp error messages are treated as warning messages This switch essentially disconnects the normal consistency checking and the resulting program may have undefined semantics if inconsistent units are present
247. hree button 281 283 configuration 281 default keystrokes 282 example 283 X desktop 267 clicking and dragging 267 pointer shapes 267 mt utility 121 122 MTU defined 42 SLIP 43 203 TokenRing 43 multi homing 38 169 multi link multihoming 164 multiple users support for 71 multitasking pre emptive 6 MUMM file types 97 mwm 260 N name server 171 named daemon 47 171 NAMED_BOOT variable 67 native fast file system 7 9 net_search_rules command 168 NETMASK variable 65 netmasks 42 network configuration screen 38 Power Machren User s Guide configuration screen 38 Network File System Protocol Specification RFC 1094 125 Network File System see NFS Network Information Service see NIS Network Solutions how to contact 168 networking 163 211 configuration example 43 multiple interfaces 169 screen 38 control panel 180 183 overview 163 NeXT 5 NFS 123 141 authentication options 133 user credentials 133 bwnfsd UID and GID mapping 133 client defined 123 diskless 127 mounting 126 setting up 125 daemons mountd 125 nfsd 125 portmap 125 starting 126 defined 123 exporting directories 124 how it works 124 mounting 124 volumes on the desktop 130 132 automatic 132 overview 184 record locking 132 server Power Machren User s Guide defined 123 exporting 126 setting up 125 setting up instructions 128 129 stateless mode 124 unmounting volumes on the desktop 131 using 124 nfsd daemon 47 125 NIS 143 1
248. i adb Power Machren User s Guide A2 79 e The filenames for all predefined units are always krunched to eight characters The krunching of these predefined units uses the following special prefix replacements ada replaced by a gnat replaced by g interfaces replaced by i system replaced by s These system files have a hyphen in the second character position That is why normal user files replace such a character with a plus sign to avoid confusion with system filenames As an example of this special rule consider ada strings wide_fixed adb which gets krunched as follows ada strings wide_fixed 22 strings wide fixed 18 string wide fixed 17 strin wide fixed 16 stri wide fixed 15 stri wide fixe 14 str wide fixe 13 str wid fixe 12 str wid Fix 11 st wid Fix 10 st wi Fix 9 st wi Ei 8 Final filename a stwifx adb Of course no file shortening algorithm can guarantee uniqueness over all possible unit names and if filename krunching is used then it is your responsibility to ensure that no name clashes occur The utility program gnatk8 is supplied for conveniently determining the krunched name of a file A2 10 4 gnatk8 gnatk8 gnatk8 gnatk8 gnatk8 very_long_unit_name ads ae very_long_unit_name ads 6 SS Se gt very_long_unit_name ads 0 moesm grandparent parent child ads gt grandparent parent child gt Examples of gnatk8 Usage
249. ide gnatb The b stands for brief This switch causes GNAT to generate the brief format error messages to stdout as well as the verbose format message or full listing gnatmn The m stands for maximum n is a decimal integer in the range of 1 to 999 and limits the number of error messages to be generated For example using gnatm2 might yield e adb 3 04 Incorrect spelling of keyword function e adb 5 35 missing fatal error maximum errors reached compilation abandoned gnatf Normally the compiler suppresses error messages that are likely to be redundant This switch where f stands for full causes all error messages to be generated One particular effect is for the case of references to undefined variables If a given variable is referenced several times the normal format of messages is e adb 7 07 V is undefined more references follow where the parenthetical comment warns that there are additional references to the variable V Compiling the same program with the gnat f switch yields e adb 7 07 V is undefined e adb 8 07 V is undefined e adb 8 12 V is undefined e adb 8 16 V is undefined e adb 9 07 V is undefined e adb 9 12 V is undefined gnatq In normal operation mode the compiler first parses the program and determines if there are any syntax errors If there are appropriate error messages are
250. iders offer SLIP services as well Mach SLIP is equally effective as a simple extension of your office network to your home over residential telephone lines The information in this chapter provides information on configuring using and maintaining SLIP connections under Mach 10 15 9 1 Configuring Machren to Dial Out to SLIP Servers Mach provides a program called tip 1 to automatically establish a full duplex connection to another machine via a dial out modem attached to a serial port on your Macintosh Once connected tip can automatically initiate a login authentication exchange with the remote system and if successful enable a SLIP session on the line If the remote system requires any manual intervention to start up SLIP as with PSINet networks refer to section 10 15 10 5 Manual Connections to SLIP Servers During the SLIP session the SLIP line or interface becomes an integral part of the Mach networking environment running standalone or simultaneously with other network interfaces such as Ethernet or Appletalk configured into your Macintosh Both Mach and Macintosh internet applications have full access to the SLIP network interface 198 Power Machren User s Guide To enable SLIP dial out network connections the command tip s lt system name gt is used where lt system name gt is a label for a configuration database entry describing exactly how to contact and communicate with the remote s
251. ified for the individual X application In addition since Mach allows multiple simultaneous users X application preferences can also be specified for each individual user Power Machren User s Guide 261 Resource Files Resource files contain the default application resources and are commonly provided with the X application you are running The resource file is named after the class nam e of the application By convention the class name of the application is the same as the program name but with the first letter capitalized for example Bitmap or Emacs although some programs that begin with the letter x also capitalize the second letter Application class names can be discovered using the xprop utility Resource Syntax In their simplest form resources have the following syntax name variable value For example XTerm background beige where name is either the class name or the instance name of the application The default instance name is the name of the program for example xterm background blue Instance names may be changed using the name command line option when you start the application You can use the name option to distinguish more than one instance of the same application in your resource file As an example suppose you want xterm windows to have a blue background for programming C and a red background for Ada Your resource file may contain the following resources xte
252. ifies the device The major and minor numbers for this device are packed in four bytes and are stored in the data fork of the file CHR Character Devices BLK Block Devices Matr di F This file type is used to identify UNIX block devices The major and minor numbers for this device are packed in four bytes and are stored in the data fork of the file SOCK Sockets ET w dar This file type is used to identify UNIX sockets Sockets are communication endpoints used for sending and receiving data 100 Power Machren User s Guide FIFO Pipes 4 Ls ar This file type is used to identify named UNIX pipes A pipe is a special type of file that is created by UNIX processes in order to pass information to other processes Pipes enforce a first in first out FIFO mechanism on data HLNK Hard Links E5 Ls ar This file type is used to identify hard links Hard linking allows several file names to be associated with the same physical file SHLB Shared Libraries LIES dar This file type is used to identify a shared library file Many of the traditional UNIX shared libraries libc libm etc will have two versions in MachIen one for the compile time Header Call definitions and the other for the run time dynamic linking Power Machren User s Guide 101 6 4 6 File Permissions Mach stores the user ID group ID and mode bits in a reserved area of the resource fork for each UNIX file Ma
253. ile 171 example 172 etc net_search_rules files 168 etc nis conf file 143 etc nis conf file 144 etc nsswitch conf file 143 145 example 145 etc passwd file 78 etc printcap file 150 161 modifying 151 etc rc database 46 etc rc conf file 48 etc rc conf database 46 etc rc local file 48 etc remote database 198 etc resolv conf file 172 48 etc sendmail cf file 48 etc ttys file 48 etc yp conf file 143 modifying 144 etext symbol 245 Ethernet 38 39 65 124 169 EtherTalk 14 Eudora 182 execute permission 89 exporting via NFS 124 eXtended Common Object File Format XCOFF 219 F 771 215 Fast File First Aid 117 fast file system 87 93 backing up with tar command 121 defined 87 native 7 9 overview 88 within a file 93 FFS See fast file system FFS_Installer 13 FIFO file types 100 file access memory mapped 8 contents 92 CShrc 76 etc group file 78 79 group 78 header 222 login 72 86 Profile 72 86 macros 222 pre defined names 222 linked 96 locked 97 Macintosh dfork 111 finderinfo 111 manipulating 111 restool 111 rfork 111 Makefiles 230 manipulation of text 112 memory mapped 242 menu 53 X desktop 252 names case sensitivity 94 component separators 95 maximum number of characters 94 non printable characters 95 size limitations 89 92 open maximum number allowed 37 password 77 PEF format 9 permissions 18 101 example 101 sharing 3 21 control panel 21 shell files example
254. ile Sharing default is not settable on an individual user s basis Desktop NFS does not use a umask to specify the permissions to be used when creating a new file or folder on a Desktop NFS volume The Finder s Sharing dialog box can subsequently be used to restrict access to such newly created folders Note that the Apple File Sharing permissions apply only to folders To set the access privileges of individual files the UNIX interface must be used Since NFS supports permissions for both files and folders Desktop NFS users can further restrict access to Desktop NFS files by specifying the access permissions for the individual files themselves In this case the UNIX chmod command must be used as the Finder s Sharing dialog box will only allow making changes to folders Since the UNIX access permission to Read Write or Search the index of a directory does not differentiate between files and directories in the index Desktop NFS does not allow setting one of See Files and See Folders in the access privileges of a folder Either both are permitted or both are not A Desktop NFS folder with See Files and See Folders permitted actually has the UNIX permissions Read and Search A Desktop NFS folder without See Files and See Folders permitted does not have the UNIX permission Read and may not have the UNIX permission Search depending on the setting of the Mak
255. ils on setting and unsetting environment variables and the special shell script file s that are processed during startup The environment variables DEBUGGERFIRST STACKCHK and MEMSTATS direct Mach to perform special debugging or monitoring actions when they are set to a non zero value typically 1 Environment variables set in a given process are only propagated to child processes It is often convenient to establish one terminal window with the desired debugging environment and to have additional terminal windows for editing and other activities Unset the environment variables to discontinue their service Power Machren User s Guide 235 11 10 3 1 DEBUGGERFIRST When set the environment variable DEBUGGERF IRST causes Mach to execute a Debugger MacOS system call immediately before entering the main function of the application This allows you to set initial breakpoints and step through initial startup actions such as C constructor calls For this to work you must have previously installed a low level debugger such as MacsBug By default Mach will trap this Debugger call To allow the Debugger call to pass through to the MacOS and MacsBug or other debuggers rename the Mach application to MachTen noexcept and restart Mach 11 10 3 2 STACKCHK When set the environment variable STACKCHK causes Mach to report on the console terminal the amount of stack used when a prog
256. in the default host name are converted to underscores 36 Power Machren Users Guide 3 2 1 2 Time Zone This is a pop up menu for choosing the appropriate time zone for your system Many UNIX systems set the system clock to Greenwich Mean Time GMT and automatically compensate for Daylight Savings Time In order to integrate with time as seen on the Macintosh Mach uses the time as set in the Macintosh Date amp Time control panel typically local time The time zone information helps Mach convert between local time and GMT Users are responsible for adjusting the Date amp Time control panel clock by hand when changing to and from Daylight Savings Time If available the default time zone is extracted from the setting in the Map control panel 3 2 2 Memory Configuration Screen Mach uses maximum parameter values in the Memory Configuration screen to dynamically allocate UNIX kernel memory resources at boot time As your system requirements change these values can be adjusted accordingly Memory Configuration Maximum Number of Unix processes Eig Open files UFS buffers NFS buffers Figure 12 Memory Configuration Screen Power Machren User s Guide 37 3 2 2 1 Maximum Number Parameters UNIX kernel parameters are presented as maximum allowable values UNIX processes This is the maximum number of processes shells programs daemons etc that can be run at one time The default value of 36 process
257. indow Menu 253 Figure 33 The Order Sub Menu 254 Figure 34 The OpenLook Environment 266 Figure 35 Grabbing the Title Bar 268 Figure 36 Repositioning the Window 269 Figure 37 A Window and Its Elastic Outline 271 Figure 38 The Title Bar Minimize Button 272 Figure 39 The OpenLook Icon 272 Figure 40 The Restored Window 273 Figure 41 The OpenLook Window Menu 274 Figure 42 A Partially Concealed Window 276 Figure 43 The Window Revealed 277 Figure 44 Logitech MouseMan Control Panel 283 Figure 45 Monitors amp Sound Control Panel 296 Figure 46 Mouse Control Panel 297 Figure 47 Keyboard Control Panel 297 Figure 48 Control Strip Control Panel 298 Figure 49 MachIen Control Panel 298 Power Machren User s Guide 1 1 0 Power Machren UNIX on the Macintosh Desktop Welcome to MachIen a complete UNIX OS that runs as a Macintosh application Mach provides a full suite of Internet services distributed file system services and remote printer spooling These services are available not only to UNIX applications but to Macintosh applications as well Mach also supports a sophisticated set of UNIX and X software development tools a high performance X Window server and hundreds of UNIX applications The combined strength of UNIX and X enables seamless integration of applications and resources across networks Having UNIX and X on your Macintosh will enable you to benefit from the rich array of Macintosh easy to use applications a
258. ine when Mach is started or if the CD is inserted when Mach is running To access the source files from the CD ROM a mount command must be executed to make the CD based Source_FFS accessible within the Mach file system As root execute the following commands cd volume CDROM sbin mount t ffs Source_FFS base src Note that the target directory base src is still on the hard disk so the objects for the BSD4 4 sources can be built even though the sources are on the CD Obviously you cannot modify these programs by changing the source without first copying them from the CD to your hard disk Also note that this mount will take place automatically if the MachIen CD ROM is installed when Mach is started You can see if the directory base src is already mounted on Source_FFS by issuing a mount command with no parameters This will give you a list of the mounted volumes and the directories on which those volumes are mounted Power Machren User s Guide 31 2 3 Troubleshooting The Mach installation automatically configures the UNIX networking software and adjusts the Macintosh system environment to ensure a properly running system This section will help you solve problems that may arise as you work with Mach Symptom Solution While installing and Temporarily remove or disable extensions copying files from the particularly any anti virus extensions Unprotect CD ROM to the hard your System Folder Retry the i
259. ing Internal Debugging Information Most compilers have secret internal debugging switches and modes GNAT does also except GNAT internal debugging switches and modes are not secret A summary and full description of all the compiler and binder debug flags are in the file debug adb You must obtain the sources of the compiler to see the full detailed effects of these flags The switches that print the source of the program reconstructed from the internal tree are of general interest as are the options to print the full internal tree and the entity table that is the symbol table information A2 12 2 GNAT Crashes GNAT may experience problems in operation such as aborting with a segmentation fault or illegal memory access raising an internal exception or terminating abnormally If such problems occur try the solutions described in this section The following strategies are presented in increasing order of difficulty corresponding to the user s skill level and curiosity about the functioning of the compiler Power Machren User s Guide A2 83 1 Run gcc with the gnatf and gnate switches The first switch causes all errors on a given line to be reported In its absence only the first error ona line is displayed The gnate switch causes errors to be displayed as soon as they are encountered rather than after compilation is terminated Often this is enough to identify the construct that produced the crash 2 Run
260. ing Remote Print Jobs Mach can act as a print spooler for other UNIX machines on your network The printer can be a directly connected ImageWriter a LaserWriter on AppleTalk or any printer on the network To set up Mach to act as a print spooler for other UNIX machines on the network perform the following steps 1 Configure your local printer following the instructions in section 9 2 Local Printing 2 To enable remote print access add any remote host names that will use the printer as a remote printer to the etc hosts Ipd file Refer to the rlogin 1 manual page for more information on the format of the etc hosts equiv file Add the host name as a full domain name for example myhost tenon com 3 Start the line printer daemon lpd 4 Enable the printer with the command lpc enable lt printer gt 156 Power Machren User s Guide 9 4 Selecting an Alternate Printer Printing involves explicit or implicit selection of a physical printer To explicitly select a printer you may use the P option for the lpr command If no P option is specified the pr program uses the value of the PRINTER shell environment variable see printenv 1 and section 5 4 Tailoring Your UNIX Environment for more information If the environment variable does not exist pr uses the the first printer with the name lp specified in the etc printcap file In the default configuration this is also the AppleTalk printer selected via Chooser
261. ing the body of this subprogram as well as on the file containing the spec The object file for a parent unit depends on the body files for all subunits of the parent unit These rules are applied transitively if unit A with s unit B whose elaboration calls an inlined procedure in package C the object file for unit A will depend on the body of C in file c adb The set of dependent files described by these rules includes all the files on which the unit is semantically dependent as described in the Ada 95 Language Reference Manual However it is larger because of the inclusion of generic inline and subunit dependencies An object file must be recreated by recompiling the corresponding source file if any of the source files on which it depends are modified For example if the make utility is used to control compilation the rule for an Ada object file must mention all the source files on which the object file A2 20 Power Machren User s Guide depends A2 3 7 The Ada Library Information Files Each compilation actually generates two output files The first of these is the normal object file with a o extension The second is a text file containing the dependency information file It has the same name but with an ali extension This file is known as the Ada Library Information ALI file You normally need not be concerned with the contents of this file but this section is included in case you want to underst
262. ingle format by Mach when the file is accessed by UNIX applications Conversely when an AppleSingle format file is written by a UNIX application such as tar 1 Mach automatically re creates a proper Macintosh file with the specified data and or resource forks Power Machren User s Guide 111 6 7 3 Utilities for Manipulating Macintosh Files 6 7 3 1 dfork and rfork Mach provides a UNIX filter called dfork 1 which reads an AppleSingle format file from its standard input and writes only the data fork to the standard output Mach also provides a filter called rfork 1 which reads an AppleSingle format file from its standard input and writes only the resource fork to the standard output 6 7 3 2 finderinfo Mach provides a UNIX utility called finderinfo 1 for accessing and changing the Finder information of a Macintosh file such as creator and type Options to finderinfo specify which Finder information fields to change The following command illustrates changing the creator to MUMM and type to TEXT for a Macintosh file finderinfo C MUMM T TEXT lt Macintosh_file gt Note that using this utility in no way changes the data in either fork of a file 6 7 3 3 restool Mach provides a UNIX utility called restool 1 for merging the resources of one or more Macintosh file s into another restool requires the services of the Macintosh Resource Manager and thus can only work with UFS files 112 Power Machren User
263. irst integer after the filename is the line number and the second integer is the column number emacs can parse the error messages and point to the referenced character Power Machren User s Guide A2 33 The following gnat switches allow control over the error message format gnatv The v stands for verbose The effect is to write long format error messages to stdout The same program compiled with the gnatv switch would generate 3 funcion X Q Integer gt gt gt Incorrect spelling of keyword function 4 return Integer gt gt gt should be is The vertical bar indicates the location of the error and the gt gt gt prefix can be used to search for error messages When this switch is used the only source lines output are those with errors gnatl The 1 stands for list gnat 1 causes a full listing of the file to be generated The output is as follows 1 procedure E is 2 V Integer 3 funcion X Q Integer gt gt gt Incorrect spelling of keyword function 4 return Integer gt gt gt should be is om begin 6 return Q Q Te end 8 begin 9 V X X 10 end E When you specify the gnatv or gnat1 switches and standard output is redirected a brief summary is written to stderr standard error giving the number of error messages and warning messages generated A2 34 Power Machren User s Gu
264. is file may need to be edited to add or subtract hosts see Figure 28 Example etc hosts File It is convenient to keep your active files in a subdirectory of etc etc nsdata for example If you are interconnecting to a public or regional network you must also follow their domain registration procedures Power Machren User s Guide 171 The name server named 8 reads a boot file at startup This file tells the server what kind of name server it is what domains zones it has authority over and where to get its initial data The name etc named boot is assumed unless named is initiated with a b option such as b etc nsdata boot Example host file 127 0 0 1 localhost Class C address is subnetted to allow 4 subnets of 62 hosts each subnet mask 255 255 255 192 subnet 0 is the ethernet subnet subnet 1 is the appletalk subnet subnet 2 is the slip subnet subnet 3 is reserved Suffix convention for naming the address of a host interface _a for AppleTalk _e for Ethernet _s for SLIP The hostname sans suffix identifies the preferred or only address The following machines have both Ethernet and AppleTalk interfaces 223 255 254 1 mumm mumm some com mumm_e 223 255 254 65 mumm_a The remaining machines are AppleTalk only 223 255 254 96 classic classic some com classic_a 223 255 254 97 jazz jazz some com jazz_a 223 255 254 98 rock rock some com rock_a Root
265. it Y Normally GNAT allows only a single unit in a source file However this restriction does not apply in syntax check only mode and it is possible to check a file containing multiple compilation units concatenated together This is primarily used by the gnatchop utility see section 8 0 Handling Files With Multiple Units With gnatchop A2 38 Power Machren User s Guide A2 4 3 5 Using gcc for Semantic Checking gnatc Cause the compiler to operate in semantic check mode c stands for check with full checking for all illegalities specified in the reference manual but without generation of any source code no object or ALI file generated Since dependent files must be accessed you must follow the GNAT semantic restrictions on file structuring to operate in this mode e The needed source files must be accessible see section A2 4 4 Search Paths and the Run Time Library RTL e Each file must contain only one compilation unit e The filename and unit name must match see section A2 3 3 File Naming Rules The output consists of error messages as appropriate No object file or ALI file is generated The checking corresponds exactly to the notion of legality in the Ada reference manual Any unit can be compiled in semantics checking only mode including units that would not normally be compiled generic library units subunits and specifications where a separate body is present A2 4 3 6 Compiling Ad
266. ix lt gt Text 113 unixtext 113 unmounting automatic 109 directories via NFS 124 file systems 118 Macintosh volumes 109 NFS volumes 131 user accounts setting up 75 environment 71 IDs 77 removing 82 User Datagram Protocol UDP 124 usr directory tree 104 uucp command 189 V var directory tree 105 var log aculog file 198 var preserve file 23 variables ADDRINFO_ 65 CLEANUP_tmp 66 DEBUGGERFIRST 235 GATEWAY 67 HOSTNAME 65 IFCONFIG_ 65 1 20 MACHTEN 69 MEMSTATS 235 MOUNT_REMOTE_FILES 66 128 NAMED_BOOT 67 NETMASK 65 PRESERVE_EDITOR_FILES 66 PRINTER 156 STACKCHK 235 START_cron 66 START_inetd 66 START_lpd 66 START_macmntd 66 START_named 66 172 START_sendmail 66 START_syslogd 66 TERM 69 TERMCAP 69 TTY 69 VPATH 218 246 XENVIRONMENT 264 virus protection software disabling 16 volume defined 91 VPATH variable 218 246 VT100 emulation 69 WwW wall command 81 Web server using Machien as 173 wheel group 72 wind daemon 25 47 49 69 windows changing to and from an icon 272 273 environment 49 52 Mach 52 tailoring 68 menu 56 Power Mach User s Guide displaying 274 functions 274 275 X desktop 253 terminal 51 X desktop 267 moving 268 269 raising 276 277 sizing 270 271 Windrc file X Windows environment 255 creating 68 defined 68 World Wide Web WWW 25 47 173 write permission 89 writing to all users 81 WWW World Wide Web 25 47 173 X X desktop 249 changing
267. l rlogin shows a Mach system with three Mach windows open The user has an rlogin session in one window an ftp File Transfer Protocol in another and has just sent a message in a third window Since Mach implements the Internet family of protocols including the Transmission Control Protocol TCP and the Internet Protocol IP it is able to interact with other TCP based microcomputers workstations such as a Sun workstation and larger scale mini and maxi class computers such as a DEC VAX ra o p File Edit Window Fonts Help Fri 5 27 58 PM r Terminal 1 0S Terminal 3 PB rootBathena ftp otaku root athena rlogin caravel lit Connected to otaku tenon com Password 220 otaku FTP server Version wu 2 4 10 HebTen Wed Nov 12 Copyright lt c gt 1980 1983 1986 1988 19 dy The Regents of the University of Name lt otaku root 331 Password required for root MachTen 4 1 Password root caravel ps a 230 User root logged in PIO TT STAT TIME COMMAND Remote system type is MACOS 0 R lt kernel idle ftp bin 17 0 00 sbin init 200 Type set to I 118 S 0 00 usr sbin inetd ftp get 324 S 0 00 rlogind remote file cshrc 115 co U 0 00 usr sbin macmntd i local file gt dev nul 124 co 0 00 usr bin wind local dev null remote cshrc 325 p0 0 00 tesh tesh 200 PORT command successful 328 pO R 0 00 ps ax 150 Opening BINARY mode data connection for cshrc 1886 bl 0 00 csh t
268. le body in file xyz adb with all default options gcc c 02 gnata xyz def adb Compile the child unit package in file xyz def adb with extensive optimizations and pragma Assert Debug statements enabled gcc c gnatc abc def adb Compile the subunit in file abc def adb in semantic checking only mode A2 46 Power Machren User s Guide A2 5 0 Binding Ada Programs With gnatbind This chapter describes the GNAT binder gnatbind which is used to bind compiled GNAT objects The gnatbind program performs four separate functions 1 Checks that a program is consistent in accordance with the rules in chapter 10 of the Ada Language Reference Manual In particular error messages are generated if a program uses inconsistent versions of a given unit 2 Checks that an acceptable order of elaboration exists for the program and issues an error message if it cannot find an order of elaboration satisfying the rules in Chapter 10 of the Ada Language Reference Manual 3 Generates a main program incorporating the given elaboration order This program is a small C source file that must be subsequently compiled using the C compiler The two most important functions of this program are to call the elaboration routines of units in an appropriate order and to call the main program 4 Determines the set of object files required by the given main program This information is output as comments in the generated C program to be read by the gn
269. le names are translated according to the AppleSingle 7 bit ASCII naming convention Non printable characters are translated to a percent sign followed by a two digit hexadecimal representation of the character s value The following are some examples File Name as Viewed by MacOS File Name as Viewed by Mach Filename Filename aa Filename Filename a8 Filename Filename a9 For more information on AppleSingle refer to section 6 7 1 AppleSingle Encapsulation 96 Power Machren User s Guide 6 4 2 Linked Files In UNIX linking allows several file names to be associated with the same physical file Mach properly supports UNIX hard and soft links via the link 2 and symlink 2 system calls 6 4 2 1 Hard Links Mach provides a file system paradigm that permits copying or moving either UNIX or Macintosh files with either UNIX or Macintosh tools with equal results However the UNIX implementation of hard links prohibits cross disk hard links Using the Finder to copy Mach s hard links from one volume to another will not work Therefore you cannot use the Finder or any other Macintosh tool to copy or move Mach hard links from one Macintosh volume to another This restriction is similar to the traditional UNIX restriction no cross disk hard links MachIenrs implementation of hard links uses a hidden folder at the root level of a volume and uses the Macintosh HFS equivalent of i
270. les prefixed with bind implement the binder which verifies the consistency of the compilation determines an order of elaboration and generates the bind file e The files atree ads and atree adb detail the low level data structures used by the front end e The files sinfo ads and sinfo adb detail the structure of the abstract syntax tree as produced by the parser The files einfo ads and einfo adb detail the attributes of all entities computed during semantic analysis e Library management issues are dealt with in files with prefix lib e Ada files with the prefix a are children of Ada as defined in Annex A e Files with prefix i are children of Interfaces as defined in Annex B e Files with prefix s are children of System This includes both language defined children and GNAT runtime routines e Files with prefix g are children of GNAT These are useful general purpose packages fully documented in their specifications All the other c files are modifications of common gcc files A2 18 Power Machren User s Guide A2 3 5 Generating Object Files An Ada program consists of a set of source files and the first step in compiling the program is to generate the corresponding object files These are generated by compiling a subset of these source files The files you need to compile are the following e Ifa package spec has no body compile the
271. li gnatlink o gmain gmain ali A better approach is to simply use gnatmake as described in the following section Power Machren User s Guide A2 11 A2 2 4 Using the gnatmake Utility As you work on a program you keep track of which units you modify and make sure you not only recompile these units but also any units that depend on units you have modified For example in the preceding case if you edit gmain adb you only need recompile that file But if you edit greetings ads you must recompile both greetings adb and gmain adb since both files contain units that depend on greetings ads gnatbind will warn you if you forget one of these compilation steps so it is never possible to generate an inconsistent program as a result of forgetting to do a compilation but it can be annoying to keep track of the dependencies One approach would be to use a Makefile but the trouble with make files is that the dependencies may change as you change the program and you must make sure that the Makefile is kept up to date The gnatmake utility takes care of these details automatically Invoke it as follows gnatmake gmain adb The argument is the file containing the main program gnatmake examines the environment automatically recompiles any files that need recompiling and binds and links the resulting set of object files generating the executable file gmain A2 12 Power Machren User s Guide
272. local system queued for printing as well as the status of the remote printer Use pq to determine the status of each of your print jobs Each print job has a number That number is used to manipulate the job with the prm and Ipc commands The example below shows a file queued for printing lpq lp is ready and printing Rank Owner Job Files Total Size active johnson 685 standard input 24799 bytes The prm 1 command is used to delete already queued print files that you have subsequently decided not to print lprm will first look locally for queued files and then contact any remote spooling systems to request that files be deleted Files are specified by the job numbers obtained from Ipq For example lprm 685 Finally the lpc 8 program is used to perform larger management operations with printers and queues of print jobs Ipc will enable or disable the overall operations of a specific printer enable or disable the spooling queue of a printer rearrange the order of jobs in the spooling queue and find the status of printers associated spool queues and spooling daemon software Power Machren User s Guide 163 10 0 Networking with Mach Mach is rich in features that promote the sharing of data and processor resources with remote systems Mach communications software supports the exchange of data remote timesharing of resources and global electronic mail with a wide variety of systems Figure 27 Resource Sharing FTP mai
273. lowing commands gcc c hello adb gnatmake c hello gnatmake c hello adb gcc is the command used to access the compiler This compiler is capable of compiling programs in several languages including Ada 95 and C It determines you have given it an Ada program by the extension ads or adb and will call the GNAT compiler to compile the specified file The c switch is required It tells gcc to do a compilation For C programs gcc can also do linking but this capability is not used directly for Ada programs so the c switch must always be present This compile command generates a file hello o which is the object file corresponding to your Ada program It also generates a file hello ali which contains additional information used to check that an Ada program is consistent To get an executable file either use gnatmake or use gnatbind followed by gnatlink gnatmake is a master program which invokes all of the required gcc tools in the correct order and compiles all necessary Ada units when requested to do so gnatmake hello or gnatbind x hello ali gnatlink o hello hello ali The result is an executable program called hello which can be run using the normal Unix command hello and if all has gone well you will see Hello WORLD appear in response to this command Power Machren User s Guide A2 9 A2 2 3 Running a Program With Multiple Units Consider a slightly more
274. ls There are some bugs which appear only with optimization turned on but there have also been bugs which show up only in unoptimized code Selecting a lower level of optimization does not improve the reliability of the code generator which in practice is highly reliable at all optimization levels Power Machren User s Guide A2 87 A2 13 3 Inlining of Subprograms A call to a subprogram in the current unit is inlined if all the following conditions are met The optimization level is at least 01 The called subprogram is suitable for inlining It must be small enough and not contain nested subprograms or anything else that gcc cannot support in inlined subprograms The call occurs after the definition of the body of the subprogram Either pragma Inline applies to the subprogram or it is very small and automatic inlining optimization level 03 is specified Calls to subprograms in with ed units are normally not inlined To achieve this level of inlining the following conditions must all be true The optimization level is at least 01 The called subprogram is suitable for inlining It must be small enough and not contain nested subprograms or anything else gcc cannot support in inlined subprograms The call appears in a body not in a package spec There is a pragma Inline for the subprogram The gnatn switch is used in the gcc command line A2 88 Power Machren User s Guide Note that s
275. m developed by Sun Microsystems that supports remote data access to various system parameters NIS clients are able to make network based requests to a centralized set of NIS servers for user and password host name internet names and addresses and other UNIX system specific information Mach has a pre installed NIS client implementation that with a relatively simple configuration will support Mach NIS client operations This section describes the Mach NIS client configuration process In the context of MachIen NIS and NIST refer to version 3 of the NIS protocol YP is used to refer to an earlier version 2 of the protocol Mach has implementations of both version 2 and version 3 of the NIS protocol Configuration of NIS and NIST parameters provides for setup and operation of an NIS client with a version 3 NIS server Configuration of YP parameters provides for version 2 NIS server operations You may specify either or both configurations according to your needs Data to resolve NIS client requests may reside on one or several local or remote databases By default the local database is searched first If a match to the request is not found one or more remote databases are searched The MachIen NIS client configuration provides for specifying the order in which databases are searched 8 1 NIS Basic Configuration Steps To enable NIS operations a system must be configured with the information to contact one or more NIS servers
276. make a c f g jn k M o exec name n q v compiler_switch Adir aOdir aldir Idir I Ldir unit_or_file_name cargs options bargs options largs options Here square brackets indicate optional components in the command and curly brackets indicate a construction that can occur zero or more times The only required argument is unit_or_file_name which specifies the compilation unit that is the main program There are two ways to specify this e By giving the lowercase name of the compilation unit gnatmake unit By giving the name of the source containing it gnatmake file adb All gnatmake output except when you specify is to stderr The output produced by the switch is send to stdout A2 60 Power Machren User s Guide A2 7 2 Switches for gnatmake You may specify any of the following switches to gnatmake a Consider all files in the make process even the GNAT internal system files for example the predefined Ada library files By default gnatmake does not check these files however if there is an installation problem it will be caught when gnatmake binds your program You may have to specify this switch if you are working on GNAT itself The vast majority of gnatmake users never need to specify this switch By default gnatmake a compiles all GNAT internal files with gcc c gnatg rather than gcc c c Compile only Do not perform
277. man All Rights Reserved last revised September 1996 The document serves as an introduction to some of the tools provided with the GNAT GNU Ada 95 compilation system This document does not replace gnatinfo txt the official GNAT user manual but rather selectively augments it with examples of tool use and some helpful hints All these tools have many more options and flags than we shall cover here please refer to gnatinfo txt for further details A1 1 Using gnatmake gnatmake is the GNAT tool that builds an executable program from a set of source files typically an Ada main program and a set of library units like packages gnatmake has many options including compiler binder and linker options to be passed through to those tools multidirectory compilation structures and the like Here we cover some of the most frequently used options Throughout our annotations and explanations are in the typeface you are reading Our command line input is shown like this sample command line and the output is shown like this sample output line A1 4 Power Machren User s Guide Consider a program test_factorial adb a source file containing one nested subprogram Factorial which recursively computes the factorial of its positive input argument We build an executable test_factorial with the command gnatmake v g gnatl test_factorial We have used the three options v verbose which traces the steps in the build process g incl
278. manner A2 8 3 Switches for gnatchop gnatchop recognizes the following switches k Limit generated filenames to eight characters This is useful if the resulting set of files is required to be interoperable with systems like MS DOS which limit the length of filenames Power Machren User s Guide A2 67 r Generate Source_Reference pragmas Use this switch if the output files are regarded as temporary and development is to be done in terms of the original unchopped file The r switch causes Source_Reference pragmas to be inserted into each of the generated files to refers back to the original filename and line number The result is that all error messages refer back to the original unchopped file In addition the debugging information placed into the object file when the g switch of gcc or gnatmake is specified also refers back to this original file so that tools like profilers and debuggers will give information in terms of the original unchopped file S Write a compilation script to standard output containing gcc commands to compile the generated files w Overwrite existing filenames Normally gnatchop regards it as a fatal error situation if there is already a file with the same name as a file it would otherwise output The w switch bypasses this check and any such existing files will be silently overwritten directory if specified gives the name of the directory to which the output files
279. map it to this creator and type binary After checking for AppleSingle and AppleDouble format and after looking at the data in the file if data is not text map it to this creator and type Power Machren User s Guide 141 The mapping algorithm to assign creators and types to files on Desktop NFS volumes follows 1 Does the file have a DOS extension and does this extension match any of the specified extensions If so use this extension s specified creator and type 2 Is the special case specification before set If so use the given creator and type 3 Does the file have an appropriate AppleDouble pair If so use the creator and type specified in the AppleDouble header within the AppleDouble file 4 Does the file have a valid AppleSingle header If so use the creator and type specified in the AppleSingle header 5 Does the file contain text a Is the special case specification text set If so use the given creator and type b Otherwise use the creator MUMM and the type TEXT 6 The file is a binary UNIX file a Is the special case specification binary set If so use its creator and type b Otherwise use the creator MUMM and the type BINA 142 Power Machren User s Guide Power Machren User s Guide 143 8 0 Configuring NIS Under Mach r en NIS Network Information Service formerly called Yellow Pages or YP is a client and server syste
280. matic power and elegance of UNIX and Mach Tenon s Mach technology is an extension to MacOS Using standard Macintosh shared libraries and code fragments Tenon s Mach extends MacOS to create a UNIX virtual machine The UNIX virtual machine UVM is implemented within the context of a standard Macintosh application program Therefore other existing Macintosh applications run in parallel with the UVM in a highly compatible fashion The UVM in turn implements a standard UNIX API POSIX for a large family of traditional UNIX commands and utilities The UVM also implements a fully pre emptive execution environment for its applications Since each UNIX application program is implemented as a Macintosh code fragment UNIX applications are essentially UNIX plug ins So MachIenis a highly portable UNIX virtual machine that implements its applications as UNIX plug ins running within a Macintosh application context Power Machren User s Guide 7 1 3 The Mach Architecture Figure 4 Mach System Architecture shows the basic system architecture Mach consists of a family of shared libraries Mach itself is a collection of shared libraries the traditional UNIX libraries libc libm etc are each a shared library and every UNIX application is also shared This organization takes advantage of the shared library dynamic linking and memory mapped file access features of the MacOS and maximizes memory savings as each softwa
281. ment tools and targets 240 CShrc file 72 76 cucommand 189 cylinder group defined 88 D daemons 46 cron 47 getty 24 httpd 25 47 173 inetd 24 47 lockd 132 Ipd 25 47 lwsrv 149 Mach table of 47 macmntd 47 mactcpd 47 mountd 47 125 named 47 171 NFS 24 nfsd 47 125 portmap 47 125 143 147 rc 47 routed 24 sendmail 24 47 syslogd 24 47 wind 25 47 69 ypbind 143 147 data files Mach 48 fork 139 databases etc rce 46 etc re conf 46 date amp time control panel 36 Debugger 248 debugging 231 Debugger 248 environment variables DEBUGGERFIRST 235 MEMSTATS 235 STACKCHK 235 gdb 231 Macintosh debuggers 248 MacsBug 232 248 Metrowerks debugger 233 default gateway 42 Desktop NFS 130 141 access permissions Make Changes 137 See Files 137 See Folders 137 privileges strategies for 138 AppleDouble file support 130 storing Mac files 139 AppleSingle file support 130 storing Mac files 139 authentication options 133 user ID and password on command line 135 username and password on command line 134 prompt 134 comparison with Apple File Sharing 139 creators and types 141 credentials of user 133 defined 130 DOS extensions 140 locked folders 138 Macintosh record locking 132 DeskWriter baud rates 152 dev ttya 186 dev ttyb 186 development tools 9 213 248 UNIX 1 X Windows 1 Dext resource 140 df command 23 dfork 111 dfork text 113 directory link counts 97 disabling AutoDoubler 16 logins 82 vi
282. ming Languages in the online Power Mach User s Guide The following section introduces the X environment under Mach It assumes a completed installation of Mach and the X Window software on your Macintosh The software installation instructions are in section 2 0 Installing MachIen An overview of the X Window software components appears in section 12 3 Mach X Window Software Overview 250 Power Mach User s Guide 12 1 The X Desktop The Mach X Window server runs entirely within a window in the Mache windows environment For those unfamiliar with this environment refer to section 4 2 Mach Windows When started the X server will create an X desktop similar in function to the Macintosh desktop on your display The X desktop will coexist with Mach terminal windows other Macintosh applications and your Macintosh desktop allowing you to conveniently switch among desktops and applications X applications that you run and display on your Macintosh will appear on the X desktop while Mach terminal and other Macintosh application windows will appear on the Macintosh desktop 12 1 1 Starting the X Server To launch the X server and create an X desktop type the lt Apple gt key and the letter T simultaneously lt Command T gt The X desktop appears below Figure 30 The X Desktop Power Machren User s Guide 251 The Mach wind 8 process MUST be running in order to start the X server Use
283. modified to accept Macintosh volume names for unmounting file systems To unmount the volumes mounted in the example above use umount External Disk umount Untitled floppy will not eject Power Machren User s Guide 109 6 6 4 Automatic Unmounting In MachIen Macintosh volumes will be automatically unmounted when the Finder is used to drag the disk to the Trash 6 6 5 Formatting Floppies In UNIX it is often desirable to write directly to a device disk without regard for file system structures Mach permits this type of raw access Under Mach you can format a floppy for use as a raw device If you do not give the floppy a Macintosh volume name the floppy will automatically be formatted as a raw device If Mach is the front application when you insert an unformatted floppy a dialog box will prompt you to supply a name simply choose Cancel If instead you name the floppy it will get a Macintosh volume name Beware that using a null name results in a floppy with for a Macintosh volume name Raw floppies are not seen by the Finder so no icon will appear on the Finder desktop Mach devices for accessing floppies are dev rfd0 and dev rfd1 to provide traditional raw access and dev fd0 and dev fd1 to buffer floppy accesses in 512 byte blocks You can determine what number device you have by experimenting with the eject command A Macintosh with a single floppy drive typically uses the fd1 rfd1 device
284. n As you work your screen can become cluttered with windows Changing a few of those windows into icons allows you to tidy up a cluttered workspace Icons are small graphical images Programs executing in a minimized window continue to execute until they finish or halt because they require input from you Step 1 Locate the Minimize Button Slide the mouse so that you position the pointer on the minimize button the small square to the immediate right of the title bar on the window frame as shown in Figure 38 The Title Bar Minimize Button Figure 38 The Title Bar Minimize Button Step 2 Press the Minimize Button Press the minimize button by clicking the select button The window changes into an icon olvwm displays icons in a row along the bottom of the root window starting on the left Figure 39 The OpenLook Icon Power MachrTen User s Guide 273 12 2 2 7 Moving an Icon To move an icon around the screen follow these steps 1 2 Point to the icon Press and hold the select button While still holding the select button drag the pointer An outline follows the pointer showing where the icon will be repositioned To position the icon release the mouse button 12 2 2 8 Restoring a Window from an Icon To restore an icon change it back into a window point to the icon and double click the select button i e press the button twice in rapid succession The icon changes back into the windo
285. n an FFS but they are not available for access by Macintosh applications 6 0 2 UNIX File System UFS The UNIX file system is implemented on top of the Macintosh hierarchical file system Mach imposes UNIX file system semantics on the Macintosh by mapping the UNIX file system requests onto the appropriate Macintosh File Manager routines UNIX files are stored alongside Macintosh files so there is no requirement to reformat partition existing HFS volumes 88 Power Machren User s Guide 6 1 UNIX Fast File System Overview Mach s FFS is derived from the Berkeley BSD UNIX high performance file system It is a simple and elegant file system that has its roots in the original UNIX file system developed at Bell Labs Detailed information may be found in two supplementary documents A Fast File System for UNIX and Fsck The UNIX File System Check Program These are located in the Documentation folder under MachTen UNIX Docs Sys Admin s Docs smm fastfs pdf and fsck pdf 6 1 1 File System Organization UNIX disks are divided into one or more partitions Each partition may contain one file system and a file system never spans multiple partitions Critical file system sizing parameters are stored in a super block which is replicated to protect against catastrophic loss The file system stores files Certain files are designated as directories that contain pointers to other files some of which may be other directory
286. n may build and run fine when filtering a single file but crash when filtering a large amount of files 242 Power Machren User s Guide 11 13 1 2 Allocating Memory in Mach Mach allocates memory for its constituent applications in two ways When an application is loaded into the system for the first time a Macintosh system module called the Code Fragment Manager CFM is used to load and manage application Code Fragments The CFM handles allocation of memory for new fragments relocation of internal software references within a fragment and dynamic linkage between different but related Code Fragments Secondary memory allocations occur when a running application requests memory which can obviously occur only after an application has been properly loaded by the CFM The CFM uses two areas of memory to store Code Fragments MachIen application memory Mach heap and system memory system heap Mach application data fragments are allocated from Mach application memory Mach application Code Fragments are allocated from system memory In addition if virtual memory has been enabled access to pages of code are managed on a demand paged basis so that only software that has been referenced is actually loaded into memory This facility is called Memory Mapped files Once an application is under execution the application may make subsequent requests for memory secondary memory allocations These requests are allocated from Macin
287. n the Mach control panel The name server may be a named running on your local machine or on another network host Mach will automatically create the etc resolv conf file when launched If you want the resolver to also query a backup name server simply edit the etc resolv conf file and add the name server address in the form shown above Power Machren User s Guide 173 10 5 Using Mach as a Web Server The Apache hypertext transfer protocol daemon httpd serves World Wide Web WWW documents from your Mach system The httpd daemon is pre configured for standalone operation with configuration files in etc httpd To turn your Macintosh into an internet WWW server simply type the following from the root account httpd To automatically start httpd during Mach boot up edit the etc rc conf file by changing the line START_httpd to START_httpd yes Then restart Mach For detailed documentation on Apache httpd as well as general information on creating Web documents refer to the online links in your default home page Your home page is available for viewing by your favorite Web browser such as Mosaic or Netscape at URL http localhost and for editing in the local file etc httpd htdocs MyHomePage html The BBEditLite text edit utility contains some useful extensions for expanding upon your default home page and for creating other documents in HyperText Markup Language HTML format for your Web server Refer to
288. n w Wide character encoding method e n h u s e Limit filenames to n 1 999 characters k krunch Output full source listing with embedded error messages A2 32 Power Machren User s Guide gnatmn Limit number of detected errors to n 1 999 gnatn Activate inlining across unit boundaries gnato Enable other checks not normally enabled by default including numeric overflow checking and access before elaboration checks gnatp Suppress all checks gnatq Don t quit try semantics even if parse errors gnatr Reference manual column layout required gnats Syntax check only gnatt Tree output file to be generated gnatu List units for this compilation gnatv Verbose mode Full error output with source lines to stdout gnatwm Warning mode m s e for suppress treat as error gnatzm Distribution stub generation m r s for receiver sender stubs gnat83 Enforce Ada 83 restrictions You may combine a sequence of GNAT switches into a single switch For example the specifying the switch gnatcfi3 is equivalent to specifying the following sequence of switches gnatc gnatf gnati3 A2 4 3 1 Error Message Control The standard default format for error messages is called brief format Brief format messages are written to stdout the standard output file and have the following form e adb 3 04 Incorrect spelling of keyword function e adb 4 20 should be is The f
289. nd at the same time let you tap into your multi vendor client server environment to run remote applications and to share resources across your corporate network and the Internet Mach includes a complete suite of C C Objective C Fortran Ada and Java development tools Mach can be used in combination with standard Macintosh editors and compilers to develop UNIX applications X applications and Macintosh applications or to develop hybrid Macintosh UNIX applications Mach s PowerPC compiler suite can be used to recompile existing UNIX applications or to develop new UNIX applications And the resultant applications can be turned into clickable Macintosh applications This unique toolset from Tenon gives developers the ability to create an application with a single source base not only for Power Macintoshes under a native Apple operating system but also for Silicon Graphics machines SUNs DEC or HP workstations Mach gives developers the freedom to take advantage of time tested UNIX development tools and to experiment with Java or Ada tasking without giving up the features of their favorite Macintosh editors Mach creates a new standard in PowerPC software development t UNIX isa registered trademark in the United States and other countries licensed exclusively through X Open Company Limited 2 Power Machren User s Guide MachIen s development environment includes the GNU compiler for Ada95 the first internationally s
290. nd ALI files in the current working directory Caution The object file can be redirected with the o switch however gcc and gnat1 have not been coordinated on this so the ALI file will not go to the right place Therefore you should avoid using the 0 switch The packages Ada System and Interfaces and their children make up the GNAT RTL together with the simple System I0 package used in the Hello World example The sources for these units are needed by the compiler and are kept together in one directory Not all of the bodies are needed but all of the sources are kept together anyway In a normal installation you need not specify these directory names when compiling or binding Either the environment variables or the built in defaults cause these files to be found Besides the assistance in using the RTL a major use of search paths is in compiling sources from multiple directories This can make development environments much more flexible A2 44 Power Machren User s Guide A2 4 5 Order of Compilation Issues If in our earlier example there were a spec for the hello procedure it would be contained in the file hello ads yet this file would not need to be explicitly compiled This is the result of the model we chose to implement library management Details of the model can be found in file gnote1 doc in the GNAT sources Some of the unexpected consequences of the model unexpected from the point o
291. nd during the production of the application will automatically produce PEF and XCOFF files The command gcc g o hello hello c will produce the PEF output file hello and the XCOFF output file named hello xcoff Note that the optimization flag 0 has been left out to avoid confusing matches between source code lines and the generated assembly code The Mach amp command gdb hello will start execution of the gdb application which will automatically search for both PEF and XCOFF files Once both files are found standard UNIX gdb commands may be given to set break points examine data and complete the debugging process Further information on the gdb application can be found in the gdb man page 232 Power Machren User s Guide 11 10 2 Macintosh Debugging Tools First determine that a debugger is not already installed on your system If the message Debugger Installed is printed when the system is booting it typically means that some form of debugger has already been installed on your system If you have a debugger investigate its origins and usage It is possible that it will provide the debugging support you need 11 10 2 1 MacsBug MacsBug is a Macintosh debugger that offers low level debugging support on Power Macintoshes MacsBug works with Mach providing assembly level debugging break points and PowerPC exception handling It interprets traceback data attached to each Mach generated subroutine sh
292. nd if 53 54 G GCD abs X abs Y 55 if Y gt 0 then 56 return Numerator gt X G Denominator gt Y G A1 12 STs 58 59 gt 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 Tne 13 74 Power Machren User s Guide else return Numerator gt X G Denominator gt Y G end if end Wes dyadic arithmetic operator function R1l Rational R2 Rational return Rational is Nt Integer D Positive begin N R1 Numerator R2 Denominator R2 Numerator R1l Denominator D R1 Denominator R2 Denominator return N D compiler will use Rational constructor here end end Rationals 74 lines No errors Similarly gnatmake invokes a compilation for Rationals IO gcc c g gnatl prog24 adb GNAT 3 05 960607 Copyright 1991 1996 Free Software Foundation Inc Compiling prog24 adb source file time stamp 1996 09 22 14 14 00 erer rre w N OW AANnA UO FBWNE with Ada Text_IO with Ada Integer_Text_I0 package body Rationals IO is Body of the input output child package for Rationals 1 Author Michael B Feldman The George Washington University Copyright 1996 Michael B Feldman All Rights Reserved Last Modified August 1996 input procedure procedure Get Item out Rational is Power Machren User s Guide A1 13 LS 16 Lle 18 19 20 2 22 23 24 29 26 27 28 29 30 31
293. nds running Running the program stack Examining the stack Power Machren User s Guide A1 21 data Examining data breakpoints Making program stop at certain points files Specifying and examining files status Status inquiries support Support facilities user defined User defined commands aliases Aliases of other commands obscure Obscure features internals Maintenance commands Type help followed by a class name for a list of commands in that class Type help followed by command name for full documentation Command name abbreviations are allowed if unambiguous A1 5 Using gnatf to get a cross reference Suppose we wish to know for a given program all its declarations and all the declarations it uses from the packages it WITHs and where which lines these are referenced Looking again at our rationals demonstration we type gnatf x6 prog25 adb gnatf stores the cross reference information in the file X ref so let s look at its contents Here we see the variables declared in Test_Rationals_1 and where in that program each is used line and character position within line cat X ref 5 prog25 adb 960922141401 test_rationals_1 procedure 4 11 a variable 13 3 prog25 adb 22 3 25 28 38 8 49 28 b variable 14 3 prog25 adb 23 3 28 28 38 12 c variable 15 3 prog25 adb 33 28 43 8 d variable 16 3 prog25 adb 35 28 43 12 e variable 17 3 prog25 adb 38 3 40
294. ne independent descriptions called Imakefiles of targets to be built with machine dependent sets of parameters The xmkmf script in usr X11 bin invokes imake to build the Makefile from an Imakefile 300 Power Machren User s Guide 1 Be sure that the CD ROM and Source_FFS are mounted 2 Create a working area for X11 development mkdir base macppc X11 cd base macppc X11 Indir base src X11 3 To build a single X client e g xlogo make the Makefile and executable cd base macppc src X11 R6 mit clients xlogo xmkmf make 4 To install the application s in usr X11 bin type make install 5 To install the application manual page s in usr X11 man mann type make install man 6 Ifyou chose to install the client s you may free up disk space by deleting the extra copy of the executable image s make clean To build the entire X client suite follow these additional steps 7 Make the master Makefile using the xmkmf utility cd base macppc X11 R6 mit clients xmkmf 8 Build the application Makefiles and executables make Makefiles make then follow steps 4 through 6 above Compiler warning messages are expected from some clients in the MIT distribution These warnings will not adversely affect the client s operation under Mach Power Machren User s Guide 301 12 3 3 1 Running X Client Applications The build process may be tested by executing an application program compiled and installed in the p
295. nges to a circle shape Clicking Double Clicking and Dragging The following terminology is used to refer to actions involving mouse buttons e Click means press and release a button without moving the pointer e Double click means click a button twice in rapid succession e Drag means press and hold a button while moving the pointer 12 2 2 3 Selecting a Window Before a window can receive input from you it must be selected as the active window To select a window point to any part of the window When a window is active the window frame changes appearance Now when you press on the keyboard and the pointer is in that window the characters appear on the command line in the active window There are two different models of handling the mouse focus The first Focus Follows Mouse is the default behavior This behavior can be toggled by selecting Focus from the OpenLook Workspace menu 268 Power Machren User s Guide Selecting this option changes the focus model to Click To Focus With this model you must position the mouse over the window and then click the select button the select button is your mouse button or the left button on a three button mouse to focus If no window is active everything you type will be lost 12 2 2 4 Moving a Window By using the pointer you can move a window to a new location on the screen To do so grab the window s title bar with the pointer dra
296. nny Smith Client Macintosh Client Macintosh Figure 26 Spooling Printer Output to UNIX Printers Using Iwsrv 9 5 1 Lwsrv Configuration Files lwsrv requires two types of configuration files A single file describes the fonts available in the printer being used The other files contain a QuickDraw to PostScript macro that this Macintosh user has on the client Macintoshes Granny Smith and Pippin in the above example Tenon supplies font files that will work for LaserWriter or LaserWriter Plus printers as well as a macro LaserPrep file that will work for Macintosh users that have installed version 5 2 or 7 0 of LaserPrep under MacOS System 6 MacOS System 7 or MacOS System 8 Power Machren User s Guide 159 9 5 1 1 Font Lists When a Macintosh wants to send printer output to a particular printer it first inquires about available printer fonts It uses this information to map its internal fonts to the fonts available on the printer If necessary it will download any additional fonts needed for the document being processed In order for lwsrv to work correctly lwsrv must know what fonts are available on the printer being used The Tenon supplied font files usr lib LWFonts and usr lib LWPlusFonts contain font lists for use with LaserWriter and LaserWriter Plus printers However in order to use printers other than a LaserWriter or LaserWriter Plus the list of fonts must be obtained and placed in a file for wsrv to read at startu
297. node numbers to find targets of hard links in this folder When the source of a hard link is moved to another volume the link will be unresolvable Even if the correct target of the link is copied from the source volume s hidden folder it will be assigned a new inode number and the source link will still be unresolvable In general unless an application requires specific semantics of hard links that are not also supplied by soft links soft links should be the preferred method of linking UFS files Power Machren User s Guide 97 6 4 3 Directory Link Counts The stat system call does not return the correct number of links for a directory The Macintosh File Manager does not keep a directory link count for Macintosh folders and Mach does not attempt to fabricate a correct directory link count for UNIX directories on local Macintosh file systems 6 4 4 Locked Files The Macintosh file system has the ability to lock individual files effectively making the file read only The UNIX file system has no notion of locking for individual files although it does support the locking of entire file systems by mounting them as read only If a UNIX application attempts to modify or remove a locked file Mach will return the error EROFS Although this error implies that the entire file system is read only it may be only the individual file that is locked In this case it is necessary to unlock the file use the Finder
298. non root user to change the owner of a file Attempting to do so will result in an error 7 4 5 AppleDouble Desktop NFS supports two formats for storing Macintosh files on NFS servers The default format is AppleSingle In this format each file contains an AppleSingle header a data fork and a resource fork AppleSingle files autonomously contain all of the necessary Macintosh information in a single file The other supported format is AppleDouble In this format the data fork of the Macintosh file is contained in one file while the AppleDouble header and the resource fork are contained in another file The name for the file containing the AppleDouble header and the resource fork is created by appending the percent character to the beginning of the original file s name The AppleDouble format provides convenient sharing of data between Macintosh applications and their counterparts that run on other platforms like IBM PCs or UNIX workstations It is necessary for the cross platform applications to share a common format for the data passed between platforms A Mach Desktop NFS client can simultaneously read files in both the AppleSingle or AppleDouble format To specify the format to be used when creating a file ona Desktop NFS volume use the double option when promoting the NFS volume to the desktop To use the AppleDouble format when creating files use dtmount o double SharedDisk To use the default AppleSingle f
299. ns must be built with Macintosh interface header definition files for data code typing and parameter access Mach includes Apple s C include files in the directory usr include MacOS A family of these files is also typically included with every native Macintosh development program under a headers directory hierarchy Access to these files by Mach development applications requires that these files have a Mach creator of MUMM and a TEXT type designation The simplest method of converting a family of header files is to select a whole directory and drag the group of files onto the Mach Unix lt gt Text application Drop the group on the application and let it change each of the files The Mach Unix lt gt Text application is contained in the Utilities directory of the Mach distribution Typically MPW and other development tools do not examine the creator or type of their constituent header or shared library interface files This means that it is possible to modify the creator and type of one copy of files and have them used by both Mach and traditional Macintosh development applications you want to create a pure Macintosh application that uses UNIX system calls or standard UNIX libraries please contact Tenon Licensing a standard library package from Tenon that you can incorporate into your Macintosh application will let you develop hybrid applications Power Machren User s Guide 237 11 11 2 Macintosh
300. nstallation disk a dialog box appears saying thata Check disk space requirements for your installation particular file cannot options be copied and should be removed from the hard disk Mach seems to slow down Type the command ps aux to observe what processes are running Use kill 1 to terminate unwanted processes Read section 2 1 Performance Tuning Optimizing Mach for system optimization hints If using Desktop NFS make sure Calculate Folder Sizes is turned off in the Views control panel You notice loss of data due to file truncation Due to Mach file caching Mach may not return an error when writing to a file system that is full Check the free space on your file system before continuing You experience a Mach must be restarted after a power failure power failure or irregular shutdown of Machren Traditional UNIX file systems are sensitive to power failures Use Fast File First Aid in the event of a power failure Causes a System bomb Launching Mach Open the MachTen Controls control panel Configure causes the Control and save the General Memory and Networking Panel Warning Dialog Box to appear 32 Power Mach en User s Guide Symptom Solution Launching Mach There may be a control panel or extension conflict Try temporarily disabling all extensions except the Mach extensions to determine whether or not you have a conflict
301. nstead of the shell specified in your etc passwd entry simply follow the window name with a command where command is any legal program name you must use the complete path name and any parameters When that terminal window opens it will run the command specified Note that the terminal window will close automatically when that command terminates Useful commands to use here are interactive programs such as usr bin rlogin lt hostname gt or usr bin vi lt filename gt See the wind 1 man page for details on tailoring your windrc environment Power Machren User s Guide 69 5 4 Tailoring Your UNIX Environment The user s environment includes the TERM TERMCAP and TTY environment variables set by the wind daemon It is important that these remain set to proper values otherwise undesirable functioning of the VT100 emulation within your terminal windows may result Under Mach login 1 creates a special variable called MACHTEN which indicates the Mach kernel version number To see your current environment type printenv A typical environment looks like this VIRTUAL_MEMORY false POSIX true HOME home root SHELL bin csh OGNAME root USER root PATH usr bin bin usr sbin sbin usr X11 bin usr libexec v ACHTEN 4 PWD var tmp EDITOR usr bin vi ISUAL usr bin vi XINIT set shell bin csh magic redraw ERM vt100 3 H lt E TERMCAP vt100 d
302. nt It is not necessary to use the window daemon since Mach also supports a simple console device However the added value of the window environment is almost always worth the extra memory it consumes Ipd Printing services are provided by lpd 8 Systems that do not require printing services need not run this daemon Mach will automatically start this daemon when a print command is invoked httpd Run only if providing a World Wide Web service 2 1 2 How Can You Tell When a System is Approaching Its Limits A system that is running near full memory capacity will begin to slow down Output to the console or any of the windows may be noticeably slower Programs that request more memory may fail or simply block and wait until memory is available The C shell will return Not enough memory when attempting to invoke a new program Remote machines which attempt to rcp 1 ftp 1 or telnet 1 to a loaded machine may see Protocol error server closed connection or bin csh No memory depending on how far the server side of the connection was able to progress before memory was exhausted 26 Power Machren User s Guide 2 2 Reinstallation Occasionally you may want to reinstall MachIen Your current system may become damaged or you may need to install a system upgrade Perform the following steps before reinstalling Mach 1 Preserve Personalized Files and Files That Have Been Changed e Crea
303. o J co 80 1i 24 c1l1 50 E H E 2J sf 2 ED le H bs am cm 5 E i d dH nd 2 E C up 2 E A ce 3 E K cd 50 E J so 2 E 7m se 2 E m u s 2 E 4m ue 2 E m md 2 E 1m mr 2 E 7m mb 2 E 5m me 2 E m is E 1 24r I 24 1H if usr share tabset vt100 rs E gt E 31L E 41 E 51 E 7h E 28h s E 1h E ke E 11 E gt ku EOA kd EOB kr EOC k1 EOD kb H ho k1 EOP k2 E0Q k3 EOR k4 EOS pt sr 2 EM v t 3 xn sc E7 rc E8 cs E i d dr TTY dev wina0 WIND_NAME Terminal 1 DISPLAY 0 E ry k H 70 Power Machren User s Guide To change the default editor from vi 1 to ex 1 under csh 1 for example type the following setenv EDITOR usr bin ex The environment default settings have been carefully chosen to minimize difficulties for users new to UNIX Be careful not to unwittingly change these parameters 5 5 Quitting Machren Selecting Quit from the File menu can be used to quit Mach without restarting the MacOS Mach can subsequently be launched again The command reboot will kill all of the UNIX processes and then quit Mach The q option to reboot will quit Mach immediately without attempting to kill the other UNIX processes To provide a degree of remote control via Mach to restart the MacOS use reboot with M halt behaves like reboot except that after killing the UNIX pro
304. o a good idea to quit other applications and increase the Macintosh s virtual memory A secondary memory allocation is a request by the running application to allocate memory This is typically achieved via the alloc and malloc family of library calls Secondary memory allocations are completely independent of the CFM memory allocations and can occur only after an application has been successfully loaded by the CFM Secondary memory allocations are allocated from Macintosh system memory When a secondary memory request fails an error code is returned to the application and the response to a user is application specific When a secondary request fails the system memory space is fully allocated Possible solutions include quitting any Macintosh applications that might also be using system memory closing any unused Finder windows or ultimately quitting Mach and reducing its heap allocation size Note that by reducing the size of the Mach heap the size of the allocatable system memory is increased so it is possible to iterate several times around increasing or decreasing the Mach heap size to best suit a particular system s memory profile 11 13 1 3 Calculating Memory Requirements The Code Fragment Loader loads the code or executable portion of Mach applications in the system heap and the data portion of Mach applications in the Mach heap Therefore a running Mach application consumes space in both
305. odification times The file s Macintosh last backed up time is used for the UNIX last accessed time When Mach modifies the time stamps of a Macintosh file the file s Macintosh creation time is set to the UNIX data modification time The file s Macintosh last backed up time is set to the UNIX last accessed time The file s Macintosh modification time is set to the UNIX attribute modification time File Time Stamps Macintosh UNIX file created data last modified file modified attributes last modified file backed up data last accessed Since most of the interaction between UNIX and Macintosh programs depends on only the modified time stamp the Mach interpretation of the Macintosh time stamps provides Mac UNIX interoperability For example changing a source file with a UNIX tool like vi results in a change to the file s modified time stamp A Macintosh application that subsequently accesses this file will notice the change in the modified time and will behave accordingly e g a Macintosh development tool will rebuild a project if the project depends on the modified source file In the reverse situation a Macintosh editor will also change the file s created and modified time stamps which will be interpreted by UNIX programs in the proper the data or attribute has been modified sense In some cases the Macintosh editor may only change the UNIX attribute modification time
306. olling startup and customization of UNIX Reads etc rc conf file created via Mach control panel and starts specified daemons inetd cron Controls incoming network connections for the following services ftp rsh rlogin rexec uucp tcptraffic pop finger tftp ntalk comsat name daytime time echo and discard Configured via etc inetd conf database Controls starting of services or system tasks Configured via usr bin crontab Ipd Controls printing Configured via etc printcap database nfsd mountd Control NFS service if system is exporting file system to portmap other network clients mountd uses etc exports database to control which file systems are exported mactcpd Replaces the Macintosh TCP service macmntd Senses removable disk insertion floppy CD ROM etc and automatically mounts the disk in volume sendmail Accepts e mail coming in from network connection Configured via etc sendmail cf and etc sendmail cw databases syslogd Logs system activities and errors Configured via etc syslog conf database named Provides name service Maps host names to Internet addresses and vice versa Configured via etc named boot database wind Controls the Mach windows environment after log in httpd Serves World Wide Web WWW documents to internet Web browsers 48 Power Mach en User s Guide Table 3 Mach Data Files etc ttys Controls logins on the UNIX sy
307. olumes A DTNFS mounted volume will advertise support for Macintosh record and file locking to Macintosh applications if a special option is provided in the mount command or in the etc fstab entry for the DTNFS file system With DINFS record locking enabled Macintosh applications that make use of record locking on AppleShare volumes will also support record locking on DTNFS volumes DTNFS record locking works in conjunction with a locking daemon running on the remote NFS server For Mach NFS servers the locking daemon is bwnfsd and the option flag supplied to mount or placed in etc fstab to enable locking is bw_lock mount t nfs o dtfst bw_lock rw soft omar space mnt For Sun NFS servers the locking daemon is lockd and the option flag supplied to mount is lockd mount t nfs o dtfst lockd rw soft omar space mnt The locking daemon must be running on the NFS server when the desktop NFS volume is mounted Under Mach the command usr sbin bwnfsd A starts the locking daemon Place this command in the file etc rc to automatically start the locking daemon on system startup Power Machren User s Guide 133 7 4 2 1 Bwnfsd UID and GID Mapping bwnfsd also provides a mapping between numeric user and group IDs to their corresponding symbolic names DTNFS uses this service of bwnfsd by default if it finds a running bwnfsd daemon on the NFS server It is not an error if a bwnfsd daemon is not found on the NFS server AND th
308. on 47 MacOS 6 11 rebooting 18 MacPerl 2 MacsBug 232 248 MacTCP applications 179 mactext 112 113 mail daemon 24 eletronic 180 incoming 39 47 program defined 181 examples 182 sending receiving 39 mailrc file example 181 make program 214 246 Makefiles 230 man pages 64 managing your system 84 86 119 manual startup of MachrIen 67 map control panel 36 mapping UIDs and GIDs via bwnfsd_ 133 maximum transmission unit settings 42 SLIP 203 memory allocating 9 36 242 243 245 configuration dynamic 7 screen 36 control panel 21 22 fragmentation 23 245 limitations 23 manager 9 mapped files 242 access 7 page boundary 245 physical 22 real programming issues 245 246 requirements 7 8 14 243 running out during compilation 246 sbrk 245 stack overrun 241 sticky bits 246 menu bar running X server without 255 shortcuts 255 X desktop 251 menus Apple 53 Edit 54 55 File 53 Fonts 61 Mach 52 Order 59 60 Positions 57 Size 58 Window 56 message of the day 48 changing 82 Metrowerks debugger 233 mkpef 229 modem connecting to Mach serial port 189 control translations 188 Motif Window Manager 260 mount command 124 example 127 MOUNT_REMOTE_FILES variable 66 128 mountd daemon 47 125 mounting Desktop NFS volumes 131 directories via NFS 124 FFS 117 1 12 file systems 117 MachIen CD ROM 30 Macintosh volumes 118 NFS clients 126 permissions 107 removable media 108 mouse button mapping 281 Logitech 283 t
309. on that may be useful in this process 6 9 3 Mounting File Systems File systems must be mounted before they may be accessed under Mach During startup the Mach kernel automatically mounts the root file system and the root folder of the Macintosh volume on which Mach resides The etc rc script optionally mounts file systems registered in etc fstab If Mach is not running on the boot volume the boot volume will be mounted on bootvol by the etc rc script 6 9 3 1 Mounting an FFS Within a File Use the following command to mount an FFS within a file sbin mount t ffs lt FSFile_pathname gt lt directory gt If the FFS resides on a different Macintosh volume refer to section 6 9 3 2 Mounting a Macintosh Volume 118 Power Machren User s Guide 6 9 3 2 Mounting a Macintosh Volume Use the following command to mount a Macintosh volume sbin mount lt Mac Volume gt lt directory gt 6 9 4 Unmounting File Systems Unmounting FFS and UFS file systems is done with the umount command Its argument may be a mount point path name an FFS file name or a Macintosh volume name Any argument that contains special characters such as a space should be inside double quotes sbin umount mnt sbin umount lt FSFile_pathname gt sbin umount dev sd lt P gt sbin umount lt Mac Volume gt 6 9 5 Removing File Systems When an FFS is no longer needed its space should be returned for other purposes
310. oning provided they have sufficient space to store the fast file system 6 3 1 FFS Within a File Macintosh files containing an FFS are treated as block devices by MachIen They are set with creator MUMM and type BLK These files are visible to Finder and may be moved or copied to other folders or volumes They may also be dragged to the Trash for removal Be sure that this is intended before requesting Empty Trash These files should never be selected for write access by other Macintosh applications Even minor changes by other Macintosh applications could render the fast file system file unusable by Machien See section 6 9 1 1 Creating an FFS Within a File 94 Power Machren User s Guide 6 4 Machren UFS MachIens implementation of the local UNIX file system UFS uses the Macintosh File Manager enabling Mach s UNIX files to be stored alongside Macintosh files However there are some constraints imposed by the Macintosh File Manager that the astute user should be aware of when porting other UNIX applications to Mach 6 4 1 File Names 6 4 1 1 Maximum Number of Characters The Macintosh File Manager allows a maximum of 31 characters in a file name hence Mach UFS file names are limited to 31 characters 6 4 1 2 Case Sensitive File Names Mach supports case sensitive file names by appending a four byte integer to the end of any case sensitive file name that collides with an existing case insensitiv
311. onjunction with the Mach control panel automatically sets up a table of host names and internet addresses in the file etc hosts If all of the appropriate information was available when you installed Mach and you are using a Domain Name Server the host table should be ready to go otherwise you may have to hand tailor this file as outlined in the following section The Name Server Operations Guide for BIND section included in the System Manager s Manual section on the Mach CD tells you how to set up a sub domain and how the name server works For asystem using a Domain Name Server the host table only needs the host name and internet address of your Domain Name Server and if you are connected to the internet via an IP gateway the name and internet address of the IP gateway If your environment does not support a name server you must make sure that your etc hosts table has all of the host names and corresponding internet addresses that you will need 10 4 1 Configuring Machren as a Domain Name Server If you want to configure one of your Mach systems to be a name server you need to compose data files that describe hosts in your domain and define domain name service parameters The Mach distribution contains example name server data files in the etc named directory If you are configuring the network software manually you may need to import a full host table from another established host on the network Over time th
312. onnection on a configured serial port Mach will start the login 1 program which prompts the remote host for a user name and password Login will consult the etc passwd see passwd 5 database file to authenticate the user If the user is authentic login will start up a special program to enable SLIP on the connection The Mach etc master passwd file contains a default account with no password for user S joe Sjoe 1000 10 Slip line from joe var tmp usr sbin sliplogin Modify this entry as necessary for your SLIP configuration Power Machren User s Guide 205 10 15 10 3 The Sliplogin Program sliplogin 8 in usr sbin is the program named in etc passwd to run after a remote login session is established over a potential SLIP line sliplogin effectively turns the terminal line into a SLIP link to the remote host To do this the program searches the file etc sliphome slip hosts for an entry matching the current login name Ifa matching entry is found the line is converted to SLIP line discipline that is 8 bit transparent I O and configured using information from the entry For example header compression is enabled or disabled for the SLIP connection at this time depending on the compress or autocomp fields in the entry sliplogin then runs a shell script to initialize the SLIP interface with the appropriate unit number local and remote IP address and netmask for the connection according to the parameters in e
313. ons 8 4 1 The Default etc nsswitch conf File The following is a copy of the default etc nsswitch conf file etc nsswitch conf An example Name Service Switch config file This file should be sorted with the most used services at the beginning The entry NOTFOUND return means that the search for an entry should stop if the search in the previous entry turned up nothing Note that if the search failed due to some other reason like no NIS server responding then the search continues with the next entry Legal entries are nisplus or nist Use NIS NIS version 3 nis or yp Use NIS NIS version 2 also called YP dns Use DNS Domain Name Service dbm Use DBM access files Use the local files NOTFOUND return Stop searching if not found so far passwd dbm files nisplus nis shadow files nisplus nis group files NOTFOUND return nisplus nis 146 Power Machren User s Guide hosts files dns NOTFOUND return nisplus nis services files NOTFOUND return nisplus networks files NOTFOUND return nisplus protocols files NOTFOUND return nisplus rpc files NOTFOUND return nisplus ethers nisplus NOTFOUND return files netmasks nisplus NOTFOUND return files bootparams nisplus NOTFOUND return files netgroup nisplus publickey nisplus automount files nisplus aliases files nisplus Lines in the etc nsswitch conf file that begin with a character designate comments which are ignore
314. ons Check this box to accept connection requests for internet network services When checked Mach will automatically start inetd the internet super server upon Mach launch inetd listens for connections on well known internet ports such as Telnet and FTP With inetd disabled connection requests for these services will be denied By default inetd is enabled Unlike sendmail inetd must be enabled to accept local loopback connections on the well known internet ports 40 Power Machren Users Guide 3 2 3 4 Internet IP Addresses The Networking Configuration screen is a convenient way to configure the primary interface on AppleTalk Ethernet and TokenRing for internet networking If you have multiple interfaces of the same type refer to section 10 0 Networking with Mach Also detailed are instructions on how to configure PPP or SLIP interfaces see the appropriate section 10 15 8 Using PPP or 10 15 9 Using SLIP Each configured interface described below must be assigned a unique internet address in standard internet dot decimal format The two letter description in parentheses is a short version of the interface name as used by Mach It is followed by a zero indicating the primary interface AppleTalk at0 If your Macintosh is connected to a LocalTalk network or your MacTCP control panel is configured for AppleTalk over Ethernet EtherTalk or for AppleTalk over TokenRing
315. ontrol panel and review your mouse tracking and double click rate The X server obeys the settings in this control panel and ignores requests from X clients to change mouse characteristics Mouse Mouse Tracking a OOCO 8OO Very Slow Slow Fast tOo e o Double Click Speed Figure 46 Mouse Control Panel Open your Keyboard control panel and review your keyboard repeat rate and delay if any The X server obeys the settings in this control panel and ignores requests from X clients to change keyboard repeat frequency Keyboard Key Repeat Rate Delay Until Repeat OOOO O O00 Slow Fast Off Long Short Keyboard Layout France SFU System 6 Figure 47 Keyboard Control Panel 298 Power Machren User s Guide If you have a Control Strip control panel select the Hide Control Strip option when running the X server _ gt Control Strip O Show Control Strip Hide Control Strip Figure 48 Control Strip Control Panel Open your MachTen Controls control panel When the Scheduling Priority slide bar is moved upward toward the Unix mark the X server will draw output faster to the screen When the slide bar is moved downward toward the Mac mark keyboard input and window manipulation re positioning re sizing etc response will be quicker The recommended slide bar setting that optimizes these potentially competing demands on the X server is shown below Al
316. onts Commands etc Terminal 1 MachtTen Controls Hide MachTen Hide Others Croot mumm 7 gt ps ax Scheduling PID TT STAT TIME COMMAND Priority Use the buttons to access Show All 0 kernel idle configuration screens 1 0 01 etc init xx 3 Excel 15 00 usr etc portmap z 33 00 usr etc macmntd Finder 39 01 usr etc inetd vir MachTen 51 116 usr etc wind Microsoft ord 705 bin csh csh File System 98 ps ax TeachtTent 7 0 root mumm 8 gt E unix chart aug 30 Wi Commercial Business M Engineering Technical 50 eo ee E EET Welcome to Unix a unique computer environment that will challenge you and enable you to use your creativity and intellect to yield very powerful results bin 162 items 55 MB in disk 23 4 MI E acp O awk D apply D basename ar D be 4 30 rr 20 Billions 10 0 1991 1992 1993 1994 1995 TENON INTERSYSTEMS y Figure 1 MachrTen on the Macintosh Desktop 4 Power Machren User s Guide 1 1 1 Machren Terminal Window Desktop Machievs terminal window desktop displays a customizable set of independent command windows Figure 2 Mach Terminal Window Desktop shows a Mach desktop display with multiple terminal windows on the Finder desktop If you login as root or mtuser with MachTen as the pa
317. oom box size box and close box The title bar of the active terminal window will be highlighted see Figure 19 Mach Windows Terminal 1 Zoom bow Close box Lets you enlarge or shrink a One way to close a window windowwaith one click Title bar Scroll bar Lets you scroll through your terminal window Title Size box The title of the window Lets you tailor the sige of a window exactly as youwant it Figure 19 Mach Windows Mach menus are located at the top of the screen and operate like traditional Macintosh menus Power Machren User s Guide 4 2 1 The Apple Menu The Apple menu gives you access to About MachTen About MachTen About MachTen Information on how to contact Tenon 4 2 2 The File Menu The File menu lets you create Mach windows and manipulate your window environment Create Window 3N Close Window Create Window Command N Create a new terminal window Close Window Command W Close the active terminal window Logout Command Z Quit windows and return to the login console Quit Command Q Quit Mach 54 Power Machren User s Guide 4 2 3 The Edit Menu The Edit menu gives you access to the Macintosh Clipboard Text can be selected by moving the mouse cursor to the start end of a selection and holding the button down while moving forward backward to the end point of your selection and then releasing the button Selec
318. oosers as an output device Once selected Macintosh application print operations automatically direct printer output to wsrv Any Macintosh application on a remote Macintosh can send printer output to an wsrv printer lwsrv in turn passes the printer output to Ipd and Ipd spools to the designated printer as per Chooser or the etc printcap entry ta Applications running on the same Macintosh as wsrv cannot send output to wsrv due to a lockout condition in the MacOS network software This is not a problem in environments with more than one Machren system since Macintosh applications can send their output to an wsrv on another machine for spooling As an example imagine four devices a Printer a Sun workstation that is the print spooler for the printer a Mach Macintosh and Macintoshes not running MachIen In this example the Printer and the Sun workstation are on Ethernet the Mach Macintosh is on both Ethernet and AppleTalk and the Macintosh clients are on AppleTalk The Macintosh user on Pippin wants to print to the Printer An wsrv daemon running on Max enables him to do this The printer will appear in the Choosers of Pippin and Granny Smith When Pippin and Granny Smith choose Printer and print printer output is sent from Pippin and Granny Smith to Printer via Max and lwsro 158 Power Machren User s Guide Unix Print Spooler Ethernet Server MachTen Macintosh AppleTalk Pippin Gra
319. opening closing moving and resizing windows It s the window manager that displays the three dimensional frame around each window Without a window manager your windows would not have borders and it would be difficult if not impossible to perform many simple window functions 12 2 2 1 Starting the Window Manager Your default client startup script xinitre in your home directory or usr X11 flib X11 xinit xinitrc launches the window manager when the X server is started In combination the X server your X applications and the window manager comprise the X desktop The resources for the xterm client govern the precise size and appearance of the terminal emulator window shown in the figures in this section Fim ie hire mets brits 2 Figure 34 The OpenLook Environment Power Machren User s Guide 267 12 2 2 2 Using the Mouse As you move the mouse on your X desktop the pointer on the screen moves correspondingly Whenever this section tells you to point to an item it simply means move the mouse until the pointer on your screen is positioned over the item Pointer Shapes The location of the pointer can cause the shape of the pointer to change For example when the pointer is directly over the root window the backdrop behind all windows the pointer has an arrow shape When you point to the inside of a terminal window the pointer changes to an I shape When you point to the corner of a window the pointer cha
320. options server dir mount_point where t type of mount type is nfs for NFS mounting r read only w read write o indicates that a list of options follows e g soft try once or hard keep trying server name of the server dir name of the exported directory mount_point client mount point Refer to the mount 8 manual page for more details Diskless clients can be configured so that directories that are needed all of the time are mounted automatically when the system is booted The command mount a will instruct mount to look in the etc fstab file for a list of the file systems to be mounted The syntax for entries in the fstab file is as follows server server_dir client_mount point type options freq pass where 128 Power Machren User s Guide server name of ther server server_dir the directory that the client wishes to mount client_mount point the directory that the client uses to access server_dir type nfs for remote NFS mount options mounting options freq 0 needs to be included but not used in Mach pass 0 needs to be included but not relevant to Mach As an example the entry omar space mnt nfs rw soft 0 0 describes the directory space on a remote host named omar and a mounting point on the local system of mnt The directory is an NFS directory When mounted the user will have read and write access to the directory mount will return an erro
321. or exclude declarations definitions and code which are or are not applicable to Mach ___MACHTEN _ defined in all Mach environments __MACHTEN_68K__ defined when developing for the Mach 68K environment __MACHTEN_PPC___ defined when developing for the MachIen PPC environment Definitions declarations and code specific to Mach should be enclosed as follows ifdef _ MACHTEN__ Code generic to any MachTen environment endif ifdef _ MACHTEN_68K__ 68K specific code endif ifdef _ MACHTEN_PPC__ PPC specific code endif Power Machren User s Guide 223 Similarly definitions declarations and code which Mach does not support should be enclosed as follows ifndef _ MACHTEN__ Code that is inappropriate for MachTen endif ifndef _ MACHTEN_68K__ Code that is inappropriate for the 68K endif ifndef _ MACHTEN_PPC__ Code that is inappropriate for the PPC endif 224 Power Machren User s Guide 11 6 Compiling Sources The GNU compiler tools are standard in Mach In general the process of creating an object file consists of preprocessing the source with cpp e performing macro substitutions e passing the output to the appropriate backend compiler engine which generates assembly code and e giving that to as which produces the machine object file in XCOFF format By default the output of each of these stages is written to a temporary disk file Executa
322. oration The call to __ada_hel1o is the call to the main program The list of unsigned constants gives the version number information Version numbers are computed by combining time stamps of a unit and all units on which it depends These values are used for implementation of the Version and Body_Version attributes Finally a set of comments gives full names of all the object files required to be linked for the Ada component of the program As seen in the previous example this list includes the files explicitly supplied and referenced by the user as well as implicitly referenced runtime unit files The directory names for the runtime units depend on the system configuration A2 5 2 Consistency Checking Modes As described in the previous section by default gnatbind checks that object files are consistent with one another and are consistent with any source files it can locate The following switches can be used to modify this behavior S Require source files to be present In this mode the binder insists on being able to locate all source files that are referenced and checks their consistency In normal mode if a source file cannot be located it is simply ignored If you specify the s switch a missing source file is an error X r X Exclude source files In this mode the binder only checks that ALI files are consistent with one another Source files are not accessed The binder runs faster in this mode and t
323. ories and files should be watched for growth tmp etc wtmp if created by the user var log syslog var adm messages var log messages The system administrator may need to create some directories that log administrative messages If administrative files do not already exist simply type touch lt filename gt to create and time stamp a zero length file 120 Power Machren User s Guide 6 9 7 Backing Up and Archiving File Systems Backing up and archiving are two methods of file system protection Backing up involves making a complete copy of a file system onto another hard disk or a removable medium such as tape Jaz Zip Bernoulli or Syquest Archiving usually involves storage of specific files on similar media as for backups or even Macintosh floppies Archiving may be done for preserving development milestones or for recapturing space consumed by large infrequently used files that can be restored when required Backups should be done on a regular basis to prevent loss due to disk failure or human error Archiving should be done as needed There are three programs that are useful for backing up and archiving tar 1 dump 1 and restore 8 tarmay be used to both write and read backups or archives It writes a portable structured image that is independent of the source file system dump and restore may be used for complete and incremental backups of FFS file systems They are file system structure dependent 6 9 7 1 T
324. ormat when creating files do not specify the double option Instead use dtmount SharedDisk 140 Power Machren User s Guide 7 4 6 DOS Extensions Desktop NFS maps files with DOS extensions trailers to configurable Macintosh creators and types These mappings are specified in the Dext resource in the Mach application This resource may be edited using ResEdit Dext has its own template with the following fields DOS Trailer DOS extension including the dot e g XLS Creator Macintosh creator e g XCEL Type Macintosh type e g XLS3 Some special cases can be specified in the Dext resource to specify default mappings for files with no DOS extension or DOS extensions that do not match any of the specified extensions before Before checking for AppleSingle or AppleDouble headers and before looking at data in the file map it to this creator and type This option is intended for use on NFS servers with slow access times and possibly hundreds of files in each directory e g an optical Juke Box In this case checking each file for AppleSingle Double headers or checking to see if it contains text may take a long time Setting the before special case prevents such checking and immediately assigns a default creator and type to the file text After checking for AppleSingle and AppleDouble format and after looking at the data in the file if data is text
325. ormation settings that affect Mach memory utilization and addressing and server information if participating on a network The configuration screens are activated by clicking on the appropriate button in the main control panel Each screen contains edit fields and check boxes for specifying configuration values The Default button in each configuration screen will reset the entries in the screen to installation default values After entering your configuration values click on the Save button to confirm your entry or on the Cancel button to leave the values unchanged Changed values will automatically take effect the next time you start Machien Power Mach User s Guide 35 3 2 1 General Configuration Screen General Configuration Host Name Time Zone US Pacific w Cancel Figure 11 General Configuration Screen 3 2 1 1 Host Name The host name is the name given to your Macintosh The host name entered will be used in conjunction with addressing information from the Networking Configuration screen described in section 3 2 3 Networking Configuration Screen to uniquely identify your system on an internet network The default host name will be taken from the Macintosh Name field in the Network Identity section of the Sharing Setup control panel Under Machien blanks and special characters other than periods and underscores are not allowed in a host name Special characters found
326. ort Power Machren User s Guide 151 9 2 1 Printing Text Files to a PostScript LaserWriter on AppleTalk To use a LaserWriter on AppleTalk simply select the printer by using the Chooser Then use the p 1 command as follows lp lt file_name gt Ip is a Mach shell script which invokes pstext 1 generating formattedPostScript output from the text file The PostScript output is then queued to the spooling area by lpr where Ipd spools the file to the LaserWriter on your AppleTalk network selected by the Chooser This is the default configuration for Mach If you are not already running Ipd lp will start it for you Ip will accept pstext options allowing you to control the output format with respect to orientation headers fonts etc 9 2 2 Printing to an ImageWriter or a DeskWriter UNIX files can be printed to an attached ImageWriter or DeskWriter using the UNIX pr 1 command by utilizing the printer s ASCII text printing capability 1 To print to a locally connected ImageWriter or DeskWriter perform the following steps For an ImageWriter Edit the etc printcap file and uncomment remove the pound marks from the beginning of each line for the ImageWriter entry The uncommented entry should look like this iw lp ImageWriter ImageWriter II MF br 9600 fs 06320 lp dev ttyfa sd var spool iw tr f of usr lib 1pf af var spool iw acct lf var spool iw errs 152 For a DeskWrit
327. ory contains the data files that compose the online electronic documentation This documentation includes an electronic Mach User s Guide UNIX User Programmer and System Administrator documents GNAT documentation in PostScript for the Mach Ada environment and an Objective C overview Utilities Contains an index html file which is meant to be viewed with an internet browser The index file contains information about four sub folders Debuggers Development Utilities Text Utilities and Fast File Utilities The index file describes the contents of each of the sub folders and their use within the Mach environment index html This HTML file provides an overview of the contents of the Utilities folder Debuggers Contains Apple s MacsBug Macintosh Debugger and information on obtaining The Debugger also known as Jasik Development Utilities Contains the Ada 95 Mac Application Framework AMAF libraries and include files from Essential Tools and Objects ETO 22 and Apple s resource editor ResEdit Text Utilities Contains the Alphat Adobe Acrobat and BBEditLite text editing and presentation applications It also contains Unix lt gt Text an application for converting the end of line characters in a text file between standard Macintosh and UNIX conventions t Alpha is shareware and is not registered If you use Alpha please register it Power Machren User s Guide 13 Fast File Utilities Contain
328. ounts default to a UNIX terminal window environment The mtnext account defaults to a high performance X desktop using the AfterStep window manager In the example in Figure 17 Mach Login Console fred is the host name that was entered into the control panel when Mach was installed Log in as root by typing root followed by a carriage return and then typing the password MachTen Observe what happens Be careful to use lowercase Unlike the Macintosh Mach is case sensitive If you make a mistake you can use the Delete key to correct your error When root logs in the console window is automatically closed and a Mach terminal window is opened see Figure 18 Mach Terminal Window After logging in you will enter a windows environment controlled by the wind 8 program Mach windows let you create multiple windows each representing a UNIX shell the UNIX command interpreter When you type commands in a MachIen terminal window you are communicating with the shell Mach provides the Bourne shell sh 1 the default the C shell csh 1 bash 1 and tcsh 1 Mach windows are described in detail in section 4 2 Mache Windows Once you log in you should immediately invoke the passwd 1 program and create a password for the root login This is done by typing the following passwd New password lt new_root_password gt Retype new password lt new_root_password gt For mo
329. ource usr bin sbin nologin uucp 4 4 UNIX to UNIX Copy var spool uucppublic usr lib uucp uucico news 6 8 Network News var spool news sbin nologin games 7 13 Games pseudo user var spool news sbin nologin mta 10 10 Post Office MTA tmp sbin nologin mtuser 100 20 mtuser home mtuser bin csh Figure 21 The etc passwd File 5 6 8 The Group File The etc group file is used to organize users into groups in order to control system access and authorizations Groups are defined by entries in the etc group file Each entry has the following fields name encrypted password numeric group ID authorized users separated by commas with no spaces The fields are separated by colons The authorized user list is optional It provides a way for users to belong to multiple groups If the encrypted password is an asterisk there is no password for that group Figure 22 The etc group File shows how the etc group file looks when Mach is first installed This is the file used to designate group affiliations Power Machren User s Guide 79 The first line in the etc group file is the wheel entry for people with total access to system resources or root privileges the big wheels Only users listed in the wheel group are allowed to become superuser with the su 8 command You may want to establish separate logins for members of a project team and give all members access to the project files An ent
330. ower Mach en User s Guide 0 INTERSYSTEMS New Dimensions in Personal Workstation Technology 1123 Chapala Street Santa Barbara CA 93101 TEL 805 963 6983 FAX 805 962 8202 1 800 6 MACH 10 info tenon com http www tenon com Copyright 1998 Tenon Intersystems All Rights Reserved Printed in USA Tenon Mach Power Mach and the Tenon logo are trademarks of Tenon Intersystems X Window System and X11 are registered trademarks of MIT Apple Macintosh and Power Macintosh are registered trademarks and Finder is a trademark of Apple Computer Inc UNIX is a registered trademark in the United States and other countries licensed exclusively through X Open Company limited All other product names are trademarks of their respective holders 09 98 Power Machren Users Guide TABLE OF CONTENTS 1 0 Power Machren UNIX on the Macintosh 2 0 Desktop 1 1 The Mach Desktop 1 1 1 Mach Terminal Window Desktop 1 2 The Mach UNIX Virtual Machine 13 The Mach Architecture 1 3 1 1 3 2 1 3 3 1 3 4 1 3 5 Dynamic Memory Configuration Dynamically Linked Shared Libraries Memory Mapped File Access Integrated Software Development Tools Native Fast File System Installing Macht 2 1 Performance Tuning Optimizing Mach 2 1 1 2 1 2 System Optimization Guidelines How Can You Tell When a System is Approaching Its Limits 2 2 Reinstallation 2 2 1 22 2 Reconfiguration 2 2 1
331. owing routine name and parameter information If you do not already have a debugger installed it is recommended that you install MacsBug in your System Folder It is located in Utilities Development Utilities Debuggers MacsBug on the Mach CD ROM It will provide you with a backup if one of your applications crashes By using MacsBug you can display memory as PowerPC assembler code use the command ilp lt addr gt You can set a break point with the command brp lt addr gt The g command is used to resume execution of the application The s and so commands are used to single step and single step over steps over subroutine calls By using the CFM command in MacsBug when the application is executing the absolute addresses for both data and text areas are available The sum of the database address from the MacsBug CFM command and the offset information from the nm command provide an absolute memory location for a variable f ftp ftp support apple com pub apple_sw_updates us mac utils Power Machren User s Guide 233 11 10 2 2 Macintosh Debugger for PowerPC The Macintosh Debugger for PowerPC is Apple s symbolic debugging tool for Power Macintosh Version 2 0 d3 works in a single headed mode which eliminates the requirement of needing two Macintoshes to debug PPC applications This version of the debugger consumes approximately 5MB of RAM Apple s documentation describes
332. ows Command R Make the current rear window furthest from the front on the desktop the front active window and make the active window the second window 60 Save Scrolled Lines Don t Save Scrolled Lines Power Machren User s Guide If Save Scrolled Lines is selected for a given window the lines scrolled off the top of the window will be saved and the scroll bar will be activated The window will stay in this state until Don t Save Scrolled Lines is selected These two commands share one line in the Window menu when Save Scrolled is enabled the menu says Don t Save and vice versa Remove Scrolled Lines If Save Scrolled is enabled this will throw away any saved lines Save Window Environment Send Window Size Command S Save a description of the sizes and locations of the current Mach windows environment to a named file Font types and sizes are also saved This file is suitable to become the MachIen window environment startup file Provide the string stty rows n columns m as input to the current active window where n is the number of rows that will fit in that window using the current font type and size and m is the number of columns This is useful when accessing network based UNIX systems that want to know the size of the terminal An example would be using telnet to access a Sun workstation and trying to run a s
333. p time One way of doing this is to use the Apple LaserWriter font utility which is on the System Software disk A second way is to run lwsrv in trace mode using the t option see the wsrv 8 man page The data obtained must be edited to be in a usable form known as a font dictionary Under the newer LaserPrep the font list is encapsulated in a query that can be retrieved by running wsrv with tracing on The appropriate code is framed with a BeginFontListQuery EndFontListQuery pair and the last item is indicated with a 9 5 1 2 PostScript Macros A second configuration file used by lwsrv describes the mapping of QuickDraw commands to PostScript commands Similar to the process with fonts these macros are downloaded to the printer if they are not in the printer prior to printing a document The macro files are contained in the directory usr lib adicts Each file contains what Apple calls an AppleDict The AppleDict is really known as a Procedure Set ProcSet under the PostScript document structure conventions 160 Power Machren User s Guide 9 5 2 Enabling Ilwsrv To set up the Mach spooling system to act as a LaserWriter emulator for remote Macintosh applications perform the following steps 1 Configure your printer following the instructions in sections 9 2 Local Printing or 9 3 Remote Printing t The etc printcap entry used by wsrv must have an explicit printer desi
334. packets arrive at the router from either Mach TCP IP or OpenTransport TCP IP it will take care of routing them back to the appropriate stack on your machine Power Machren User s Guide 179 10 7 2 2 Using a Macintosh DNS Server on MachTen If you use a Macintosh DNS server that uses OpenTransport it will not be directly accessible to MachIen Aside from the more elaborate router solution presented in section 10 7 2 1 Routing Between Mach and OpenTransport a simple solution is to configure Mach to do DNS lookups through another DNS server perhaps a local ISP s This remote DNS server will talk to your local OpenTransport based DNS and will automatically pass the results back to Mach Since the other DNS server is outside of the local machine it solves the problem by being able to talk to both TCP IP addresses If you run no Macintosh TCP applications on your MachIen machine other than a DNS server you may alternatively enable BIND DNS under Mach and eliminate the Macintosh DNS server The DNS server Mach queries to resolve domain names can be configured in the Mach Preferences Enter the IP address of the alternate server in the DNS IP Address field and Mach will automatically start requesting DNS information from that IP address If you enable BIND DNS under Mach duplicate the IP address of the Mach TCP IP in the DNS IP Address field 180 Power Machren User s Guide 10 8 Using Mach a
335. pe TEXT with cr character line termination to a standard UNIX text file MUMM BINA with n1 character line termination The resultant file will not be accessible by Macintosh word processors This command is useful when copying a Macintosh text file to a remote non Mach UNIX system for access by the remote system 6 8 1 3 Unix lt gt Text The Unix lt gt Textapplication performs the functions of mactext and unixtext using a Macintosh user interface You can use the Finder to drag MUMM BINA files on top of the Unix lt gt Text icon to create Mach common text format files or to convert Macintosh text files to MUMM BINA files Unix lt gt Text only works on Macintosh files that have been saved in Text Only mode In most applications this is done by choosing Save As from the File menu 6 8 1 4 dfork text Mach provides the UNIX utility program dfork text 1 to extract the data fork from its standard input typically a Macintosh text file translate the cr character to n1 and produce the results on its standard output This utility is useful if you want to leave an original Macintosh file untouched and make a copy of its text for access by some UNIX utilities For example to search for a specific word in a Macintosh text file using the UNIX utility grep 1 try dfork text lt Macintosh file gt grep lt pattern gt 114 Power Machren User s Guide 6 8
336. pecifying the gnatn switch causes additional compilation dependencies Consider the following package R is procedure Q pragma Inline Q end R package body R is end with R R procedure Main is begi R end n Q ain With the default behavior no gnatn switch specified the compilation of the Main procedure depends only on its own source main adb and the spec of the package in file r ads This means that editing the body of R does not require recompiling Main On the other hand the call R Q is not inlined under these circumstances If the gnatn switch is present when Main is compiled the call will be inlined if the body of Q is small enough but now Main depends on the body of R in r adb as well as the spec This means that if the body is edited the main program must be recompiled Note that this extra dependency occurs whether or not the call is in fact inlined by gcc Note The gcc switch fno inline can be used to prevent all inlining This switch overrides all other conditions and ensures that no inlining occurs The extra dependencies resulting from gnatn will still be active even if the fno inline switch is used Power Machren User s Guide B 1 APPENDIX B Resources Machren Application The Mach application includes several resources that define important configuration values and options The resources listed
337. pression to target type numerator denominator Used to represent internal real literals that have no exact representation in base 2 16 for example the result of compile time evaluation of the expression 1 0 27 0 x X xm xX Power Machren User s Guide A2 43 A2 4 4 Search Paths and the Run Time Library RTL With the GNAT source based library system the compiler must be able to find source files for units that are needed by the unit being compiled Search paths are used to guide this process The compiler compiles one source file whose name must be given explicitly on the command line In other words no searching is done for this file To find all other source files that are needed the most common being the specs of units the compiler looks in the following directories in the following order 1 The directory containing the source file of the main unit being compiled the filename on the command line 2 Each directory named by an I switch given on the gcc command line in the order given 3 Each of the directories listed in the value of the ADA_SOURCE_PATH environment variable Construct this value exactly as the PATH environment variable a list of directory names separated by colons 4 The default location for the GNAT Run Time Library RTL source files This is determined at the time GNAT is built and installed on your system The compiler outputs its object files a
338. r s Guide See section A2 3 2 Foreign Language Representation for full details on the implementation of these character sets gnatje Specify the method of encoding for wide characters e is one of the following n No wide characters allowed default setting h Hex encoding u Upper half encoding s Shift JIS encoding e EUC encoding A2 4 3 9 File Naming Control gnatkn Activates filename krunching 1 a decimal integer in the range 1 999 indicates the maximum allowable length of a filename not including the ads or adb extension The default is not to enable filename krunching For the source file naming rules see section A2 3 3 File Naming Rules A2 4 3 10 Subprogram inlining Control gnatn GNAT recognizes and processes Inline pragmas However for the inlining to actually occur optimization must be enabled To enable inlining across unit boundaries this is inlining a call in one unit of a subprogram declared in a with ed unit you must also specify this switch n suggests the first syllable of the word inline In the absence of the gnatn switch GNAT does not attempt inlining across units and does not need to access the bodies of subprograms for which pragma Inline is specified if they are not in the current unit If you specify gnatn the compiler will access these bodies creating an extra source dependency for the resulting
339. r s Guide 241 11 13 Porting Software to Machren Where possible every effort has been made in Mach to provide as complete a BSD UNIX environment as possible However due to the lack of memory protection in MacOS Mach is a real memory implementation of UNIX Therefore Mach cannot possibly mimic all of the features of virtual memory Most applications are oblivious to the subtle differences between running under virtual memory or real memory These differences are documented here so that the programs that do depend on virtual memory can be easily diagnosed as such and modified to run under Mach 11 13 1 Real Memory Issues 11 13 1 1 Stack Overrun Mach starts each process with a fixed size stack If a subroutine defines large amounts of storage on the stack automatic data in C this could cause stack overrun which will almost assuredly cause the system to crash Alternatives for large automatic variables are to redefine them as static or to allocate them with malloc or alloca The default process stack size is 36K bytes A larger process stack size may be specified using the setstackspace utility A larger stack may also be specified when a program is built with the X1 stack loader option see section 11 7 Linking Executables Stack overrun is probably the number one real memory issue and should be investigated first when a program is sporadically failing within MachIen For example an applicatio
340. r if the server is not responding At boot time Mach will automatically mount the file systems listed in etc fstab if the MOUNT_REMOTE_FILES variable is set in the file etc rc conf This file is used by etc rc at startup see rc 8 7 3 3 Set Up Summary Note that only the NFS server needs to have the NFS daemons running The server needs an etc exports file and the client needs to either explicitly mount file systems delineated in the exports file or have the system set up for automatic mounting by using etc fstab Power Machren User s Guide 129 Configure Mach as an NFS server and client by following these steps 1 Find out the host names and IP addresses of the machines that will act as NFS servers on your network You can configure a Mach host as an NFS server or use an existing NFS server on your network a Sun workstation for example Find out the host names and IP addresses of machines on your network that will receive NFS service Unless you have an internet domain name server on your network the server needs to have all of its clients listed in its etc hosts file Likewise each client needs to have the address of its NFS server listed in its etc hosts file unless the name server is in use Become superuser so that you can edit the etc exports and the etc fstab files Edit the etc exports file on the server so that it includes each directory and file that will need to be exported to clients Make sure
341. r anywhere in the command line and single letter switches may be combined into a single switch Power Machren User s Guide A2 55 gnatbind n math ali dbase ali o ada control c The main program is in a language other than Ada but calls to subprograms in packages Math and Dbase appear This call to gnatbind generates the file ada control c containing the adainit and adafinal routines to be called before and after accessing the Ada subprograms A2 56 Power Machren User s Guide A2 6 0 Linking Ada Programs Using gnatlink This chapter discusses gnatlink a utility program used to link Ada programs and build an executable file This program is basically a simple process which invokes the Unix linker via the gcc command with a correct list of object files and library references gnatlink automatically determines the list of files and references for the Ada part of a program It uses the binder file generated by the binder to determine this list A2 6 1 Running gnatlink The form of the gnatlink command is gnatlink switches mainprog ali non Ada objects linker options mainprog ali references the ALI file of the main program The ali extension of this file can be omitted From this reference gnatlink locates the corresponding binder file b_mainprog c and using the information in this file along with the list of non Ada objects and linker options constructs a Unix linker command file to create the e
342. r arguments Without bargs gnatmake uses gnatbind unit ali to bind Otherwise gnatmake uses gnatbind b_opts unit ali b_optsis akin to c_opts but is obtained from bargs switches largs options Similar to bargs but specifies the options for gnatlink Note that you are not allowed to use the o switch within a lLargs Use the 0 switch directly to gnatmake to give a specific name to your executable A2 7 3 Notes on the Command Line Please note the following with regard to gnatmake If you enter gnatmake file adb where file adb is a subunit or body of a generic unit gnatmake recompiles file adb because it finds no ALI and stops issuing a warning gnatmake does not examine o files only ALI files Deleting 0 files will not force a recompile You can force everything to be recompiled either by deleting the ALI files or by using the f switch If gnatmake finds no ALI files it recompiles the main program and all other units required by the main program Thus gnatmake can be used for the initial compile as well as during the re edit development cycle Power Machren User s Guide A2 63 A2 7 4 How gnatmake Works Generally gnatmake automatically performs all necessary recompilations and you don t need to worry about how it works However it may be useful to have some basic understanding of the gnatmake approach and in particular to understand how it uses
343. r message No code generated for unit xxx in file yyy The basic command for compiling a file containing an Ada unit is gcc c switches filename where filename is the name of the Ada file having an extension ads for a spec or adb for a body You specify the c switch to tell gcc to compile but not link the file The result of a successful compilation is an object file which has the same Power Machren User s Guide A2 29 name as the source file but an extension of o and an Ada Library Information ALD file which also has the same name as the source file but with ali as the extension GNAT creates these two output files in the current directory but you may specify a source file in any directory using an absolute or relative path specification containing the directory information switches consist of standard gcc switches as documented in the gcc manual as well as GNAT specific switches which always start with gnat You may specify these switches in any order and in particular may mix gcc and GNAT switches freely gcc is actually a driver program that looks at the extensions of the file arguments and loads the appropriate compiler For example the GNU C compiler is cc1 and the Ada compiler is gnat1 These programs are in directories known to the driver program in some configurations via environment variables you set but need not be in your path The gcc driver also calls
344. r series communication utilities The r series utilities provide a simple way for Berkeley UNIX systems to communicate The premise is that users in an environment with multiple Berkeley UNIX systems may want a simple low overhead way to share programs and files Each Berkeley system has an etc hosts equiv file which contains a list of hosts that have permission to remotely log in to your host This provides a way for others that you trust or that may have accounts on your system to log in across the network without having to face a password challenge each time they need to access your machine If you have an account steve on hostA and an account steve on hostB you can simply type rlogin hostB and hostB will recognize you as steve You can read your mail compile a program or do anything you have permission to do on host B and when you are finished simply type exit Likewise rcp hostB lt filename gt lt filename gt will copy a file from hostB to your hostA You can look up each command rlogin 1 rep 1 rsh 1 using the online man pages These Berkeley protocols are more streamlined than the internet protocols but bear in mind that the internet protocols work across a wide range of heterogeneous systems 186 Power Machren User s Guide 10 15 Using Serial Line Communications There are two serial ports on the back of a Macintosh These ports can be connected to ASC
345. r subunits e Acompilation unit that is with ed within a specification but is used only by the body or a subunit x2 Issues warnings on unused entities that is entities that are declared but never used Note that no warnings are issued for unreferenced entities such as the following e Record fields since they could be referenced indirectly by an aggregate e Enumeration entities since they could be referenced indirectly by enumeration ranges for i in Color First Color Last e Loop parameters for L in T mar 80 loop Put x end loop x 345 Generate cross reference information The x3 switch gives the most succinct cross referencing information x5 the most comprehensive The x 4 switch gives more information than x3 but not as much as x5 The information given by switches x3 and x4 is used in the smart recompilation system currently under development The x5 switch lists all entities defined or used in the analyzed compilation units It gives the source location of their definition and all their uses in the analyzed units A2 72 Power Machren User s Guide tago The cross reference output is the same as with x5 except that with x6 all cross reference information is stored in the single file X ref and the entity kind of each cross referenced entity is also given A2 9 5 Cross Reference Information and Smart R
346. ram exits This is done by zeroing the entire stack prior to executing the program and scanning for the highest non zero stack entry when the program quits Note that stacks grow downward from a high address to a low address 11 10 3 3 MEMSTATS When set the environment variable MEMSTATS causes Mach to report memory usage statistics when a program exits The report includes the maximum amount of memory allocated and the number of buckets in use and available A bucket is simply a buffer whose size is a power of 2 The report also tallies the number of calls to malloc free realloc alloca and the sbrk and sfree system calls This information may help to identify inefficient memory usage 236 Power Machren User s Guide 11 11 Making Macintosh Applications One of the benefits of producing PEF formatted binary images is that the Mache software development tools may be used to produce Apple standard application programs To develop Macintosh applications the software must use standard Apple interface libraries and Apple standard interface header definition files It must also specify a Macintosh specific startup routine providing for proper startup data definition and proper program exit and follow Apple system programming rules e g WaitNextEvent MoreMasters etc In addition the software must not make UNIX system calls or calls to UNIX libraries 11 11 1 Macintosh OS Header Definition Files Macintosh applicatio
347. ration order dependencies tor Specify directory to be searched for source and ALI files Sat Output chosen elaboration order zmn Limit number of detected errors to n 1 999 ani No main program o file Name the output file default is b_xxx c s Require all source files to be present t Ignore time stamp errors v Verbose mode Write error messages header summary output to stdout wx Warning mode x s e for suppress treat as error x Exclude source files check object consistency only You may obtain this listing by running the program gnatbind with no arguments Power Machren User s Guide A2 53 A2 5 7 Command Line Access The package Ada Command_Line provides access to the command line arguments and program name In order for this interface to operate correctly the two variables int gnat_argc char gnat_argv are declared in one of the GNAT library routines These variables must be set from the actual argc and argv values passed to the main program With no n switch present gnatbind generates the C main program to automatically set these variables If the n switch is used there is no automatic way to set these variables If they are not set the procedures in Ada Command_Line will not be available and any attempt to use them will raise Constraint_Error If command line access is required your main program must set gnat_argcand gnat_argv from the argc and ar
348. rce directory is base src and is mounted automatically when Mach starts up see section 2 2 2 Accessing Mach Sources from the CD ROM Other directories in base are named after target system architectures e g vase macppc represents the Power Macintosh The convention is that object files and executables are built in the target directories while the source directory remains pure The BSD and GNU source trees use different make programs which have a slightly different Makefile syntax Rather than force one camp into the other Mach provides both make programs One key difference is that BSD Makefiles reside in the source directory while GNU Makefiles are created in the object directory by a configuration script The BSD source directories point to the target object directory with a symbolic link named obj The obj symbolic link refers to var obj which is a symbolic link to the desired target directory in base This allows for a quick change between target architectures but also requires you to be conscious of which target is currently selected The GNU Makefiles use the VPATH variable to point back to the source directory When porting or developing new UNIX programs for MachIen we recommend that you mimic this file system organization Following this model may actually ease the job of porting software to the Mach system These strategies make good use of the provided BSD master Makefiles in usr share mk and ease both
349. re component is loaded into memory only once Tenon s native fast file system FFS gives the Mach development tools access to UNIX level performance and features 1 3 1 Dynamic Memory Configuration Mach dynamically scales its memory requirements while the system is running As more applications are initiated the system brings in the necessary support so that the memory consumption grows as user requirements demand This memory configuration occurs along two axes first the system adjusts its memory data tables as each new application is initiated with more applications requiring more memory second the system configures itself functionally with each new application potentially requiring system components to be brought into memory This continuous reconfiguration results in improved utilization of memory and processor resources 1 3 2 Dynamically Linked Shared Libraries The PowerPC Executable Format PEF is based on the concept of dynamically loadable shared libraries In this architecture software is composed of a private space and calls to shared libraries When an application is created a definition library is used to satisfy compiler header call definition requirements When an application is executed a run time version of the library is used to satisfy library calls If that library has already been loaded into memory access is obtained to the run time library through a dynamic linkage process Otherwise the library i
350. re Mach system is contained on a CD ROM and is comprised of the following components Machren README and Online User s Guide This component contains two README files README html and README The README file is strictly a text file and can be displayed by simply double clicking on the file and scrolling through the document The README html is meant to be displayed by a browser such as Netscape Communicator or Internet Explorer The README files contain up to the minute release information and directions that became available after the documentation was frozen for production purposes Licensing This folder contains important licensing information concerning Mach and various software subsystems that have been licensed from other parties and included with this release It is important that you review and agree with the licensing information contained in this directory and that you abide by the covenants and restrictions found therein Machren Installer This is an installer that contains the Mach application the Mach virtual machine and the UNIX libraries The standard Mach application set includes network access programs printer spooling text editors basic utilities administration aids and software development tools The biggest part of the installation involves double clicking on this installer and allowing it to transfer a Mach image to a local hard disk 12 Power Machren User s Guide Documentation This direct
351. re information refer to section 5 6 5 The Root Password E Customizing the size and location of the console window may be achieved by using ResEdit to edit the WIND resource ID 128 in the Mach application 50 Power Machren User s Guide MachTen Console MachTen 4 1 1 Copyright lt c gt 1997 1998 Tenon Intersystems Using Open Transport TCP IP with Multihoming Mounting Mac file systems MachTen CD on volume COROM Cread only gt Checking Root Fast File System clean 75739 free 3499 frags 9030 blocks 1 88 fragmentation Configuring loopback interface Checking Fast File Systems clean 12238 free 2110 frags 1266 blocks 3 38 fragmentation Mounting Fast File Systems fvolume COROM Source_FFS on base sre read only fMachTen Folder X11R6FFS on fusr X11R6 Mounting Root File System Read Write Linking to MachTen Folder Cleaning up tmp volume var frun fete dev var spool output mqueue uuc Ps Starting local configuration Starting system logger Mounting remote filesystems Starting daemons inetd macmntd Local configuration finished Oct 5 11 35 31 fred init kernel security level changed from O to 1 MachTen fred gt console gt login Jj Figure 17 Machren Login Console Power Machren User s Guide 51 File Edit Window Fonts Commands Ar Terminal 1 mac hard disk Figure 18 MachrTen Terminal Windo
352. re offered by the MIT X Consortium on writing X applications that are portable to other hardware platforms 1 Keep all source file names to 12 characters or less This is the maximum number of characters that older System V file systems allow when using a source code control system 2 Ifyou absolutely must use Makefiles instead of Imakefiles link against 1x11 instead of 1X If you are using imake use the symbolic names KAWLIB XMULIB XTOOLLIB EXTENSIONLIB and XLIB Xaw clients may use the symbol XawClientLibs to refer to the appropriate libraries 3 Include header files using the syntax lt X11 file h gt instead of X11 file h lt X file h gt or X file h 4 Include lt X11 Xos h gt if you need types h string h or strings h then use the routines index and rindex instead of strchr and strrchr file h time h or unistd h 5 If youneed to put in System V vs BSD dependencies use ifdef SYSV If you need SVR3 vs SVR2 use ifdef USG 6 Donot assume that the root window s Visual returned by the DefaultVisual macro is the only one available Some color screens may use a black and white window for the root or could provide StaticColor as well as PseudoColor visuals Unfortunately most libraries do not have adequate support for locating visuals to use In the meantime use XGet VisualInfo 7 Use display displayname to specify the X server to contact Do not simply assume th
353. recover without affecting the client at all other than a delayed response to the client s request If a client mounts a directory the mount command will be re sent until the client receives a response from the server Once the server responds the client can assume that the information is on stable store and available for the client s use Power Machren User s Guide 125 NFS servers are supported by programs or daemons that read the special NFS system files such as the etc exports file The portmap daemon portmap 8 the mount daemon mountd 8 and the NFS daemon nfsd 8 are started at boot time The portmap daemon provides RPC clients like mount UDP port numbers for access to the services provided by mountd and nfsd The nfsd daemon listens for service requests on the NFS port as specified in the Network File System Protocol Specification RFC 1094 The mountd daemon determines whether or not the client issuing the mount request has access rights to the requested directories If the client has the appropriate permissions the server permits access to the file system When a directory is mounted it is not transferred to the client machine but instead appears in the client s directory structure as though it were locally stored Once a directory is mounted the client accesses remote files in the same manner it accesses local files Standard UNIX directory and file manipulation commands can be applied to remote directories in ex
354. ress of the gateway to other networks The name given should also appear in the etc hosts file The route 8 command is invoked with this variable by rc to establish the default route The variable should remain undefined if no gateway exists NAMED _ BOOT The domain name server boot file By default the file is etc named boot When editing etc rc conf be careful not to remove any variables which the script MachTen misc rc config expects to find As a final step in the startup process etc rc executes commands ina user supplied file named etc rc local if it exists The etc rc local file is typically used to start any machine specific processes after Mach has booted such as MacTCP applications Online examples of these files can be found in the usr share skel directory 5 2 1 Setting Up Machren to Boot Automatically Mach can be set up so that it boots automatically when you start your machine Place an alias of the MachTen application file in the System Folder Startup Items folder Later if you want to reset your Macintosh not to boot Mach automatically simply remove the alias files from the Startup Items folder 5 2 2 Manual Startup If Mach has not been configured to start automatically simply double click the MachTen application in the MachTen folder on your Finder desktop 68 Power Machren User s Guide 5 3 Tailoring Mach Windows Mach windows are started by the usr bin wind daemon No
355. revious step and instructing it to display on the local X server Online manual pages are available for each of the X client applications Make sure the X server is running refer to the previous section Start the client usr X11 bin xlogo amp 12 3 3 2 The X11 Application Development Environment Under Machren The imake configuration utility is included to generate machine specific Makefiles from machine independent Imakefiles Another utility called makedepend is provided to generate Makefile dependencies for C language files The xmkmf shell script in usr X11 bin is used to create Makefiles from Imakefiles The easiest way to construct an Imakefile is to start with one that does something similar and modify it The various macros that are used in an Imakefile are defined in the file usr X11 lib X11 config Imake rules Examples of Imakefiles can be found under the vase src X11 R6 mit clients directory You are strongly urged to use imake and makedepend so that your software will work across releases The configuration files for imake are located in the usr X11 lib X11 config directory Makefiles are created from a template file named Imake tmpl a machine specific cf file and a site specific site def file The template file should not be modified The file Tenon cf defines the specific configuration for application development under Mach and need not be modified 302 Power Machren User s Guide The following suggestions a
356. rm C background blue xterm Ada background red When you start the xterm client for programming C or Ada use the name option to match the instance name used in the resource xterm name xterm C amp xterm started for C xterm name xterm Ada amp xterm started for Ada Instance name take precedence over class names in resource specifications 262 Power Machren User s Guide Applications written with the X Toolkit Intrinsics will have at least the following resource variables background This resource specifies the color to use for the window background foreground This resource specifies the color to use for the text and graphics within the window borderWidth This resource specifies the width in pixels of the window border borderColor This resource specifies the color to use for the window border Resource File Locations Programs based on the X Toolkit Intrinsics obtain resources from the following sources The sources are listed in the order of precedence from lowest to highest precedence If the same resource specification is located in more than one place the resource in the source with the higher precedence is used Application Level Resources usr lib X11 app defaults This directory is akin to the Macintosh Preferences folder This is a directory of default application resource files Within each file XTerm for example resource variables are defined
357. rmt12 fsf 1 fpP dev rmt12 64 6 9 7 3 dump and restore Complete and incremental backups of fast file systems may be done with dump Recovery of files is done using restore These tools are not useful on UNIX file systems Details for using dump and restore are provided in the online man pages Power Machren User s Guide 123 7 0 The Mach Network File System NFS The Mach NFS is derived from the Berkeley 4 3BSD Reno release It is fully interoperable with the NFS shipped by Sun and its licensees Properly configured a Macintosh running Mach can share files with mainframes and workstations that support NFS NFS is an open interface standard that exists on a wide variety of UNIX and non UNIX PCs workstations minis and mainframes Mach extends NFS to include the entire Macintosh family Mach systems may be used as NFS clients or NFS servers As a client a system running Mach can use files stored remotely on NFS networked machines as though they were local files As a server a Mach system can store files for other NFS clients If two Mach servers exist in a single environment they can be set up to be each other s client The Mach NFS capability allows users to cluster diskless Macintoshes and to use a single large disk on a remote system to provide file service for the cluster Providing file service for Macintosh systems not only provides for centralized backup and maintenance of disk data but also minimizes
358. rotocol POP3 180 PostScript macros for printing 159 Power Macintosh 11 memory manager 9 PowerPC binary format 2 compiler suite 1 development environment 1 Executable Format PEF 7 219 PPP 38 124 169 293 multiple clients 196 overview 190 setting up 190 client 194 195 server 191 193 pppd program 193 Power Machren User s Guide prcommand 151 pre emptive multitasking 6 PRESERVE_EDITOR_FILES variable 66 printcap program 150 printenv command 69 printing 149 162 AppleDict 159 baud rates 152 DeskWriter 151 font lists 159 ImageWriter 149 151 job status notification 161 LaserWriters 149 local 150 lp management program 162 lpd daemon 47 150 lpq program 162 lpr program 150 lwsrv configuration files 158 diagram 158 enabling 160 overview 149 PostScript 149 macros 159 prcommand 151 printcap 150 PRINTER shell environment variable 156 ProcSet 159 receiving remote print jobs 155 remote spooling 1 149 154 configuring 154 Macintosh applications 157 selecting an alternate printer 156 sharing 3 spooler database 150 spooling 11 149 149 155 Power Machren User s Guide defined 149 to remote UNIX printer 154 status of jobs 162 text files to PostScipt LaserWriter on AppleTalk 151 process IDs 85 ProcSet 159 profile file 72 86 program execution background 85 programming 213 248 building executable binary image 248 environment 213 example 247 notes 303 real memory issues 245 246 edata symbol 245 end symbol 24
359. rrs p lp is used to start a local LaserWriter spooler which advertises its name as mylaser with ProcSet directory usr lib adicts with font set usr lib LWPlusFonts error output file usr adm lwsrv errs and local Ipd printer Ip If you want lwsrv to be invoked every time you start MachIen this command should be placed in your etc rc file Once invoked this command causes other Macintoshes on the local AppleTalk segment to see a new LaserWriter named mylaser for selection with their Choosers Any subsequent Macintosh application print operations will be sent to the mylaser lwsrv which will spool it to its local pd printer named Ip for printing 4 Go toa Macintosh that does not have wsrv running and open the Chooser Verify the entry for the spooled printer mylaser in the Chooser LaserWriter menu 9 6 Print Job Status Mail Notification If there is an access violation or print filter error any Mach Ipd will automatically generate electronic mail to the user and host initiating the print request This feature can be inactivated for any printer by removing the MF entry from the printer s specification in the etc printcap file A user may also explicitly specify that electronic mail be sent on successful printing of their print job by adding the m flag to their originating lpr request 162 Power Machren User s Guide 9 7 Status and lp Management Programs The pq 1 program shows the status of all files from the
360. rt the daemon by giving the command usr sbin Ipd If you print from Mach frequently edit the etc rc conf file to start pd automatically The ImageWriter is not selected with the Chooser but rather with the P option of the pr command The name following P may be any one of the names listed on the first line of the etc printcap entry for the ImageWriter iw and Image Writer work equally well in this case Macintosh files such as Microsoft Word files with embedded formatting characters must be printed from their Macintosh application They cannot be printed with an Ip pror prcommand Macintosh programs running on the Macintosh can access the ImageWriter as they normally do via Chooser 154 Power Machren User s Guide 9 3 Remote Printing In a networked printing environment Mach supports spooling to a remote UNIX or Mach system with an attached printer via 1pd The local Ipd uses the TCP protocol to communicate with the remote Ipd Your Mach system can be configured as an Ipd client invoking remote printing services or an pd server spooling a received file to its local printer Both ends of the Ipd connection are configured through line entries in the etc printcap file 9 3 1 Spooled Printing to a Remote UNIX Printer To set up Mach to spool files to a remote printer perform the following steps 1 Configure the other machine to spool to the printer following the instructions for that machine and printer
361. rts 186 caching 21 Carnegie Mellon Mach kernel 6 case sensitivity in filenames 94 cclobj 215 cclplus 215 CFM See code fragment manager characters non printable 95 special keyboard 83 checking file systems 116 chpass command 77 CHR file types 99 chroot command 77 CLEANUP_tmp variable 66 code fragment 6 213 219 231 loader 220 manager 242 compilers Ada 1 224 C 1 225 C 1 226 engines ccl 215 cclobj 215 cclplus 215 771 215 gnatl 215 Fortran 1 227 Power Machren User s Guide Java 1 228 Objective C 226 compile time libraries 220 naming conventions 221 compiling source code 224 Ada 224 C 225 C 226 Fortran 227 Java 228 Objective C 226 component separators for file names 95 configuration DNS lookups 179 example 43 options 21 via Mach control panel 33 65 configuration screens 34 general 35 36 host name 35 time zone 36 memory maximum number parameters 37 networking 35 38 43 enable incoming connections 39 mail 39 IP forwarding 39 IP addresses 40 42 maximum transmission unit settings 42 netmasks 42 connections incoming 39 console window 19 control panels 33 43 date amp time 36 file sharing 21 Power Machren User s Guide Mach 18 46 168 172 configuring 18 33 65 warning dialog box 32 map 36 memory 21 22 networking 180 183 sharing setup 35 TCP IP 15 38 177 X Windows configuring 296 298 cooperative sharing 6 counts link 90 cpp 214 cron 23 daemon 47 cross develop
362. rules and default parameters for building and installing executables libraries include files man pages and support data A symbolic link named obj is usually created to point to the directory in which object files are built 11 9 Symbol Information Mach application symbol information is obtained by using the nm program Nm works with XCOFF files optionally output from the compilation of an application Use X1xcoff on the compilation command line to produce XCOFF output Files containing XCOFF information are typically named witha xcoff suffix The command nm n afile xcoff will produce symbol information relative to location zero for application data and text Power Machren User s Guide 231 11 10 Debugging Since Machien uses the Apple defined PEF format for executable code objects Code Fragments there are a number of alternatives for debugging Mach applications on the Power Macintosh The traditional UNIX approach for Machien is gdb but Apple and other third party debuggers are also available and will work with Mach PEF Code Fragments 11 10 1 Debugging using gdb Mach applications can be debugged using the Mach gdb application This debugger provides source and assembly level debugging complete with data structure display single step code execution and source code specified break point specification gdb requires access to both the PEF and XCOFF formats of an executable program Using the g comma
363. rus protection software and startup routines that can interfere with the installation 2 Install the Mach Software on your Hard Disk e Insert the Machren CD ROM Insert the Mach CD ROM and double click on the disk icon The disk will show an open window as illustrated below Oo MachTen CD HH README html Documentation Licensing Utilities Source_FFS Figure 5 Machren CD ROM Contents The installation procedure requires double clicking on the Mach Installer and following the directions contained there The following steps detail the installation instructions Power Mach User s Guide 17 Double click on the Mach Installer Double click on the MachTen 4 x Installer on the CD ROM This will start a self extracting operation that will create a MachTen 4 X folder on the hard drive that you select Additionally it will install a number of files in the active System Folder supporting control panel and System Folder extensions This will require approximately 350MB of disk space and may take between 10 and 15 minutes MachTen 4 1 1 4 ET MachTen_FFS MachTen_HFS Tenon Libraries Figure 6 Machren Folder 18 Power Machren User s Guide In the same manner that successfully booting and running the ts Macintosh OS is dependent on the System Folder and some very specifically named files and folders in the System Folder Machren is dependent on its file sy
364. rus protection software 16 disk caching 21 drivers 21 footprint 8 reformatting for peformance 15 requirements 14 space limitations 23 diskless NFS clients 127 distributed file system 1 184 DNS See domain name server Power Machren User s Guide documentation Ada 12 GNAT 12 Mach 12 Objective C 12 domain name 42 requirements for installation 15 resolver 168 172 server 42 BIND enabling 179 boot file 171 configuring Mach as 170 lookups configuration 179 using MachIen as 170 domainname 144 DOS extensions 140 drop folders 138 dtmount command 130 dtnfs program 130 DTNFS see Desktop NFS dual stack configuration 164 177 dump command 120 122 dynamic linking 7 219 memory configuration 7 E edata symbol 245 edit menu 54 55 editing tools 114 copy amp paste 114 Macintosh editing applications 114 UNIX editors 114 editors changing default 70 electronic mail 180 emacs 114 enable Power Machren User s Guide incoming connections 39 mail 39 IP forwarding 39 end symbol 245 environment variables DEBUGGERFIRST 235 MEMSTATS 235 STACKCHK 235 error logging X server 285 etc rc file 23 etc exports file 124 example 126 etc fstab file 48 example 127 etc group file 78 79 etc hosts file 48 168 170 example 171 table 168 etc hosts equiv file 154 etc hosts Ipd file 154 etc localtime file 48 etc master passwd file 77 82 etc motd file 48 82 etc named directory 170 etc named boot f
365. ry for an accounting group with two members would be as follows accounting 7 shawn lauren wheel 0 root nogroup 65534 daemon 1 daemon kmem 2 root sys 3 root tty 4 root operator 5 root bins i74 news 8 wsre 9 games 13 dialer 17 fepe ts 19 staff 20 root Figure 22 The etc group File 80 Power Machren User s Guide 5 6 9 Administrative Login Accounts It is customary to set up special administrative accounts with varying degrees of privilege These accounts are used by system administrators or by programs to perform specific administrative tasks The default Mach etc passwd file contains the following accounts root 0 1 O0perator home root bin csh toor 0 1 Bourne again Operator home root bin sh nobody 65534 65534 Unprivileged user tmp sbin nologin ftp 65533 65533 Anonymous FTP home ftp sbin nologin ppp 65532 65532 PPP Dialin Account tmp etc pppserver daemon 1 1 sbin nologin syne 1 1 bin syne operator 2 5 System amp home operator bin csh bin 3 7 Binaries Commands and Source usr bin sbin nologin uucp 4 4 UNIX to UNIX Copy var spool uucppublic usr lib uucp uucico news 6 8 Network News var spool news sbin nologin games 7 13 Games pseudo user var spool news sbin nologin mta 10 10 Post Office MTA tmp sbin nologin mtuser 100 20 mtuser home mtuser bin csh Non interactive accounts for programs nobody Default user ID
366. s Get Info entry in the File menu before Mach can modify or remove the file 6 4 5 File Types The Macintosh File Manager saves a file type and file creator as part of the attributes for every file Mach uses the identifier MUMM for UNIX files In Mach the term UNIX file is used to refer to any file with a creator MUMM the term Macintosh file is used to refer to all other files Note that Macintosh applications can see and often access the UNIX files since they are simply Macintosh files with a creator MUMM For example you can drag and drop a MUMM TEXT Mach file over Netscape although this will not work with a MUMM BINA file a UNIX executable MachIen makes the distinction between UNIX files and Macintosh files Machten always returns a link count of 2 for UFS directories 98 Power Machren User s Guide All Mach documents and files are owned by the application named MachTen Mach uses file types for the different classes of files in UNIX Each file type has a unique icon easing identification of UNIX files when using the Macintosh Finder BINA Binary Files onc Binary files are streams of data They may be UNIX executable files text files database files or others No translation of the data is done on binary files when accessed via Mach This is the simplest fastest and most common type of file When Mach creates a new file it always creates file
367. s loaded into memory and dynamic linkage occurs When the last client of a shared library has completed processing the library is deallocated and its memory is reclaimed 8 Power Machren User s Guide Compared to static linking used in traditional UNIX systems dynamic linking results in much smaller binary images reducing both system memory requirements and disk footprints UNIX Applications UNIX Development Tools Mach Ten UNIX C Library POSIX Threads Macintosh UNIX Virtual UNIX awed we uNx UNIX A A icati File System TIY Mem Piek IPC Process Applications amp y Mgr Mgmt Mgmt Mgmt Development TOGE UFS XDR FFS RPC BBEdit Lite NFS MacPerl Alpha Sockets TCP UDP Mach Tasks IP amp Threads ARP MachTen Mach Mach A A Window Memory Time Mach IPC Mgr Mgmt Mgmt Macintosh Trap Handler Macintosh Code Fragment Manager Toolbox Managers Operating System Managers amp Utilities MacOS Device Drivers amp Device Managers Figure 4 Mach System Architecture Power Machren User s Guide 9 1 3 3 Memory Mapped File Access The Power Macintosh Memory Manager provides memory mapped file access for programs Allocation of application instruction memory is deferred until an actual reference to a sp
368. s Guide 187 10 15 3 Baud Rates Supported UNIX systems traditionally support baud rates from 50 to 9600 baud Macintosh hardware does not support baud rates below 300 baud but it does support baud rates higher than 9600 baud To take advantage of these higher baud rates Mach translates requests for the traditional UNIX baud rates to the more useful set of baud rates supported by the Macintosh Table 6 Baud Rates Supported lists the actual baud rate used by Mach when the traditional baud rates are requested Table 6 Baud Rates Supported Requested Traditional Machen UNIX Name Baud Rate Baud Rate lt devtty h gt 0 BO 9600 default 50 B50 14400 75 B75 28800 110 B110 57600 134 B134 115200 150 B150 230400 200 B200 300 300 B300 300 600 B600 600 1200 B1200 1200 continued on next page t If Serial DMA is version 2 0 1 or later Serial DMA is included on the Mach CD ROM 188 Power Machren User s Guide Requested Tradittonal Machten UNIX Name Baud Rate Baud Rate lt devtty h gt 1800 B1800 1800 2400 B2400 2400 4800 B4800 4800 9600 B9600 9600 19200 EXTA 19200 38400 EXTB 38400 10 15 4 General Purpose Interface GPI Serial Cable MachIen supports the Macintosh General Purpose Interface GPI serial input With properly constructed cabling see Figure 29 General Purpose Interface GPI Serial Cable Mach can simultaneously
369. s a POP Mail Server A Post Office Protocol POP3 server is pre configured in etc inetd conf To enable this service check the Enable Incoming Connections box in the Mach Networking control panel and restart Mach The POP server operates in conjunction with sendmail the electronic mail server described in the next section 10 9 Using Electronic Mail Mach provides a complete electronic mail service using user and server Simple Mail Transfer Protocol SMTP SMTP is one of the most popular and most widely used electronic mail protocols in the world Users on a single Mach system are able to send electronic mail messages to one another In addition users logged into a Mach system can send electronic mail to any other system that is both network accessible and supports SMTP There are thousands of networks and tens of thousands of UNIX and non UNIX hosts that support SMTP Electronic mail service in Mach is provided by a number of application and daemon programs Users interact with front end applications such as mail 1 to compose review and file messages Routing aliasing and forwarding activities are handled by sendmail 8 and its delivery agents During the Mach installation process sendmail is configured to support direct mail activities on the local Macintosh as well as communicate with other mail servers if the Macintosh and Mach have network access Subsequent changes may be made to accommodate other s
370. s are loaded into the X server and automatically become available to all client applications The X server database is loaded using the command xrdb merge lt resource file gt If any resource is loaded into the X server database via xrdb including non conflicting resources the HOME Xdefaults file will not be read 264 Power Machren User s Guide Host System Level Resources e HOME Xdefaults lt hostname gt This file is associated with the host from the hostname 1 command on which you are executing the X application It is useful when you share a single AppleShare mounted home directory among multiple hosts It takes precedence over all application user and server level resources previously mentioned It is not specific to an application and may contain resources for any number of different X applications e XENVIRONMENT If this environment variable is set to a named file the file is read instead of the Xdefaults lt hostname gt file It takes precedence over all other previously mentioned resource locations when starting an X application For example setenv XENVIRONMENT Xdefaults custom The named file typically contains custom resources for all of the applications you run Command Line Resource Specification e xrm resourcestring Resources can also be specified from the command line when starting your X application The resourcestring is a single resource name variable and value For example
371. s of type BINA Files containing only ASCII printable characters are referred to as text files The Macintosh and UNIX formats for text files have subtle differences Macintosh uses the character cr OxD to terminate a line of text and UNIX uses the character n1 OxA Mach files with a type TEXT are stored on the disk in the native Macintosh text file format the line terminator is cr TEXT Text Files When UNIX applications access type TEXT files Mach automatically translates the cr character to n1 so the UNIX applications see these files in the expected UNIX text file format A result of this automatic translation is that both Macintosh word processors and UNIX editors can be used to edit MUMM TEXT files Note that some Macintosh word processors may inadvertently add resource forks to the UNIX text files but these resource forks will always be ignored by Mach For more information on the handling of text files in Mach refer to section 6 8 Text File Manipulation Power Machren User s Guide 99 LINK Symbolic Links 30h ar This file type is used to identify UNIX symbolic links The path to follow for the symbolic link is stored in the data fork of the file w Hi F This file type is used to identify UNIX character devices UNIX assigns two numbers to each device The major number describes the device type and the minor number uniquely ident
372. s the address returned from the server when slip was typed or during login For PSINet connections lt src address gt and lt dest address gt are identical For logins that run sliplogin lt dest address gt must match the local address entry in the etc slip hosts file on the remote system sbin ifconfig sl0 lt src ip address gt lt dest ip address gt up Add the routing table entry for route 8 For PSINet the default lt gateway address gt is usually constructed by changing the last byte of the SLIP internet address assigned by the server to 1 Otherwise the default gateway address is the lt dest address gt passed as an option to ifconfig above Contact your SLIP server network administrator or your PSINet or UUNET representative as applicable to verify that this is true in your case sbin route add net default lt gateway address gt 1 10 15 11 1 Testing Connectivity Once SLIP is running the Mach host should have full internet connectivity Test access to another host using ping 1 If you know a nearby local gateway ping it otherwise try nic ddn mil If this is successful you are fully connected Power Machren User s Guide 209 10 15 11 2 Stopping SLIP When the SLIP session is over it is desirable to undo the configuration done to bring SLIP up especially if the Mach host is connected to another network and sessions on this network are going to be started Al
373. s the library Compiling Ada programs does not generate any centralized information but rather an object file and a ALI file which are of interest only to the binder and linker Ina traditional system the compiler reads information not only from the source file being compiled but also from the centralized library This means that the effect of a compilation depends on what has been previously compiled In particular e When a unit is with ed the unit seen by the compiler corresponds to the version of the unit most recently compiled into the library Inlining is effective only if the necessary body has already been compiled into the library e Compiling a unit may obsolete other units in the library Power Machren User s Guide A2 27 In GNAT compiling one unit never affects the compilation of any other units since the compiler reads only source files Only changes to source files can affect the results of a compilation In particular e When a unit is with ed the unit seen by the compiler corresponds to the source version of the unit that is currently accessible to the compiler Imlining requires the appropriate source files for the package or subprogram bodies to be available to the compiler Inlining is always effective independent of the order in which units are complied e Compiling a unit never affects any other compilations The editing of sources may cause previous compilations to be out of date if they depende
374. s tools to aid in fast file system maintenance Fast File First Aid is the Mach fsck utility built as a Macintosh application It performs an interactive file system check and repair operation Fast File First Aid may be used to correct file system corruption which can prevent Mach from booting up The Recovery folder contains a special minimal version of Mach for use when file system corruption has affected key programs or support files In the unlikely event that file corruption occurs drag the Recovery folder onto a hard drive and launch the MachTen emerg application This will allow you to access your file systems and take appropriate actions from within a working Mach environment FFS_Installer Mach includes an installer utility called FFS_Installer to greatly simplify the task of adding fast file systems to your Mach system To create a new FFS launch this program and select the desired size FFS Install it into the MachTen folder and launch Mach The new FFS will be automatically mounted when Mach starts up Mac_Perl_510r2_appl This application installs MacPerl Mach also includes UNIX Perl OpenGL Installer This application installs OpenGL capabilities into Mach To receive the necessary OpenGL license number you must separately purchase the OpenGL option Source _FFS This is a large file of about 400MB of data It is a MachIen fast file system file that is meant to be mounted within the Mach file system under
375. series of lines that indicate the usage of pragma Library_Unit For each appearance of pragma Library_Unitin any of the units for which unit lines are present a line of the form L string appears where string is the string from the pragma enclosed in quotes Within the quotes the following can occur Power Machren User s Guide A2 23 e 7 bit graphic characters other than or e indicating a single character e hh indicating a character whose code is hex hh For further details see Stringt Write_String_Table_Entry in the file stringt ads Note that wide characters in the form hhhh cannot be produced since pragma Linker_Option accepts only String not Wide_String Finally at the end of the ALI file is a series of lines that indicate the source files on which the compiled units depend This is used by the binder for consistency checking and look like D source name time stamp comments comments if present must be separated from the time stamp by at least one blank Currently this field is unused Blank lines are ignored when the library information is read and separate sections of the file are separated by blank lines to ease readability Extra blanks between fields are also ignored A2 3 8 Representation of Time Stamps All compiled units are marked with a time stamp which is derived from The source file The binder uses these time stamps to ensure consistency of the set of units that constitu
376. server program except by way of xinit under Mach 12 2 3 1 X Server Startup Options By default xinit will automatically run usr X11 bin X If you need to start the X server with options edit the file named Xparams in your home directory This file should contain any option flags you wish to pass to the server Startup options alter the default X server behavior and are useful for three button mouse operation font path redirection and menu bar configuration among other things A sample Xparams file is available in usr X11 lib X11 xinit Xparams To make user specific customizations copy this file to your home directory as Xparams if and only if you want to start the server with different options If no Xparams file is found the X server uses the default options in usr X11 lib X11 xinit Xparams The following command line options for the X server may be useful on a Mach system authauthorization file Specifies a file which contains a collection of authorization records used to authenticate access See also the xdm and Xsecurity manual pages be Disables certain kinds of error checking for bug compatibility with previous releases e g to work around bugs in R2 and R3 xterms and toolkits Power Machren User s Guide 279 bs Disables backing store support on all screens co filename Sets name of RGB color database dpi resolution Sets the resolution of the screen in dots per
377. set aside memory for the application stack This value has a default of 60K which works well for most applications However some applications can have stack memory requirements that approach several megabytes and need their stack parameters set accordingly This capability is also provided by the setstackspace utility See section 11 13 1 1 Stack Overrun 11 7 2 mkpef The mkpef program takes the XCOFF output of the Mach loader and produces a PEF executable image This program is automatically called by the Mach loader in the default case so typically you will not have to execute this program or build mkpef rules into your Makefile structure 230 Power Machren User s Guide 11 8 To make or pmake MachIen provides both the GNU usr bin make and BSD usr bin pmake implementations of the make utility Both implementations are in wide use and certain software packages depend upon unique features of one or the other See section 11 1 3 Program Sources for more information on make GNU Makefiles are usually self contained and reside in the object directory GNU software packages typically require a configuration step which determines the capabilities and features of the host system and customizes the Makefile and supporting include files accordingly BSD Makefiles reside in the source directory and usually define a few parameters that direct included master scripts The master scripts located in usr share mk define
378. so it could save some money if long distance charges apply 1 Delete the routing table entry sbin route delete net default lt gateway address gt 2 Bring down the SLIP interface sbin ifconfig sl0 down 3 Kill the slattach process kill 9 ps ax egrep slattach egrep v egrep awk print 1 4 Hang up the phone connection by powering off the modem 210 Power Machren User s Guide 10 15 11 3 C Shell Scripts to Expedite SLIP Connections The following script can be used to bring up SLIP once the tip connection has been established and the internet address of this SLIP line is known This script should be called slipup and it takes one parameter the internet address returned by the server host Example C Shell Script to Set Up a SLIP Connection bin csh Use csh because of clever substitution below in route line Connect a MachTen host to a server via slip This script expects the serial connection to have been previously established 1 is the internet address assigned by the SLIP server dev ttya is the Macintosh modem port The baud rate is set to 2400 slattach to assign the tty to SLIP sbin slattach dev ttya 2400 amp Configure the SLIP interface Note a netmask is not explicitly specified Typically you won t need subnetting on the SLIP interface ifconfig will default to the proper netmask in this typical configuration sbin ifconfig sl0 1 1 up trailers A
379. software daemons must be started to facilitate the testing The commands root ppc0 usr sbin portmap root ppc0 usr sbin ypbind root ppc0 ps ax PID TT STAT TIME COMMAND OL R kernel idle 1 2 S sbin init 63 S 0 00 usr sbin syslogd 80 S 0 00 usr sbin inted 232 32 S 0 00 usr sbin portmap 235 S 0 00 ypbind slave 236 S 0 00 ypbind slave 86 co S 0 00 usr bin wind 88 co S 0 03 csh tcsh 237 w0 R 0 00 ps ax start the usr sbin portmap and usr sbin ypbind software daemons The ps ax command outputs a list of the executing programs and in this example shows that the portmap and two ypbind slave instances are ready for NIS operations To test that the daemons can properly contact a YP or NIS server use the ypmatch or ypcat applications The commands root ppc0 ypmatch newton passwd newton w Xh2GK08Aw 507 507 Jon Newton home newton bin csh root ppc0 ypcat hosts LO lee ppc100 T27 s001 host foo com T2 Te 00L localhost BOs gles 1 lamp100 are used to exercise the NIS component of the Mach configuration The ypmatch newton passwd contacts the first NIS server specified in the etc nis conf file and requests a match for user newton in the password database The printed information is the corresponding newton entry from the centralized database The ypcat hosts command causes a dump of the complete database to be printed on the local screen In the example above the hosts database was printed
380. ssage Control A2 5 4 Output Control A2 5 5 Binding for Non Ada Main Programs A2 5 6 Summary of Binder Switches A2 5 7 Command Line Access A2 5 8 Search Paths for gnatbind A2 5 9 Examples of gnatbind Usage Linking Ada Programs Using gnatlink A2 6 1 Running gnatlink A2 6 2 Switches for gnatlink The GNAT Make Program gnatmake A2 7 1 Running gnatmake A2 7 2 Switches for gnatmake A2 7 3 Notes on the Command Line A2 74 How gnatmake Works A2 7 5 Examples of gnatmake Usage Handling Files With Multiple Units With gnatchop A2 8 1 Handling Files With Multiple Units A2 8 2 Command Line for gnatchop A2 8 3 Switches for gnatchop A2 8 4 Examples of gnatchop Usage The Front End Cross Reference Utility gnatf A2 9 1 Overview of gnatf A2 9 2 Command Line of gnatf A2 9 3 Compilation Switches A2 9 4 Cross Referencing Switches A2 9 5 Cross Reference Information and Smart Recompilation A2 3 A2 46 A2 46 A2 49 A2 50 A2 51 A2 51 A2 52 A2 53 A2 53 A2 54 A2 56 A2 56 A2 57 A2 58 A2 59 A2 60 A2 62 A2 63 A2 64 A2 65 A2 65 A2 66 A2 66 A2 67 A2 68 A2 68 A2 69 A2 69 A2 70 A2 71 A2 4 Power Machren User s Guide A2 9 6 File Structure A2 72 A2 9 7 Example of gnatf Usage A2 73 A2 10 0 Filename Krunching With gnatk8 amp A2 76 A2 10 1 About gnatk A2 76 A2 10 2 Using gnatk8 A2 76 A2 10 3 Krunching Method A2 77 A2 10 4 Examples of gnatk8 Usage A2 78 A2 11 0 Other Utility Programs
381. ssages to stderr even if verbose mode set e Error messages generated immediately not saved up till end f Full errors Multiple errors line all undefined references g GNAT style checks enabled ic Identifier char set c 1 2 3 4 8 p f n w je Wide character encoding method e n h u s e kn Limit file names to n 1 999 character 1 Output full source listing with embedded error messages mn Limit number of detected errors to n 1 999 Don t quit try semantics even if parse errors r Reference manual column layout required s Syntax check only t Tree output file to be generated u List units for this compilation v Verbose mode Full error output with source lines to stdout wm Warning mode m s e for suppress treat as error 83 Enforce Ada 83 restrictions Power Machren User s Guide A2 71 A2 9 4 Cross Referencing Switches The following list contains the descriptions of the cross referencing flags available with gnatf x1 Issues warnings for unnecessary misplaced or redundant with clauses Specifically a warning message is generated in the following cases e A compilation unit which is with ed but never used this works with child library units as well e A compilation unit that is with ed in a body responsible subunit if the same with clause already appears in the specification responsible specification or body fo
382. ssword the UNIX terminal window will be displayed T File Edit Window Fonts Help Wed 4 24 37 PM jr MachTen Controls Fortran Hello amp S 8 cd sample_code Fortran Scheduling Use the buttons to access Macintosh HD 8 cat hello F Priority Configuration Screens print Hello world return en g make hello g v o hello hello F B phello 8 cd sampleicode Java Hello world Z cat hello java sO public static void main String argsl1 System out printin Hello worid Java Hello Hello Z cd sample_code C Z make hello class 8 cat hello c include lt stdio h gt Hello world 3 sO printf lt Hello world n o Obj_C Hello cd sample_code Objective C 3 cat hello m 72 This will create a Printer object 7 set it s string and tell it to print int main void gt include Printer h por maino cen id printer Printer alloc init Beat nelle i Miniman print et kee ca o i j include lt iostream h gt printer free int maino B make hello gee o hello hello m Printer m lobje cout lt lt Hello world n Ada Hello B make hello 8 cd samp e_code Ada g o hello hello c cat f guineo al with Gnat 10 use Gnat 10 o wori sO 5 hello Heilo world sO Figure 2 Machren Terminal Window Desktop Power Machren User s Guide 5 Mach
383. stem hierarchy including the names locations and permissions of its files Unless you are fully aware of Machren s dependency on its file system organization and the read write ability of the contained files DO NOT reorganize the Machren distribution hierarchy Be very careful when using Macintosh imposed restrictions on the Mach folders and files This includes locking or assigning File Sharing privileges to any Mach file or folder Reboot After the installation process is complete the installer application will request that it be allowed to reboot the system When given an OK the system will be automatically rebooted This process is necessary to incorporate the Mach control panel and Mach system extensions e Configure the Machren control panel Configure the Mach control panel according to the instructions in section 3 0 The Mach Control Panel 3 Launch Mach e Double click on the Mach application icon Launch Mach by double clicking on the MachTen application icon in the MachTen folder For easier launching you may make an alias to this application and put it on the desktop or in the System Folder Apple Menu Items folder To automatically start Mach when your Macintosh is started you may put an alias in the System Folder Startup Items folder If your system does not successfully start up and present you with the lLogin prompt after a few moments contact Tenon Technical Support at 1 800 6 Mac
384. stem messages obj Object files preserve Temporary home of files preserved when editors fail run System information files rebuilt after each reboot spool Miscellaneous printer spooling directories tmp Temporary files that are not discarded between system reboots 106 Power Machren User s Guide 6 5 4 Major System Administration Files For details about these files see online man pages Name Description etc fstab Contains file system mount information fstab 5 etc group Defines mapping of group numbers to names and authorized users group 5 etc hosts Defines host names aliases and IP address etc master passwd Defines the set of users authorized to log in Provides mapping between user ID and name default group home directory and shell passwd 5 etc printcap Contains the list of available printers and the parameters used by the line printer daemon printcap 5 etc re Contains the script of commands init 8 is to execute to establish the desired environment rc 8 etc re conf Contains variables derived from information entered in the Mach control panel for use by etc rc when starting Mach etc syslog conf usr sbin syslogd configuration file syslog 8 etc ttys Specifies terminal support information for init 8 ttys 5 usr share misc termcap Defines the capabilities for numerous terminal types termcap 5 Being phased ou
385. stem terminals etc motd Message of the day Built by etc rc process and used by login process each time user logs in etc rc local Invoked by etc rc process Should be used to configure site specific daemons MachTen misc rc config Invoked by etc rc process Reads etc Install conf database built by Mach control panel and configures several system databases accordingly etc resolv conf Controls where client requests for name services are sent Could be configured for a name server running on this system or another networked system etc localtime Controls the time zone mappings to GMT etc rc conf Used by etc rc Reflects parameters from the Networking Configuration and General Configuration screens of the Mach control panel etc fstab Database of file systems Used by sbin mount etc sendmail cf Sendmail 8 configuration file etc hosts Host name to internet address mapping Power Machren User s Guide 49 4 1 The Mach Login Console When Mach is first started it displays a command window and asks users to identify themselves with a user name and password At this point the desktop looks like a conventional Berkeley 4 4BSD UNIX system See Figure 17 Mach Login Console Mach provides three pre configured login accounts root mtuser and mtnext Each of these accounts has the password MachTen The root and mtuser acc
386. stem with the concept of logins passwords and file permissions Further it contains sophisticated networking software System administration for Mach includes establishing host names and domain names for standard internet protocol interactions as well as setting Mach up as a gateway an NFS client or server as a mail host or as a UUCP participant Mach system administration can be performed by ordinary users If Mach systems are integrated into a corporate or campus network the network setup tasks will no doubt be performed by the site network administrator In an environment where there is already a UNIX administrator Mach systems can easily be incorporated into the standard UNIX environment 64 Power Machren User s Guide 5 1 A Word About Man Pages Mach supports a vast array of UNIX commands and utilities All of the UNIX commands are documented in a set of man pages included with Mach The UNIX man pages are divided into numbered sections Commands in this manual and all other Mach documents are referenced using these section numbers e g gawk 1 The man page sections are Section No Section Title jai User Commands System Calls Library Functions Special Files File Formats Games Public Files Tables amp Troff Macros Maintenance Commands Oo OLN OD OFF AJ w N X Window System Commands Power Machren User s Guide 65 5 2 Tailorin
387. subunits which are inlined in the parent unit The difference between the x3 and x4 switches is that x3 omits all generic bodies or inlined subprograms from the exported entities while x 4 includes them Both x3 and x4 consider subunits as exported entities gnatf considers only outermost visible entities to be exported That is a record or enumeration type may be exported but its inner fields or enumeration literals are never considered exported entities It is the same for subprogram parameters and discriminants Power Machren User s Guide A2 73 e The list of entities directly imported by unit from other Ada sources along with their lines and columns where they are used in unit The idea of imported entities is derived from the notion of exported entities what is exported by one unit may be imported by another A2 9 6 File Structure The cross referencing file is divided into various sections There is one section for each compilation unit explicitly requested We call these units RUs for requested units There is also one section for each AU auxiliary unit that is those compilation units that are implicitly loaded by the compiler but whose compilation has not been explicitly requested by the user Specs of withed packages are typical AUs All entities exported by RUs the x3 and x 4 switches or all entities belonging to RUs the x5 and x6 switches
388. support hardware flow control and carrier detect modem control transitions Modem Cable Pinout DIN 8 to DB 25 Male 13 ecoocoooooooooo a EE E EE E EE E E E E ee 4 5 2 7 3 14 25 RTSDTR CTS TxD Gnc RxD DCE Shielc Male Figure 29 General Purpose Interface GPI Serial Cable Power Machren User s Guide 189 10 15 5 Connecting a Modem to a Mach Serial Port For incoming calls toa modem connected to the serial port the governing Mach software is getty 1 Since getty looks for ASCII text strings a modem that uses ASCII commands such as a Hayes compatible modem will normally require some initialization to keep the responses and status messages from the modem from being handed to getty as a login string A sample Hayes string used for inbound UUCP connections is 1M1L3e0q1 This string either typed at the terminal console by the user or sent to the modem by the software in play mode instructs the modem to answer on the first ring not to echo characters and not to send result codes If you depend on the Mach end of a connection to go onhook first at the end of a call a Hayes compatible modem must be configured to heed the Data Terminal Ready DTR line The Hayes default is to ignore DTR Outbound calls will normally be governed by a particular UNIX program such as uucp 1 tip 1 or cu 1 or by a Macintosh environment communications program These programs normally take responsi
389. t unused test adb 10 09 warning Color unused test xrb 1 V SGNAT v1 0 test adb 941012154746 2 3 partl ads 941012154531 part2 ads 941012154620 test adb test 3 11 thing 5 4 16 4 17 4 17 13 17 21 client 6 9 11 11 16 12 client number 7 7 13 14 14 14 client state 8 7 15 15 14 16 color 10 9 17 red 10 19 18 green 10 24 19 my_client 11 4 20 14 4 15 4 OO MON AU RAUN oe o 0 0 a 21 22 partl ads 23 partl 1 9 24 1 6 25 26 part2 ads 27 part2 1 9 28 2 6 2 17 29 number 2 9 30 5 14 A2 76 Power Machren User s Guide The unit Test is the only RU requested unit AUs auxiliary units are packages Part1 and Part2 First the graph of the loaded units with their time stamps is given 02 test adb 941012154746 2 3 03 partl ads 941012154531 04 part2 ads 941012154620 Unit Test requires the loading of units Part 1 and Part2 the second and third units listed in the inclusion graph The entry 06 5 test adb OF a0 08 thing 5 4 09 fend TrA L713 ATL means Thing is an entity a variable defined in line 5 column 4 used in line 16 column 4 and in line 17 columns 4 13 and 21 in file test adb The entity Useless may be used in units other than Test but that information is not contained in the test xrb file because Test does not use Useless Power Machren User s Guide A2 77 A2 10 0 Filename Krunching With gnatk8 This c
390. t 3 test_factorial factorial result Old value 57185676 New value 57179476 Oxlefec48 in test_factorial factorial n 32402616 at test_factorial adb 13 13 function Factorial N IN Positive return Positive is The huge values which vary from execution to execution suggest that Result is uninitialized at this point This is true gdb continue Continuing Breakpoint 2 test_factorial factorial n 3 at test_factorial adb 23 23 if N 1 then gdb continue Continuing Breakpoint 2 test_factorial factorial n 2 at test_factorial adb 23 23 if N 1 then gdb continue Continuing Watchpoint 3 test_factorial factorial result Old value 57179476 New value 0 Oxlefec48 in test_factorial factorial n 32402440 at test_factorial adb 13 13 function Factorial N IN Positive return Positive is gdb continue Continuing Power Machren User s Guide A1 19 Breakpoint 2 test_factorial factorial n 1 at test_factorial adb 23 23 if N 1 then gdb continue Continuing Watchpoint 3 test_factorial factorial result Old value 0 New value 1 Oxlefec64 in test_factorial factorial n 1 at test_factorial adb 24 24 Result 1 stopping case Now we ve recursed all the way down and start back up gdb continue Continuing Watchpoint 3 test_factorial factorial result Old value 1 New value 57179476 Oxlefed18 in test_factorial factorial n 2 at test_factorial adb 29 29 return Result
391. t by ncurses Power Machren User s Guide 107 6 6 Mounting Macintosh Volumes Mach stores UNIX files on Macintosh volumes alongside Macintosh files Since all Macintosh volumes are formatted with the Macintosh Hierarchical File System HFS it is not necessary to use the traditional UNIX file system formatting commands mkfs fsck etc In Mach the mount 8 command has been modified to accept a Macintosh volume name in addition to a UNIX device name for mounting local file systems When Mach is started the root folder of the volume from which Mach was launched is automatically mounted as Once Mach is running any other Macintosh volume may be mounted For example to mount an external hard disk named External Disk on the path external and to mount a floppy disk named Untitled on the path mnt Untitled the following commands may be used mkdir external mnt Untitled mount External Disk external mount Untitled mnt Untitled Note that the path where the volume is to be mounted must exist mnt is created by the Mach installation program and that volume names with spaces must be contained within quotes UNIX provides a database file called etc fstab to specify the path on which each file system is to be mounted In Mach the format of this file has been extended to accept Macintosh volume names just like the mount command see fstab 5 6 6 1 Mounting Permissions Since
392. t call sbrk make the assumption that each successive call to sbrk will return memory addresses contiguous to the previous call This is not possible to support in a real memory environment thus these programs require modifications to work with Machien In Mach sbrk translates into a heap oriented memory allocation call page boundary Typical virtual memory implementations allocate memory on page boundaries thus requests to allocate less than some minimum amount actually allocate this minimum Some programs may accidentally depend on this by accessing past the minimum memory length requested without causing problems Memory is a scarce resource in a real memory implementation and memory requests are typically rounded to a much smaller size multiples of 16 or 32 bytes Accidentally exceeding this real memory boundary will most certainly cause problems to the actual owner of this space fragmentation Ina real memory situation it is possible to fragment memory in such a way that although the total free memory is sufficient to satisfy a particular allocation request none of the individual memory pieces is big enough to satisfy the request This situation can be aggravated by use of the realloc call with successively larger sizes Quitting and restarting Mach will solve this 246 Power Machren User s Guide out of Both the C compiler gcc and cc1 and the make program memory require a lot
393. ta and Alt Keys Under the Mach X server hot key operation using the lt Apple Command gt key normally associated with a Mach terminal window is disabled The lt Command gt key functions as an X lt Meta gt or when shifted lt Alt gt key when the X server is the front window Many applications including the OpenLook Virtual Window Manager use the lt Meta gt and lt Alt gt keys as keyboard modifiers Apple reserves certain keystroke combinations for special effects All lt Command Shift number gt sequences are not delivered to the X server and are unavailable for use by your X applications The Macintosh lt Option gt key is not available for use as a lt Meta gt key 12 2 3 4 Server Error Logging The X server logs cumulative error messages to the file var adm XOmsgs If you are having trouble starting the X server or if the server suddenly exits the contents of this file may contain helpful troubleshooting information If the XOmsgs file does not exist the X server will create anew one when it starts up You may optionally remove the X0msgs file and create a symbolic link to your console terminal In dev console var adm X0msgs With the symbolic link in place errors logged by the X server will appear in the Mach console window 286 Power Machren User s Guide 12 2 3 5 X Server Performance Tuning Guide The following tips will help you optimize the performance of the MachIen X server Turn off Apple
394. tactic accuracy This is not always possible with C headers because they are fragments of programs that have no specific syntactic or semantic rules A2 26 Power Machren User s Guide The other major difference is the requirement for running the binder which performs two important functions First it checks for consistency In C or C the only defense against putting together inconsistent programs is outside the compiler ina make file for example The binder satisfies the Ada requirement that it be impossible to construct an inconsistent program when the compiler is used in normal mode The other important function of the binder is to deal with elaboration issues There are also elaboration issues in C that are handled automatically This automatic handling has the advantage of being simpler to use but the C programmer has no control over elaboration Where gnatbind might complain there was no valid order of elaboration a C compiler would simply construct a program that malfunctioned at runtime A2 3 12 Comparison of GNAT Model With Traditional Ada Library Model This section is intended to be useful to Ada programmers who have previously used an Ada compiler implementing the traditional Ada library model as described in the Ada 95 Languages Reference Manual If you have not used such a system please go on to the next section In GNAT there is no library in the normal sense Instead the set of source files themselves acts a
395. tandardized object oriented language Mach s Macintosh Toolbox bindings let you use Ada95 to produce native Macintosh applications In addition Mach includes the latest GNU compilers for C C Objective C and Fortran and the latest GNU internet programming tools such as Perl tcl tk and expect The Kaffe Java virtual machine lets you run your newly developed Java bytecode Because all MachIen compilers generate standard PowerPC binary formats Mach can be used in combination with any standard Macintosh compiler and debugger And just in case you prefer Macintosh tools we ve included such favorites as MacPerl Alpha and BBEditLite Power Machren User s Guide 1 1 The Mach Desktop The Macintosh desktop is created and maintained by a Macintosh system application called Finder When Mach is installed on your Macintosh you still have the Finder desktop available and you can easily switch from Macintosh applications to Mach Mach and MacOS essentially operate as co resident operating systems sharing the processor and being enriched by each other s environment Using Mach will enable you to work with Macintosh and UNIX programs concurrently copy and paste between Macintosh and UNIX documents and applications and share files printers and other peripherals with networked systems Figure 1 Mach on the Macintosh Desktop shows a typical Mach desktop display File Edit Window F
396. tape device files may be used to read and write tapes using tar dd and other utilities tar may be used to back up both FFS and local Macintosh volumes Macintosh files will be written in AppleSingle format to preserve both the resource and data forks of the file An additional utility called mt is provided with Mach to position rewind and offload tapes It may also be used to print out tape information see mt 1 122 Example 1 Power Machren User s Guide Example of archiving your entire Mach file system to tape using a blocking factor of 64 hardware compression and rewinding the tape when the backup is finished tar cv Example 2 fb dev rmt8 64 Example of archiving two different volumes in two different save sets on a single tape using a blocking factor of 64 hardware compression and rewinding the tar cv mt f tar cv mt f Se Se EE tape when the second archive is finished fb dev rmt12 64 volumes MacDisk1l dev rmt12 eof 1 fb dev rmt12 64 volumes MacDisk2 dev rmt8 eof 1 Note that the mt utility is used to place an lt End Of File gt marker on the tape after each save set Doing this enables the mt utility to find any of the save sets by searching for the lt EOF gt marker from the beginning of the tape For example use the following commands to find the start of the second save set in the above example and then mt f tar xv restore volumes MacDisk2 dev
397. tc remote as follows sliphost dv dev ttyfa br 2400 Example baud rate br setting 2 Set up the tip activity log described in section 10 15 9 1 Configuring Mach to Dial Out to SLIP Servers if you want a log of your session 3 Invoke tip without the s option tip sliphost 4 Dial out to the remote host this example uses a modem with an at command set dialing to a hypothetical phone number preceded by 1 and an area code atdt15185551212 tip may not immediately notice if the number is busy but will time out waiting for a reply Subsequent steps in the manual SLIP connection process achieve the SLIP configuration that would otherwise be done automatically by tip Power Machren User s Guide 207 10 15 10 6 Logging In How you log in depends on the host to which you are making the connection With some terminal servers you log in with your own name and password and then give the command slip With BSD systems the system administrator usually creates a special login account which runs the sliplogin program In this case the name of the special login account is used and SLIP is invoked automatically In either event once connected log in using the appropriate account name and password Username Xxx Password If there are any unusual characters printed during the login process try responding to the Username prompt with a carriage return Repeat this until the line settles or the a
398. tc sliphome slip hosts The default initialization script is etc sliphome slip login However if particular hosts need special initialization the file etc sliphome slip login loginname will be executed instead if it exists The example etc sliphome slip hosts file from the distribution is shown below slip hosts 8 1 Berkeley 6 6 93 login local addr remote addr mask optl normal compress noicmp Schez vangogh chez OxffffffO0 compress Sjun vangogh 128 32 130 36 0xffffff00 normal Sleconte vangogh leconte OxffffffO0 compress Sleeb vangogh leeb OxffffffO0 compress Smjk vangogh pissaro sl Oxffffffo0 compress Soxford vangogh oxford OxffffffO0 compress 10 15 10 4 SLIP Session Termination On session termination sliplogin will automatically remove the SLIP interface from the list of Machien network interfaces Mach will reset the serial port to the configuration specified in etc ttys in preparation for a new SLIP session 206 Power Machren User s Guide 10 15 10 5 Manual Connections to SLIP Servers Some SLIP servers may not support the automated functions of tip s dial up terminal servers or other non BSD UNIX systems for example In this case it may be necessary to perform some of the SLIP setup commands manually If it is possible to use the s option to tip to configure SLIP then that method is recommended Otherwise follow the manual setup steps below 1 Configure an abbreviated entry in e
399. te Mach terminal windows within the Mach windows environment The File menu is also used to quit the X Window server environment Figure 31 The File Menu New Window Create a new Mach terminal window When a terminal window is created the X server is hidden from view Close Window Close the X server window This option quits the X server closing all X connections and terminating all processes associated with the X server Logout Quit all Mach windows including the X server and return to the login console Quit Quit the Mach application Power MachrTen User s Guide 253 12 1 2 2 The Window Menu The Window menu contains a hierarchical Order sub menu item a Save Window Environment item and a list of Mach terminal windows including the X server To access a sub menu item slide the mouse cursor over the item and to the right Figure 32 The Window Menu Save Window Save a description of the sizes and locations of the current Environment Mach windows environment to a named file If the X server is running when the window environment is saved the X server will be started automatically the next time you start up the Mach windows environment The Window List Selecting a Mach terminal window makes the X desktop invisible and makes the terminal visible Selecting X Server makes the X desktop visible The active window is displayed in outline font
400. te a folder named Preserve in the top level of your hard disk Preserve changed configuration files Copy any configuration files you have changed to the Preserve folder This includes many of the files located in etc such as fstab group hosts inetd conf sendmail cf and passwd It may be best to save all of etc and review the files after installation is complete Private user files in the home directory should be saved Note that the cshrc login mailrc and profile files for the root account home root may be updated in subsequent releases Copy changed files to the Preserve folder Copy any other files you have changed in dev src or usr and or binaries you have built in usr local to the Preserve folder Visit the var folder Visit the var folder and determine whether or not to preserve the administrative log files queued mail messages print requests and accounting files contained in the sub folders adm log spool tmp and preserve If in doubt preserve the file s and take a closer look after the installation is complete 2 Quit MachrTen Power Machren User s Guide 27 3 Remove Outdated Machren System Files From Your Hard Disk e Drag files to the Trash From the top level folder drag the MachTen folder to the Trash Drag the Tenon Libraries to the Trash Certain system configuration information is stored in the Mach Preferences This configuration information will be re assumed if you do not drag the Pr
401. te how usr bin wind is invoked by the login file when you log on to the Mach console When usr bin wind is initiated the system looks in your home directory for a file named windrc which specifies your preferred window environment If there is no windrc file in your home directory a single 24 row by 80 column window is opened with a default font and font size Monaco 9 or the closest available fixed width font If you want to design your own window environment a windrc file must exist in your home directory The easiest way to create a windrc file is to create the windows you want for your standard startup environment position them as desired and set the active window s font type and point size to the font and size you prefer Then select Save Window Environment in the File menu You will be asked to provide a filename The first time you do this you must name the file windrc and place it in your home directory The changes will take effect the next time you launch Mach It is a good idea to keep a copy of your current windrc file each time you change your window environment so that you can easily return to the previous environment If you want to return to the system default simply remove the windre file you created To change the name of a terminal window edit the windrc file and change the name from Terminal n to whatever you would like If you want a terminal window to run an alternative program i
402. tected during the installation If you are installing Power Mach over an existing version of Mach on your disk you may want to review section 2 2 Reinstallation e Assemble IP addressing and configuration information The installation process requires knowledge of your network environment You will need the following information the local time zone the name of your host the machine on which Mach is being installed your Internet address on Ethernet or EtherTalk and the subnetwork mask if appropriate e your Internet address on AppleTalk and subnetwork mask if appropriate your domain name and the internet address of your Domain Name Server e the name and internet address of your default gateway you may be using either a MacIP gateway or a standard IP gateway Mach includes its own TCP protocol stack If you have already configured the Apple TCP IP control panel Mach will use the networking information provided by OpenTransport by default 16 Power Machren User s Guide If you are running Mach on a Macintosh that is not connected to a network you can reconfigure Mach for the added network connections at a later time Refer to section 2 2 1 Reconfiguration Quit all applications Quit all currently running Macintosh applications AutoDoubler and any startup Macintosh applications should also be disabled Holding down the lt Shift gt key while rebooting will disable vi
403. ted as dynamic linkages to be satisfied during the run time execution of the application The Xlcreator and Xltype parameters specify a MISC creator and a standard Macintosh application type The resulting point and click Macintosh program can be executed independently of Mach 240 Power Machren User s Guide 11 12 Cross Development Tools and Targets The macppc component of the target pathnames used in the BSD and GNU Makefiles is for the potential use of Mach in a cross development environment i e base mac68k bsd4 4 could be the target directory for building 68K versions of the BSD applications The locations of the development tools are also dictated by the cross development capabilities of Mach machine specific development tools usr macppc bin libraries usr macppc lib header files usr macppc include non machine specific development tools usr bin usr lib and usr include Links to the machine specific development tools are set up in the corresponding directories 11 12 1 Default Machren Environment Selection of the target in a cross development environment is controlled by the PATH variable and other environment variables and symbolic links See section 5 4 Tailoring Your UNIX Environment for information on environment variables Currently Mach provides support for PowerPC targets thus this environment is established as the default Power Machren Use
404. ted text is displayed as white letters on a black background Double clicking the mouse selects the word where the mouse cursor is triple clicking selects the entire line fno 422 3 Copy C Pasie Kt fier Select All 2A Copy Paste lt c gt 36 Save Selection Undo Command Z Undo is provided only to support desk accessories and is not active under MachIen Cut Command X Cut is provided only to support desk accessories The concept of cutting from a UNIX history screen is not meaningful Moreover specific applications need built in cut support In MachrIen traditional cut and paste functions become copy and paste Copy Command C Put a copy of the selection on the Clipboard Power Machren User s Guide 55 Paste Command V Put a copy of the contents of the Clipboard into the active window The same item may be pasted many times until the next Copy command Clear Clear is provided only to support desk accessories and is not active under Mach Select All Command A Select all the text in the active window Copy Paste lt cr gt Command G Copy current selection to the Clipboard The Clipboard is then provided as input to the active window followed by a carriage return This lets you select something from the screen and turn it into the tail end of a UNIX command Save Selection
405. tension only if the original argument was a filename with an extension A2 78 Power Machren User s Guide A2 10 3 Krunching Method The initial filename is determined by the name of the unit that the file contains The name is formed by taking the full expanded name of the unit and replacing the separating dots with hyphens and using lower case for all letter except that a hyphen in the second character position is replaced by a plus sign The extension is ads for a specification and adb for a body Krunching does not affect the extension but the filename is shortened to the specified length by following these rules e The name is divided into segments separated by minus or plus signs and underscores and all hyphens plus signs and underscores are eliminated If this leaves the name short enough we are done Ifnotthe longest segment is located left most if there are two of equal length and shortened by dropping its last character This is repeated until the name is short enough As an example consider the krunch of our strings wide_fixed adb to fit the name into 8 characters as required by MS DOS our strings wide_fixed 22 our strings wide fixed 19 our string wide fixed 18 our stri wide fixed 17 our stri wide fixed 16 our stri wide fixe 14 our str wide fixe 14 our str wid fixe 13 our str wid fix 12 Ou SET wid fix 11 ou st wid fix 10 ou st wi fix 9 ou st wi fi 8 Final filename oustwif
406. ter code is the corresponding JIS character according to the standard algorithm for Shift JIS conversion Only characters defined in the JIS code set table can be used with this encoding method EUC Coding Note A wide character is represented by a two character sequence 16 ab and 16 cd with both characters being in the upper half The internal character code is the corresponding JIS character according to the EUC encoding algorithm Only characters defined in the JIS code set table can be used with this encoding method These coding schemes do not permit simultaneous use of the upper half of the Latin 1 character set A2 16 Power Machren User s Guide A2 3 3 File Naming Rules The filename is determined by the name of the unit the file contains The name is formed by taking the full expanded name of the unit and replacing the separating dots with hyphens and using lower case for all letters except that a hyphen in the second character position is replaced by a plus sign The extension is ads for a spec and adb for a body as shown in the following table main ads Main spec main adb Main body arith_functions ads Arith_Functions package spec arith_functions adb Arith_Functions package body func spec ads Func Spec child package spec func spec adb Func Spec child package body main sub adb Sub subunit of Main Following these rules can result in very
407. tes a single program Time stamps are twelve character strings of the form YYMMDDHHMMSS Each two character field has the following meaning YY year 2 low order digits MM month 2 digits 01 12 DD day 2 digits 01 31 HH hour 2 digits 00 23 MM minutes 2 digits 00 59 SS seconds 2 digits 00 59 A2 24 Power Machren User s Guide Time stamps may be compared lexicographically in other words the order of Ada comparison operations on strings to determine which is later or earlier However in normal mode only equality comparisons have any effect on the semantics of the library Later earlier comparisons are used only for determining the most informative error messages to be issued by the binder The time stamp is the actual stamp stored with the file without any adjustment resulting from time zone comparisons This avoids problems in using libraries across networks with clients spread across multiple time zones but may mean the time stamp will differ from that displayed in a directory listing For example in UNIX systems file time stamps are stored in Greenwich Mean Time GMT but the Is command displays local times A2 3 9 Binding an Ada Program When using languages such as C and C the only remaining step in building an executable program once the source files have been compiled is linking the object modules together This means it is possible to link an inconsistent version of a program in which two units have included
408. th the exception of Scheduling Priority slide bar adjustments all changes made in the Mach control panel require you to restart MachIen in order for the modifications to take effect MachtTen Controls Scheduling Use the buttons to access Priority Configuration Screens Networking Copyright 1993 2 1 Tenon Intersystems Figure 10 Mach Control Panel 34 Power Machren Users Guide 3 1 Scheduling Priority Slide Bar On a busy system where both Mach and Macintosh programs are running simultaneously the Scheduling Priority slide bar allows you to control the relative CPU time spent running UNIX programs versus running Macintosh programs A change of priority goes into effect immediately allowing you to tune your system depending on your personal workload priority For optimal performance the Mach control panel should be closed after making any scheduling priority adjustments The Mach scheduler is designed to optimize performance independent of the slide bar position Therefore when no other Macintosh applications are running the slide bar position will have no effect on the performance of Mach Similarly when no Mach processes are active the impact of Mach on Macintosh applications will be minimal regardless of the slide bar setting 3 2 Configuration Screens There are some basic configuration parameters that must be set in order for Mach to operate properly These include general Mach system inf
409. that each entry includes the proper restrictions If you do not intend for your system to act an an NFS server skip this step If your system is to be used as an NFS server restart Mach now to bring up the NFS server daemons Edit the etc fstab file on each client system Create an entry in the file for each directory to be mounted Create the appropriate directories to be used as mount points listed in etc fstab on each client machine using the mkdir 1 command Use the command umount a to unmount all directories that are not busy i e those directories that are not in the user s working directories This unmounts directories previously mounted for example by an older etc fstab file Use the command mount a to mount everything in the current etc fstab file Each time the client system is booted up if etc rc conf has MOUNT_REMOTE_FILES set a mount a command is performed automatically 130 Power Machren User s Guide 7 4 NFS Volumes on the Macintosh Desktop Desktop NFS Mach extends the traditional NFS service accessible from UNIX applications to include access to NFS volumes from Macintosh applications This feature is called Desktop NFS DTNFS because the NFS volumes appear on the Finder s desktop Using Desktop NFS remote file system data is made available to local Macintosh applications by representing the NFS server as a volume icon on the Macintosh desktop Macintosh application references to folders an
410. the 128 0 2 subnet and the PPP client is on the 128 0 3 subnet Point to Point networks do not require the specification of a netmask Additional clients which also use the server s dial in PPP line should also have IP addresses on the same subnet as this PPP client This configuration permits a single static route on the server s gateway to handle all of the routing for the dial in PPP clients on the server s network see below Run the script per the instructions in the example above to establish the PPP connection e On the server s network add a static route to the client subnet in your default gateway machine s etc rc local file route add net 128 0 3 128 0 2 1 1 All other machines on the server s network should have default routes pointing at the gateway machine and all PPP connected client machines should be on the 128 0 3 subnet Power Machren User s Guide 197 10 15 9 Using SLIP Mach supports internet connections over full duplex serial lines using SLIP the Serial Line Internet Protocol Mach can be configured to initiate connections to a remote SLIP server system Mach can also be configured to accept connections from hosts requesting SLIP service Mach s SLIP capabilities combined with Macintosh hardware and any of a number of commercially available modems make an excellent platform for accessing large dial up networks such as PSINet and UUNET Other internet access prov
411. the BBEditLite documents located in the Utilities Text Utilities folder on the MachIen CD ROM for more information 10 5 1 Importing Macintosh Image Files Images such as GIF or JPEG files created by Macintosh applications for use with httpd must have a MUMM BINA file creator type Use the chcreat 1 and chtype 1 utilities to change an image file s creator and type chcreat MUMM lt image gif gt chtype BINA lt image gif gt 174 Power Machren User s Guide 10 5 2 Multihoming Your Mach Web Server The Mach httpd supports multiple simultaneous independent Web sites on a single Macintosh This is useful if for example you operate HTTP servers on behalf of several independent organizations Each IP address on your Macintosh is assigned a domain name associated with the organization on whose behalf you run the Web server Mach achieves this unique level of service in two ways First Mach allows you to run multiple instances of httpd running simultaneously on a single multi homed more than one network interface host with each httpd instance bound to a particular network interface and IP address in your system Each httpd server is entirely independent and has a different set of configuration files Second a Macintosh host that is physically single homed one network interface can be configured to appear multi homed Up to twenty unique virtual IP addresses and domain names may be aliased to the singl
412. tions 301 12 3 3 2 The X11 Application Development Environment Under Mach 301 12 3 3 3 Programming Notes 303 Power Machren Users Guide Figure 1 Figure 2 Figure 3 Figure 4 Figure 5 Figure 6 Figure 7 Figure 8 Figure 9 Figure 10 Figure 11 Figure 12 Figure 13 Figure 14 Figure 15 Figure 16 Figure 17 Figure 18 Figure 19 Figure 20 Figure 21 Figure 22 Figure 23 Figure 24 Figure 25 Figure 26 LIST OF FIGURES Mach on the Macintosh Desktop Mach Terminal Window Desktop xterm Displayed by the AfterStep Window Manager Mach System Architecture Mach CD ROM Contents Mach Folder Mach Console Window Chnglicense Dialog Box Control Panel Warning Dialog Box Mach Control Panel General Configuration Screen Memory Configuration Screen Networking Configuration Screen Example Network Configuration Mach Application Folder Mach Initialization Mach Login Console Mach Terminal Window Mach Windows A cshrc File The etc passwd File The etc group File Special Keyboard Characters Using ps to Show What is Running Example of File Permissions Spooling Printer Output to UNIX Printers Using lwsrv XV 101 158 xvi Power Machren User s Guide Figure 27 Resource Sharing FTP mail rlogin 163 Figure 28 Example etc hosts File 171 Figure 29 General Purpose Interface GPI Serial Cable 188 Figure 30 The X Desktop 250 Figure 31 The File Menu 252 Figure 32 The W
413. tlist where directory is the path name of a directory option is a list of options and hostlist is a space separated list of host names indicating who can access the directory The following is a typical etc exports file Note that there must not be any comments or blank lines in this file usr ro payrollclient accountingclient etc Applications exports root gladys gladys If an etc exports file exists Mach will automatically launch portmap mountd and nfsd at boot time via the etc rc file Otherwise the NFS server daemons will not be started 7 3 2 Client Mounting Clients may gain access to advertised service files and directories by mounting that file or directory Directories and files are mounted either by an explicit mount command issued by the client or automatically at system startup by the etc rc file If a client needs a particular directory for a limited amount of time the mount and umount commands can be used as needed A client can mount any directory that is in the server s etc exports file as long as that client has access permission Before a client can issue a mount command the client must prepare a mount point that is allocate a place for the exported file or directory Clients should use the mkdir 1 command to make a directory for each directory the client wishes to mount Power Machren User s Guide 127 The mount command has the following syntax sbin mount t type rw o
414. to compose the chat script To terminate a PPP connection from Mach first determine the process number for the pppd program by typing the following command ps ax Terminate the pppd process by typing the following kill lt pid gt where lt pid gt is the process number of the pppd process Running the etc pppclient script when a PPP connection is already in place will return status information about the connection Note that etc pppclient can be run from etc rc local to start up a connection at boot time It can also be run from crontab to ensure that connections are re established if the line drops The default configuration is for the PPP server to supply the client with a dynamic address There is a CLIENT variable in etc pppclient that can be set to a static address for the client 196 Power Machren User s Guide 10 15 8 4 IP Addressing Strategy for Multiple PPP Clients The client ppp0 interface may be configured with the same IP address as the ie0 interface on the client If the client has no interfaces other than the ppp0 interface its IP address should be assigned on a different subnet than the IP address of the PPP server The IP addresses for the client and server in our example are specifically chosen so that the PPP client s IP address is on a different subnet than the PPP server s IP address With a netmask of Oxffffff00 on its Ethernet ie0 interface the server is on
415. tool gnatf which allows for syntax and semantics checking without any code generation This is somewhat faster than using gcc gnatc The standard GNAT switches that do not concern code generation are still available in gnatf However they should not be proceeded by gnat so to do syntax only checking with gnatf use gnatf s file adb notgnatf gnats file adb The real point of gnatf is that it contains a cross reference tool whose goals are e Giving precise information about all declared entities where they are defined and where they are used This is particularly useful in the Ada emacs mode contained in the GNAT distribution e Emitting warnings if an entity is defined but never used or a with clause is unnecessary misplaced or redundant A2 70 Power Machren User s Guide A2 9 2 Command Line of gnatf The gnatf command line is of the following form gnatf switches files The effect is similar to a gcc command specifying the gnatc no code generation switch although it is somewhat faster especially if several files are processed at the same type A2 9 3 Compilation Switches The following compilation switches are similar to the corresponding switches in gcc except that the names are not preceded by gnat For example the gnatf switch for syntax only checking is s instead of gnat s For full details on these switches see section A2 4 2 Switches for gcc b Generate brief me
416. tosh All operate by assigning an unused keyboard key or key combination to the middle and right mouse buttons The X server supports the reconfiguration of the mouse keys from the default lt Left Arrow gt and lt Right Arrow gt to any other keyboard key or lt Option gt key combination By matching the X server mouse button configuration with your three button mouse hardware configuration you can shift your X three button operation entirely to the hardware mouse 282 Power Machren User s Guide The default keystrokes for the middle and right mouse buttons may be changed via the mbm and mbr server startup parameters described in the previous section The values to assign to the options for a given Macintosh key are as follows Key Value Key Value Fl 122 Help 114 F2 120 Home 115 F3 99 Page up 116 F4 118 Page up 116 F5 96 Page down 121 F6 97 End 119 F7 98 Left arrow 123 F8 100 Right arrow 124 F9 101 Down arrow 125 F10 109 Up arrow 126 F11 103 Clear 71 F12 111 Equal 81 F13 105 F14 107 F15 113 The X server may also be configured to accept the Macintosh lt Option gt key in combination with the selected button keystroke using the mo startup parameter described in the previous section This allows keyboard keys to function both as normal keys and when the lt Option gt key is pressed as mouse buttons If the default mouse button
417. tosh system memory A dynamic bar chart of allocated system memory as well as Mach and other application memory can be displayed by selecting the About This Computer entry in the Apple menu when Finder is the front application Sometimes due to heavy system loads either Mach memory or system memory allocations will be completely exhausted By reallocating the size of the Mach memory space it is possible to change the relative sizes of the two allocations See section 11 13 1 4 Setting the Mach Heap Size for directions on how to increase the Mach memory heap Mach typically fails to allocate memory in two ways the CFM fails to find sufficient memory when loading an application static allocation or the application itself fails during a secondary memory request dynamic allocation Both failures print an error message When the CFM fails to find enough memory to load an application s data the error message is CFM error 2810 Getting this error means that the Mach memory space is fully allocated One solution is to quit Mach increase the Mach heap size and re launch Machren Power Machren User s Guide 243 When CFM fails to find enough memory to load an application s code the error message is Frag load err 108 Getting this error means that the system memory space is fully allocated One solution is to quit Mach decrease the Mach heap size and re launch Mach It is als
418. trategies See the section entitled Configuring and Managing Sendmail in the System Manager s Manual section of the MachIen CD ROM Power Machren User s Guide 181 mail 1 is a flexible interactive application for composing reading and filing electronic messages During composition mail allows editing and reviewing of outbound messages and the inclusion of text from files and or received mail While reading messages mail provides commands to browse display save delete and respond to messages mail has numerous options to tailor its services to your preferences These options are set in the mailrc file and are stored in your home directory An example mailrc file follows MachTen standard mail customization file When named mailrc and found in your home directory Mail will use these settings run long messages thru more 20 lines a pop set crt 20 tell mail to show 20 lines of headers a pop set screen 20 ask for subject line for each messag set ask always ask for cc recipients at end of each msg set askcc when sending to an alias list include self set metoo set mail archive folder name set folder MailFolder set shell type for any or set SHELL bin csh set editor name for e command set EDITOR usr uchb vi an example personal mailing list mail to goodfriends will be delivered to all in list alias goodfriends joe sally bill 182 Power Machren User s Guide If you
419. ty Log 198 10 15 9 3 The Tip Configuration Database 198 10 15 9 4 Hardware Flow Control 200 10 15 9 5 Tip Login Script 201 10 15 9 6 Header Compression 202 10 15 9 7 Setting a Default Route 202 10 15 9 8 Setting the MTU 203 10 15 10 Configuring Mach as a Dial In SLIP Server 203 10 15 10 1 Serial Port Set Up 203 10 15 10 2 Login Authentication 204 10 15 10 3 The Sliplogin Program 205 10 15 10 4 SLIP Session Termination 205 10 15 10 5 Manual Connections to SLIP Servers 206 Power Machren Users Guide 10 15 10 6 Logging In 10 15 11 Starting SLIP 10 15 11 1 Testing Connectivity 10 15 11 2 Stopping SLIP 10 15 11 3 C Shell Scripts to Expedite SLIP Connections 11 0 Mach Programming Environment 11 1 11 2 11 3 11 4 11 5 Mach Development Tools 11 1 1 Programs Libraries and Include Files 11 1 2 Documentation 11 1 3 Program Sources PEF and XCOFF Shared Libraries 11 3 1 Shared Library Production 11 3 2 Run Time and Compile Time Libraries 11 3 3 Run Time and Compile Time Naming Conventions Traditional UNIX Libraries Header Files 11 5 1 Pre Defined Names Compiling Sources 11 6 1 Ada 11 6 2 C 11 6 3 Objective C 11 6 4 C 11 6 5 Fortran 11 6 6 Java Linking Executables xi 207 207 208 209 210 213 213 213 217 218 219 219 220 220 221 221 222 222 224 224 225 226 226 227 228 229 xii Power Machren User s Guide 11 7 1 ld 229 11 7 2 mkpef 229 11 8 To make or pmake 23
420. ude debugging info which causes symbol table information to be included in the executable for debugging purposes We will use this later gnatl which displays a compilation listing on the screen Here is the screen output from this command with our annotations GNATMAKE 3 05 960607 Copyright 1995 Free Software Foundation Inc test_factorial ali being checked gt test_factorial adb time stamp mismatch test_factorial needs to be compiled invoke the compiler and display the listing gcc c g gnatl test_factorial adb GNAT 3 05 960607 Copyright 1991 1996 Free Software Foundation Inc Compiling test_factorial adb source file time stamp 1996 09 22 15315247 with Ada Text_IO with Ada Integer_Text_I0 procedure Test_Factorial is Demonstrates the factorial function Author Michael B Feldman The George Washington University Copyright 1996 Michael B Feldman All Rights Reserved Last Modified August 1996 DOAN AOFWNEH ray Power Machren User s Guide A1 5 Tils Answer Positive 12 13 6 function Factorial N IN Positive return Positive is 14 ES Computes the factorial of N N recursively 16 Pre N is defined Lys Post returns N 18 19 Result Positive 20 21 begin Factorial 22 23 if N 1 then 24 Result 1 stopping case 25 else 26 Result N Factorial N 1 recursion OAs end if 28 29 return R
421. und xsetroot grey Start a console terminal xconsole iconic amp Start the User s Custom Client Scripts that are selected for autolaunch client_autolaunch Start some programs xterm geometry 80x24 100 20 ls n hostname T hostname amp xclock geometry 50x50 1 1 amp Start a window manager WINDOW_MANAGER olvwm WINDOW_MANAGER twm WINDOW_MANAGER mwm WINDOW_MANAGER afterstep Power Machren User s Guide 259 if x usr X11 bin SWINDOW_MGR then if WINDOW_MANAGER afterstep then LOW_COLOR xdpyinfo grep depth of root window 8 planes if n SLOW_COLOR then if r S HOME steprce 8bit then exec afterstep f SHOME steprce 8bit else exec afterstep f usr X11 lib X11 afterstep system steprc 8bit fi fi fi exec SWINDOW_MANAGER else exec usr X11 bin xterm fi The startup script begins by calling the xrdb client which reads in any system wide resources defined in the file usr X11 lib X11 xinit Xresources if present Resources that you want available to all users and all clients displaying to the server should be defined in this file Resources will be discussed in more detail in section 12 2 1 2 Resources X Application Preferences The script then runs the xmodmap client to load a custom keyboard mapping file from usr X11 lib X11 xinit Xmodmap if present You will have no need to change your keyboard mapping if you are using a U S keyboard as the X serv
422. uration in etc nis conf The etc nis conf file controls the sequence and internet addresses of a list of NIS version 3 servers Like the etc yp conf file the etc nis conf file contains nisserver entries and domainname entries The nisserver entries define NIS version 3 servers to contact and the order in which they are contacted The domainname entries override server specifications and map all operations for a specified domainname to a specified nisserver The nisserver entries have the following form nisserver 10 0 0 30 nisserver 10 0 0 31 The domainname entries have the following form domainname tenon com Power Machren User s Guide 145 8 4 Set NIS Database Search Order The order in which data files and remote data sources are searched to satisfy a request is important By providing for an ordered search of data local data can specify overrides to host names user names or other information that is special to local operations If a request is not satisfied by looking locally remote data sources are searched in the order specified in their configuration files The etc nsswitch conf file contains line by line entries that specify the data sources and the search order for each of the types of NIS data requests that are supported by the Mach NIS and YP software In the etc nsswitch conf file nisplus and nis are used to refer to NIS version 3 protocol operations nis and yp are used to refer to NIS version 2 protocol operati
423. urse Note that Prof Feldman has made available online the first eight chapters of the Instructor s Manual for the book available at http www seas gwu edu faculity mfeldman cs1 im index html Ada 95 The Lovelace Tutorial by David A Wheeler Springer Verlag ISBN 0 387 94801 5 This tutorial introduces Ada to those who already know another programming language It is divided into a large number of small sections most of which end in a question to improve understanding Ada 95 The Craft of Object Oriented Programming by John English Prentice Hall September 1996 This book introduces Ada as a first language The site contains 3 sample chapters a downloadable set of examples and related bits and pieces Software Engineering with Ada Third Edition by Grady Booch Doug Bryan Charles Peterson Addison Wesley C 2 Power Machren User s Guide Ada in Action with Practical Programming Examples by Do While Jones Available on the internet at ftp owens ridgecrest ca us pub users d do_while ada_in_action Alternative site ftp lo pan ridgecrest ca us pub users d do_while ada_in_action Books Suitable for a First Course in Programming suggested by Michael Feldman and available at the Ada Home Page http www adahome com These book are written especially for students without programming experience who are learning Ada as their first language Ada from the Beginning Second Edition by J Skansholm
424. utobaud feature selects the correct baud rate 10 15 11 Starting SLIP If you have logged in to a terminal server that supports SLIP your IP address will be reported back to you as part of the login On some systems after login verification is complete it is necessary to type slip and note the address that is reported back This is the IP address assigned by the server to your end of the serial line connection being established Break out of tip closing the tip session but not hanging up the modem by typing lt Control Z gt At this point the message cannot synchronize with hayes modem may be printed and the DTR signal from the Macintosh to the modem will be off This behavior is not a problem as long as the modem does not drop the connection that is it stays off hook In addition your modem should be configured to ignore the Data Terminal Ready DTR signal from the Macintosh Next reserve the tty port for SLIP using slattach 8 sbin slattach dev ttyfa lt baud rate gt 208 Power Machren User s Guide lt baud rate gt sets the speed of the connection 2400 baud for example Configure the SLIP interface using ifconfig 8 Note that a netmask is not explicitly specified ifconfig will default to the proper netmask in typical configurations however for SLIP interfaces configured as part of a subnet implementation a proper subnetmask must be specified lt src ip address gt represent
425. volume name A path name relative to the current working directory begins with a The File Manager is not case sensitive when matching file names however it does not ignore diacritical marks MacOS file names are not case sensitive however Tenon s extension enables case sensitivity in Tenon s UFS file system 6 2 3 Access Permissions Permissions for files on local volumes are based on the order and manner in which programs open them Files can be opened for reading writing or exclusive read write Write access can be denied on an individual file basis by locking it via the Finder s Get Info dialog box The File Manager also prevents locked files in the Trash from being deleted on an Empty Trash request Setting a volume to read only by hardware or software prevents any changes to all files on that volume Power Machren User s Guide 93 6 2 4 Time Stamps The Macintosh File Manager saves three time stamps for each file the time the file was created the time the file was last modified and the time the file was last backed up rarely used in the Macintosh world 6 2 5 Aliases An alias is a special kind of file that represents a file folder or volume 6 3 Mache FFS MachIens implementation of the UNIX Fast File System FFS allows fast file systems to be stored within Macintosh HFS files Storing a fast file system in a file allows existing volumes to be used without the need for additional partiti
426. w At this point you may wish to set up a user account for yourself Refer to section 5 6 6 Setting Up User Accounts Once the system recognizes a user it sets the current working directory executes a series of commands to perform any automatic startup processing checks to see if any electronic mail has arrived and prints a prompt indicating that the system is waiting for input To establish a new password use the passwd 1 command just as you did before as root For non root logins a is the default prompt for sh 1 users for csh 1 users the default prompt string includes your user name host name and the character in the form username host tt When this is done you will have changed the password for the current user It is now up to you to remember the password as there is no way to look up a password in Mach 52 Power Machren User s Guide 4 2 Mach e Windows The Mach windows environment is a menu oriented system enabling the user to create and control multiple command interpreter windows It is created after you log in on the login console and is controlled by wind 8 the Mach window daemon The windows environment closely follows the Macintosh user interface standard The windows of each Macintosh program are logically grouped together All UNIX style terminal windows are grouped together as Mach windows Each window is a Macintosh zoom window with a title bar scroll bar z
427. w it originally came from The window positions itself where it was before being minimized as shown in Figure 40 fim i om mete ET 2 Figure 40 The Restored Window 274 Power Machren User s Guide 12 2 2 9 Displaying a Window Menu and Making Selections Each window has a Window menu that contains functions for controlling the window Step 1 Display the Window Menu The Window menu is attached to the window frame Use the menu button in the upper left corner of each window to display it To display the Window menu point to the menu button and then press and hold the third button The menu is displayed as long as you hold the button down don t release the button yet See Figure 41 The OpenLook Window Menu Step 2 Choose a Function from the Menu While still holding the select button down drag the pointer down the menu As the pointer moves it highlights the button for each available selection Drag the pointer until you highlight the Full Size function Release the mouse button The Full Size function causes the window to expand to fill the entire screen vertically Figure 41 The OpenLook Window Menu Please refer to section 12 2 3 2 Mouse Button Mapping Three Button Mouse Configuration Power Machren User s Guide 275 Step 3 Restore the Window to its Original Size Display the Window menu again point to the Window menu button in the upper left corner o
428. ware Foundation GNAT is part of the GNU project What is GNAT Mac GNAT Mac is a GNAT compiler hosted on the Macintosh that produces code for that platform The compiler is included with Mach It also runs under Power Mach and Professional Mach UNIX systems that run as Macintosh applications The compiler runs as a UNIX program The GNAT Mac Development Project GNAT for the Macintosh is the product of a team effort This project has been supported in part by the Ada Technology Insertion Program Partners ATIP P under contract C96 175929 Support was also provided through INEL Idaho National Engineering Laboratory The GNAT Mac Technical Team consisted of e Professor Michael Feldman Jim Hopper e Dr John Matthews Dr Art Evans This team worked with Ada Core Technologies and Tenon to develop GNAT Mac and the Mach product A1 2 Power Machren User s Guide Ada Core Technologies provides commercial support for GNAT and related software including maintenance porting of Ada83 applications to Ada95 porting of GNAT to new hardware platforms training and consulting ACT can be contacted at Ada Core Technologies 73 Fifth Avenue Suite 11 B New York City NY 10003 info gnat com ACT maintains a site that holds the latest versions of the Macintosh compilers and all documentation at ftp pubmcada gnat mac com usr users macada public or log in to ftp gnat mac comas user pubmcada no password an
429. ways close the MachTen Controls control panel to activate the slide bar settings Machten Controls Scheduling Use the buttons to access Priority Configuration Screens Networking Copyright 1994 Tenon Intersystems Figure 49 Mach Control Panel Power Machren User s Guide 299 12 3 2 Getting Started With X The following is a road map for information on starting customizing operating and maintaining the X server e Beginning launch and use of the X server is found in section 12 1 The X Desktop e Ifyou want to reconfigure the default X server or learn more about its capabilities before launching it refer to section 12 2 3 The X Server Program Three button mouse remote font server and international non U S keyboard users must consult this section before launching the X server The online manual pages XMachTen XServer and X are useful and convenient references General information on the operation of Mach is found in this User s Guide 12 3 3 Building X Applications Most of the distributed X client executable files in the usr X11 bin directory have been created from the source files in base src X11 R6 see section 2 2 2 Accessing Mach Sources from the CD ROM This section discusses the general procedure for creating X client applications under Mach The Makefile in X client software is generated automatically by the imake program The program combines machi
430. wd Mach contains features to automate the process of launching the operating system logging in and creating a default Mach windows environment Once logged in you can automate the launching of the X server and its management by xdm The combined features will allow your X server environment to be completely controlled by the X Display Management system from the moment your Macintosh is powered on Automatic Launch of an XDM Managed X Server System managers will typically configure xdm to start the X server and display a login window when Mach boots This can be accomplished by the following configuration steps Edit the etc rc conf file and set the START_xdm variable to yes e Add an account to your etc master passwd file The account will serve as a default user shell from which actual user xdm sessions are started adduser xdmuser p MyXdmPass s bin csh Power Machren User s Guide 291 e Just prior to the invocation of the wind program add the environment variable WIND_RESET to the login file in the home directory of the xdmuser account setenv WIND_RESET exec usr bin wind The default X desktop environment will be taken from a xsession file in the home directory of the user logging in through the xdm window The WIND_ RESET variable will cause the Mach windows environment to exit when the X server window is closed via the Mach File menu e Create a file named usr loc
431. xample suppose you have a main program hello adb and a package p from file p ads and you perform the following steps Enter gcc c hello adb to compile the main program Enter gcc c p ads to compile package p Edit file p ads Enter gnatbind hello ali Hee iy At this point the file p ali contains an out of date time stamp since the file p ads has been edited The attempt at binding fails and the binder generates the following error messages error hello adb must be recompiled p ads has been modified error p ads has been modified and must be recompiled Now both files must be recompiled as indicated and then the bind can succeed generating a main program You need not normally be concerned with the contents of this file but it is similar to the following int __main_priority return 1 extern int gnat_argc extern char gnat_argv A2 48 Power Machren User s Guide extern int gnat_exit_status void main int argc char argv argc argv g at arge argc gnat_argv argv __gnat_initialize system__task_specific_data elabb p elabs _ada_hello __gnat_finalize exit gnat_exit_status unsigned helloB 0x86c26330 unsigned system__standard_libraryS 0x06371136 unsigned pS 0x4361339a unsigned systems 0x430ca9a6 unsigned system__storage_elementsB 0xc925
432. xecutable The arguments following mainprog ali are passed to the linker uninterpreted They typically include the names of object files for units written in other languages than Ada and any library references required to resolve references in any of these foreign language units or in pragma Import statements in any Ada units This list may also include linker switches gnatlink determines the list of objects required by the Ada program and prepends them to the list of objects passed to the linker gnatlink also gathers any arguments set by the use of pragma Linker_Options and adds them to the list of arguments presented to the linker Power Machren User s Guide A2 57 A2 6 2 Switches for gnatlink The following switches are available with the gnatlink utility o exec name gnatlink name exec name specifies an alternative name for the generated executable program If the o switch is omitted the executable is called the name of the main unit So gnatlink try ali creates an executable called try Causes additional information to be output including a full list of the included object files This switch option is most useful when you want to see what set of object files are being used in the link step The option to include debugging information causes the C bind file in other words b_mainprog c to be compiled with g In addition the binder does not delete the b_mainprog c
433. xporting and mounting In each NFS server the etc exports file lists the directories that the server will permit others to access NFS security is controlled by the etc exports file only file systems that are listed in this file are accessible over NFS Access to exported file systems can be limited to certain hosts on your network or made available to all other hosts Clients may access files on the server by mounting the server s exported directories A Mach client can mount a directory when the system is launched or the superuser can explicitly mount and unmount directories by issuing mount 8 and umount 8 commands When a client mounts a directory it does not make a copy of that directory Instead the NFS software mounting mechanism invokes a series of remote procedure calls to enable the client to transparently access the directories on the server s disk When a file system is mounted by an NFS client it appears in the client s file system as does a local file system NFS makes all files within an NFS system appear as a single file system The NFS protocols use Remote Procedure Calls RPCs and User Datagram Protocol UDP transfers to provide transparent access to users of the client machine Each time the client needs data from a mounted directory the client NFS software makes a remote procedure call to the server Because NFS uses RPC calls that operate over UDP NFS is stateless This means that the server can crash and
434. y 2 2 1 2 Manual Reconfiguration The following table lists the files you must edit for the indicated configuration change domain name change etc hosts etc resolv conf etc sendmail cf host name change etc hosts etc re conf local host change etc sendmail cw local host change IP address change etc hosts network service change for example etc inetd conf disabling ftpd NFS server change etc fstab etc hosts 30 Power Machren User s Guide route change etc hosts etc re conf local service change for example etc rc local starting httpd at Mach boot up If you are changing the local host name and or address be sure to reboot Mach after updating the appropriate files in order to put them into effect 2 2 2 Accessing Mach Sources from the CD ROM The Mach files may be accessed directly from the CD ROM rather than copying them to your hard disk Although CD ROMs typically have slower access times than hard disks this configuration significantly reduces the hard disk footprint necessary to take full advantage of the Mach distribution The Source_FFS supplied with Mach is 400MB in size It will be mounted automatically when Mach starts up In order to access files directly from the CD the CD must be online visible on the desktop and be mounted under MachIen The default etc fstab file will mount the Mach CD on the path volume CDROM if the CD is onl
435. y to all windows This option can be useful when displaying X applications over slow serial links Power Machren User s Guide 281 12 2 3 2 Mouse Button Mapping Many X clients assume the mouse has three buttons The X server simulates the middle and right mouse buttons with keystrokes By default the lt Left Arrow gt key generates middle button events and the lt Right Arrow gt key generates right button events The real mouse button generates left button events The lt Open Apple gt or lt Command gt key is the lt Meta gt or when shifted the lt Alt gt modifier lt Meta gt can also be obtained by pressing the lt Up Arrow gt key The lt Down Arrow gt key duplicates the lt Control gt key lt Meta gt lt Control gt and lt Shift gt are often used in combination with other keystrokes or mouse clicks For example the terminal emulator xterm pops up menus in response to lt Control gt middle and lt Control gt right The original function of the arrow keys may be obtained by holding down the lt Option gt key while pressing one of the arrow keys Normal arrow key functions are also restored when you re map the middle and right mouse buttons using the mbm and mbr server startup options or when you configure the server to accept the lt Option mouse key gt combination using the mo startup option Three Button Mouse Configuration Several commercial three button mice are offered for the Macin
436. you may not use gcc without a c switch to compile and link in one step This is because the binder must be run and currently gcc cannot be used to run the GNAT binder g options Generate debugging information This information is stored in the object file and copied from there to the final executable file by the linker where it can be read by the debugger You must use the g switch if you plan on using the debugger opt ions are used to choose the debugging format if more than one is available see the gcc manual for more details Sidart Direct GNAT to search the dir directory for source files needed by the current compilation see section A2 4 4 Search Paths and the Run Time Library RTL o file This switch is used in gcc to redirect the generated object file Do not use it with GNAT because it causes the object file and ALI file to have different names and locations These files should always be kept together O n n controls the optimization level n 0 No optimization the default setting if no 0 appears n 1 Normal optimization the default if you specify 0 without an operand n 2 Extensive optimization n 3 Extensive optimization with automatic inlining This applies only to inlining within a unit See section A2 4 3 10 Subprogram Inlining Control for details on control of inter unit inlining Power Machren User s Guide A2 31 Ss Use in place of
437. ystem The tip configuration database is described below 10 15 9 2 Tip Activity Log The file var flog aculog is an administrative file that logs all dialing activity done by tip It can be used to track who is calling which numbers and for how long 10 15 9 3 The Tip Configuration Database The etc remote file see remote 1 is the primary database file used by tip to describe SLIP hosts and the modem s setup used to gain host access Mach is shipped with a SLIP entry for a hypothetical system named joeslip in etc remote which you will need to modify depending on your system configuration joeslip dv dev ttya br 2400 cu dev ttya at hayes pn 5551212 du sa 89 0 0 2 sm 225 0 0 0 da 89 0 0 1 st slip ls etc login script joe Power Machren User s Guide 199 Each field in the entry is delimited by colons and describes the following characteristics joeslip The system name assigned to the connection This is used when tip is invoked to establish the connection tip s joeslip br The serial port speed baud rate designator for the SLIP connection Modify this field as necessary to match the baud rate of your modem according to the following table br entry Modem Baud Rate 50 14 4 Kbps 75 28 8 Kbps 110 57 6 Kbps 300 300 bps 600 600 bps 1200 1200 bps 1800 1800 bps 2400 2400 bps 4800 4800 bps 9600 9600 bps 19200 19 2 Kbps 38400 38 4 Kbps 200
438. ystem Folder Start Up Items folder The XDM Session The user session is started when a user logs into the xdm login window The session is controlled by an executable shell script called xsession in the logged in user s home directory If this file is not found xdm runs a default session from the file usr lib X11 xdm Xsession You can copy your local xinitrc file to xsession and customize it as needed When the last client typically the window manager client in the xsession file exits the session completes and xdm presents a new login window The xsession file must have execute privilege Use the command chmod 755 xsession to make the xsession file executable Power Machren User s Guide 293 12 2 5 X Over Serial Lines Under Mach you may run X client applications over serial lines to display on your local X server using the Serial Line Internet Protocol SLIP the Point to Point Protocol PPP or with the aid of a remote AppleTalk to Internet router Apple Remote Access Information on configuring PPP or SLIP for Mach is found in sections 10 15 8 Using PPP and 10 15 9 Using SLIP and in http www tenon com support PPP The wm backing store X server startup option is a potentially useful option when displaying X clients over slow serial lines This option causes the server to save a local copy of a window s contents when the window becomes obscured by an overlapping window As windows are re
439. yy Shows the storage pool being used for an allocator at end procedure name Shows the finalization cleanup procedure for a scope if expr then expr else expr Conditional expression equivalent to the x y z construction in C target source A conversion with floating point truncation instead of rounding A2 42 Power Machren User s Guide target source A conversion that bypasses normal Ada semantic checking In particular enumeration types and fixed point types are treated simply as integers target source Combines the above two cases y mod y ie rem y A division or multiplication of fixed point values which are treated as integers without any kind of scaling free expr storage_pool xxx Shows the storage pool associated with a free statement freeze typename actions Shows the point at which typename is frozen with possible associated actions to be performed at the freeze point reference itype Reference and hence definition to internal type itype function name arg arg arg Intrinsic function call labelname label Declaration of label labelname expr amp amp expr amp amp expr amp amp Expr A multiple concatenation same effect as expr amp expr amp expr but handled more efficiently constraint_error Raise the Constraint_Error exception expression reference A pointer to the result of evaluating expression target type source expression An unchecked conversion of source ex

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents

Manuel d’installation  User Manual - Data Display Group    自転車発電機 取扱説明書 - 静岡県地球温暖化防止活動推進センター  Samsung Мікрохвильова піч "Соло" MW83GR/BWT Керівництво користувача  Meireles EV8 9558 SP cooker  医療機関での携帯電話等の使用指針について(PDF 2.6MB)  取扱説明書 - セルスター工業  PRO1250D-CT-M-bus-MID-V1.11  Enquête publique - Liaison Intercantonale d`Évitement Nord  

Copyright © All rights reserved. Failed to retrieve file